Vorspann

12.09.2006

23:39 Uhr

Seite 1

PHYSICS

L A B O R AT O R Y E X P E R I M E N T S

Vorspann

12.09.2006

23:39 Uhr

Seite 2

Dear customer,
this catalogue of physics laboratory experiments for universities, colleges, high schools etc. is a valuable and
extensive work of scientific literature for experiment-oriented education purposes. It includes numerous successful
and classical experiments playing an essential role in every physics laboratory course. The experiments have been
field-tested over and over again and countless enthusiastic customers all over the world have been inspired
by them.
Our team of experienced scientists has set great store on using both classical equipment, such as oscilloscopes,
recorders etc., and modern interface systems like our Cobra3 system for the experiments. This is why you will often
find several versions for one experiment. Just choose the experiment version which best meets your specific
requirements.
If you need help in selecting the right experiments, our sales representatives in your country would be more than
happy to assist you.
We hope you enjoy our manual and look forward to your questions.
Phywe Systeme GmbH & Co. KG

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG

Robert-Bosch-Breite 10
D-37079 Gttingen Germany
Phone + 49/551/604- 0
Fax
+ 49/551/604 -115
www.phywe.com
[email protected]

About Phywe

Founded in Gttingen, Germany in 1913 by Dr. Gotthelf Leimbach, Phywe Systeme GmbH & Co. KG quickly advanced
to one of the leading manufacturers of scientific equipment.
Over this period of more than 90 years Phywe has been putting quality and innovation into its products as a
fundamental requirement.
As a well known international supplier in the fields of science and engineering we have made a significant impact on
the market through high quality equipment.
Phywe products are made in Germany and in use throughout the world in the fields of education und research, from
primary schools right through to university level.
Up-to-date educational systems, planning and commissioning of scientific and engineering laboratories to meet
specific requirements are our daily business.
As a supplier of complete, fully developed and established systems, Phywe provides teaching and learning systems
for students as well as teacher demonstration experiments. The system ranges from simple, easy to operate
equipment intended for student use up to coverage of highly sophisticated and specialised university equipment
demands.
Phywe Systeme GmbH & Co. KG has achieved a very high standard based on research and technology and through
exchange of experiences with universities and high schools as well as with professors and teachers.
As experienced and competent manufacturer, we would gladly assist you in the
selection of the "right" experiments for your particular curricula.

Mechanics
Phywe
in the University City of Gttingen

Measurement techniques

Natural sciences have a longstanding

tradition in Gttingen. More than 40 Nobel
prizewinners coming from all sorts of
scientific disciplines and numerous university
institutes successfully conduct research in
practically all areas of science.

The following research institutions and

university institutes are located in Gttingen:
Academy of Science, several Max-Planck
institutes, the German Primate Centre, the
Centre of Molecular Physiology of the Brain,
the Centre of Molecular Life Science
to name just a few.

We are in contact with these institutions and

exchange our views with them to ensure that
the latest trends and scientific innovations
are always reflected in the product range of
Phywe Systeme GmbH & Co. KG.

A Center of Natural Sciences in Germany

Nobel Price winner

Prof. Otto Hahn visiting
PHYWE in 1966

GTTINGEN is a city of teaching and research. Scientific equipment, teaching

equipment and laboratory installations developed and produced in this city are famous
throughout the world.
Gttingen would not be what it is without its university.
Georgia Augusta was founded in 1734 and by 1777 it was Germanys largest
university, with 700 students. It still is one of the leading universities in Germany, with
14 faculties, significant scientific facilities and more than 30,000 students.
The gracious Goose Girl (Gnseliesel) on the market place well is the most kissed girl
in Germany. Why? Because every newly graduated doctor must kiss the cold beauty on
her bronze mouth. That is Gttingen tradition.
Doctors kiss for the Goose Girl

 catalogues, brochures
and more
PHYSICS CHEMISTRY BIOLOGY
The comprehensive catalogue for physics, chemistry
and biology. Additionally you can find a large number of
laboratory materials and an insight in our particularly
successful teaching systems TESS, Cobra3 and
Natural Sciences on the board.
Available in English and Spanish.

Laboratory Experiments
The experiments in the Phywe publication series Laboratory Experiments
are intended for the heads of laboratories,
colleges of advanced technology, technical
colleges and similar institutions and also
for advanced courses in high schools.
Laboratory Experiments Physics is
also available on CD-ROM.
Available in English.
For the student system Advanced Optics
and Laser Physics a special brochure
is available in English.
Special brochures
Additionally there are special brochures for our particularly successful
teaching systems TESS (available in
German, English, French and Spanish),
Cobra3 (available in German, English)
and Natural Sciences on the board
(available in German, English).

Phywe is uncomplicated
Handbooks

Physics

To help you in selecting your experiments, we have added pictograms to several of our experiments.
These pictograms give you a quick overview of the most important features of the experiments and provide
you with all the essential information at a glance.

New Products
New products which have been launched in the last few months. Here
you will also find particularly successful experiments with new additional
features to offer you even more measurement and experiment
possibilities.

Our Best-Sellers
Particularly successful and reliable products which have been field-tested
over and over again in numerous countries - some for many years. We
would be more than happy to provide you with references upon request.

Computer-Assisted Experiments with our

Cobra3 PC Interface
A large number of experiments can be performed in a particularly comfortable and elegant way with the help of our Cobra3 measurement interface. All you need is a PC. The advantage is that you can process the data
particularly well using a PC.

PC interfaced instruments
Some Phywe devices already have an interface included.
These instruments can be connected directly to a PC where you can use
the Phywe measure Software to work with the data.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 5

Laboratory Experiments, Physics

The experiments in the PHYWE Publication Series Laboratory Experiments Physics are intended for the
heads of physics laboratory courses at universities, colleges of advanced technology, technical colleges and
similar institutions and also for advanced courses in high schools.
All experiments are uniformly built-up
and contain references such as
Related topics and Principle and task
to introduce the subject.
Theory and evaluation states full theory
involved and shows graphical and numerical
experimental results including error calcules.

Picture and
Equipment List guarantee time-saving
and easy conducting of the experiment.

LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS
PHYSICS
Klaus Hermbecker
Ludolf von Alvensleben
Regina Butt
Andreas Grnemaier
Robin Sandvo

Example of
measurement
parameters

Laboratory Experiments

Experimental literature

16502.12

Laboratory Experiments Physics

6 Laboratory Experiments, Physics

Print Version

No. 16502.32

CD

No. 16502.42

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments, Physics

The present volume which has been developed by PHYWE, complements the previously existing collection
of about 230 experiments in twenty-six chapters as the following comprehensive Table of Contents shows.
In this brochure we present the experiments in short form. The experiments can be ordered or offered
completely or partially, if desired, in accordance with the Comprehensive Equipment Lists. On request, we
will gladly send you detailed experimental descriptions.

You can order the experiments as follows:

You
Whatcan
you order
need: the experiments as follows:

Didactically adapted descriptions of

experiments easy,
direct preparation
by the students is
possible

Hall effect module,

11801.00

Hall effect, p-Ge, carrier board

11805.01

1
1

Coil, 600 turns

06514.01

Iron core, U-shaped, laminated

06501.00

Pole pieces, plane

06489.00

Hall probe, tangent., prot. cap

13610.02

Power supply 0-12 V DC/6 V, 12 V AC

13505.93

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Connecting cord, l = 100 mm, red

07359.01

Connecting cord, l = 100 mm, blue

07359.04

Connecting cord, l = 500 mm, red

07361.01

Connecting cord, l = 500 mm, blue

07361.04

Connecting cord, l = 500 mm, black

07361.05

Cobra3 Basic Unit

12150.00

Power supply, 12 V

12151.99

Tesla measuring module

12109.00

Cobra3 Software Hall

14521.61

RS 232 data cable

14602.00

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Quantity
Order No.

Please specify this

Order No. if you would
like to order the complete
experiment.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Hall effect in p-germanium with Cobra3
P2530111

Comprehensive experiments
cover the entire range of classical
and modern physics

Complete equipment offering

modular experimental set-up
multiple use of individual devices,
cost effective and flexible

Excellent measurement accuracy

results agree with theory

Developed and proven by

practicians unproblematical and
reliable performance

Computer-assisted experiments
simple, rapid assessement of the
results

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 7

Summary

Mechanics

1.4.04-00

Viscosity measurements with the falling ball viscometer

1.4.05-00

Surface tension by the ring method (Du Nouy method)

1.4-06-11

Surface tension by the pull-out method with Cobra3

1.4.07-00

Barometric height formula

1.4.08-00

Lift and drag (resistance to flow)

1.1

Measurement Techniques

1.1.01-00

Measurement of basic constants: length, weight and time

1.5

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

1.2

Statics

1.5.01-00

Vibration of strings

1.2.01-00

Moments

1.5.03-11

Velocity of sound in air with Cobra3

1.2.02-00

Modulus of elasticity

1.5.04-01/11 Acoustic Doppler effect

1.2.03-00

Mechanical hysteresis

1.5.05-15

1.3

Dynamics

1.5.06-01/15 Velocity of sound using Kundts tube

1.3.01-01

Hookes law

1.3.01-11

Hookes law with Cobra3

1.3.03-01/05 Newtons second law / Air track or Demonstration track

1.3.03-11/15 Newtons second law with Cobra3 /
Air track or Demonstration track
1.3.05-01/05 Laws of collision / Air track or Demonstration track
1.3.05-11/15 Laws of collision with Cobra3 /
Air track or Demonstration track
1.3.07-01

Free fall

1.3.07-11

Free fall with Cobra3

1.3.09-01

Determination of the gravitational constant

with a Cavendish balance

1.3.11-00

Projectile motion

1.3.12-00

Ballistic Pendulum

Chladni figures with FG-Module

1.5.07-01/15 Wavelengths and frequencies with a Quincke tube

1.5.08-11

Resonance frequencies of Helmholtz resonators

with Cobra3

1.5.09-11

Interference of acoustic waves, stationary waves

and diffraction at a slot with Cobra3

1.5.10-00

Optical determination of velocity of sound in liquids

1.5.11-00

Phase and group velocity of ultrasonics in liquids

1.5.12-00

Temperature dependence of the Velocity of sound in liquids

1.5.13-00

Stationary ultrasonic waves, determination of wavelength

1.5.14-00

Absorption of ultrasonic in air

1.5.15-15

Ultrasonic diffraction at different single

and double slit systems

1.5.16-15

Ultrasonic diffraction at different multiple slit systems

1.5.17-15

Diffraction of ultrasonic waves at a pin hole

and a circular obstacle

1.3.13-01

Moment of inertia and angular acceleration

1.5.18-00

1.3.13-11

Moment of inertia and angular acceleration

with Cobra3

Diffraction of ultrasound at a Fresnel zone plate /

Fresnels zone construction

1.5.19-15

Interference of two identical ultrasonic transmitters

1.3.15-00

Moment and angular momentum

1.5.20-00

Interference of ultrasonic waves by a Lloyd mirror

1.3.16-01

Centrifugal force

1.5.21-11

Determination of the velocity of sound (sonar principle)

1.3.16-11

Centrifugal force with Cobra3

1.5.22-00

Ultrasonic Michelson-Interferometer

1.3.18-00

Mechanical conservation of energy / Maxwells wheel

1.5.23-00

Ultrasonic diffraction by a straight edge

1.3.19-00

Laws of gyroscopes / 3-axis gyroscope

1.5.24-15

Ultrasonic Doppler effect

1.3.20-00

Laws of gyroscopes / cardanic gyroscope

1.3.21-00

Mathematical pendulum

1.6

Handbooks

1.3.22-00

Reversible pendulum

Physics Experiments Linear Motion

1.3.23-01

Pendulum oscillations / variable g pendulum

Physics Demonstration Experiments

Magnet Board Mechanics 1

1.3.23-11

Pendulum oscillations with Cobra3

1.3.25-01

Coupled Pendula

1.3.25-11

Coupled Pendula with Cobra3

1.3.26-11

Harmonic oscillations of spiral springs

Springs linked in parallel and series

1.3.27-01

Forced Oscillations Pohls pendulum

1.3.27-11

Forced Oscillations Pohls pendulum;

Determination of resonance frequencies by Fourier analysis

1.3.28-01

Magnet Board Mechanics 2

Optics

2.1

Geometrical Optics

Moments of inertia of different bodies / Steiners theorem

2.1.01-00

Measuring the velocity of light

1.3.28-11

Moments of inertia of different bodies /

Steiners theorem with Cobra3

2.1.02-00

Laws of lenses and optical instruments

2.1.03-00

1.3.30-00

Torsional vibrations and torsion modulus

Dispersion and resolving power of the prism

and grating spectroscope

1.3.31-00

Moment of inertia and torsional vibrations

2.2

Interference

1.3.32-00

The propagation of a periodically excited continuous

transverse wave

2.2.01-00

Interference of light

Phase velocity of rope waves

2.2.02-00

Newtons rings

2.2.03-00

Interference at a mica plate according to Pohl

1.3.33-00

1.4

Mechanics of Liquids and Gaseous Bodies

2.2.04-00

Fresnels zone construction / zone plate

1.4.01-00

Density of liquids

2.2.05-00

Michelson interferometer

1.4.02-00

Surface of rotating liquids

2.2.06-00

1.4.03-00

Viscosity of Newtonian and non-Newtonian liquids

(rotary viscometer)

Coherence and width of spectral lines with Michelson

interferometer

2.2.07-00

Refraction index of air and CO2 with Michelson interferometer

8 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Summary
2.3

Diffraction

3.4

2.3.01-00

Diffraction at a slit and Heisenbergs uncertainty principle

3.4.01-00

Vapour pressure of water at high temperature

2.3.02-00

Diffraction of light at a slit and an edge

3.4.02-00

2.3.03-00

Intensity of diffractions due to pin hole diaphragms

and circular obstacles

Vapour pressure of water below 100C /

Molar heat of vaporization

3.4.03-00

Boiling point elevation

2.3.04-00

Diffraction intensity for multiple slits and grids

3.4.04-00

Freezing point depression

2.3.05-00

Determination of the diffraction intensity at slit

and double slit systems

3.5

Transport and Diffusion

2.3.06-00

Diffraction intensity through a slit and a wire

Babinets theorem

2.4

Photometry

2.4.02-01

Photometric law of distance

2.4.02-11

Photometric law of distance with Cobra3

2.4.04-00

Lamberts law

Phase Transitions

3.5.01-01/15 Stefan-Boltzmanns law of radiation

3.5.02-00

Thermal and electrical conductivity of metals

3.6

Applied Thermodynamics

3.6.01-00

Solar ray Collector

3.6.02-00

Heat pump

3.6.03-00

Heat insulation / Heat conduction

3.6.04-01/15 Stirling engine

2.5

Polarisation

2.5.01-00

Polarisation by quarterwave plates

2.5.02-00

Polarimetry

2.5.03-00

Fresnels equations theory of reflection

2.5.04-00

Malus law

2.6

Applied Optics

2.6.01-00

Faraday effect

2.6.02-00

Kerr effect

2.6.03-00

Recording and reconstruction of holograms

2.6.04-00

CO2-laser

2.6.05-11

LDA Laser Doppler Anemometry with Cobra3

4.1.01-01

Measurement of small resistance

2.6.07-01

Helium Neon Laser

4.1.01-15

Ohms Law with FG-Module

2.6.08-00

Optical pumping

4.1.02-00

Wheatstone Bridge

2.6.09-00

Nd-YAG laser

4.1.03-00

Internal resistance and matching in voltage source

2.6.10-00

Fibre optics

4.1.04-01/15 Temperature dependence of different resistors

and diodes

3.7

Handbooks
Glas jacket system
Demonstration Experiments Physics Magnetic Board Heat

4
4.1

Electricity
Stationary Currents

2.6.11-00

Fourier optics 2f Arrangement

2.6.12-00

Fourier optics 4f Arrangement Filtering and reconstruction

4.1.06-01/15 Current balance/

Force acting on a current-carrying conductor

2.7

Handbooks

4.1.07-00

Semiconductor thermogenerator

Advanced Optics and Laser Physics Handbook 13

4.1.08-00

Peltier heat pump

Physics Demonstration Experiments Magnet Board Optics

4.1.09-01

Characteristic curves of a solar cell

4.1.09-15

Characteristic curves of semiconductors with FG-Module

4.1.11-00

Characteristic and efficiency of PEM fuel cell

and PEM electrolyser

4.1.12-00

Faradays law

4.1.13-15

Second order conductors. Electrolysis with FG-Module

Thermodynamics

3.1

Thermal Expansion

3.1.01-00

Thermal expansion in solids and liquids

3.2

4.2

Electric Field

4.2.01-00

Electrical fields and potentials in the plate capacitor

Ideal and Real Gases

4.2.02-00

Charging curve of a capacitor

3.2.01-01

Equation of state of ideal gases

4.2.02-15

3.2.01-15

Equation of state of ideal gases with Cobra3

Switch-on behaviour of a capacitor and an inductivity

with FG-Module

3.2.02-01

Heat capacity of gases

4.2.03-00

Capacitance of metal spheres and of a spherical capacitor

4.2.04-01

Coulombs law / Image charge

4.2.04-15

Coulombs law with Cobra3

4.2.05-00

Coulomb potential and Coulomb field of metal spheres

Dielectric constant of different materials

3.2.02-11

Heat capacity of gases with Cobra3

3.2.03-00

Maxwellian velocity distribution

3.2.04-00

Thermal equation of state and critical point

3.2.05-00

Adiabatic coefficient of gases Flammersfeld oscillator

4.2.06-00

3.2.06-00

Joule-Thomson effect

4.3

Magnetic Field

3.3

Calorimetry, Friction Heat

4.3.01-00

Earths magnetic field

3.3.01-01

Heat capacity of metals

4.3.02-01/15 Magnetic field of single coils / Biot-Savarts law

3.3.01-11

Heat capacity of metals with Cobra3

4.3.03-01/15 Magnetic field of paired coils in Helmholtz arrangement

3.3.02-00

Mechanical equivalent of heat

4.3.04-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Magnetic moment in the magnetic field

Laboratory Experiments Physics 9

Summary
4.3.05-00

Magnetic field outside a straight conductor

5.2.21-01/11/15 Rutherford experiment

4.3.06-00

Magnetic field inside a conductor

5.2.22-01/11/15 Fine structure of the
-spectrum of 241Am

4.3.07-11

Ferromagnetic hysteresis

5.2.23-01/11/15 Study of the
-energies of 226Ra

4.3.08-00

Magnetostriction with the Michelson interferometer

5.2.24-01/11/15 Energy loss of
-particles in gases

4.4

Electrodynamics

5.2.31-00

Electron absorption

5.2.32-00

-spectroscopy

5.2.41-01/11

Law of distance and absorption of gamma

or beta rays

4.4.01-00

Transformer

4.4.02-01/15 Magnetic induction

4.4.03-01/11 Inductance of solenoids
4.4.04-01/11 Coil in the AC circuit with Cobra3
4.4.05-01/15 Capacitor in the AC circuit
4.4.06-01/11 RLC Circuit with Cobra3

5.2.42-01/11/15 Energy dependence of the -absorption coefficient

5.2.44-01/11/15 Compton effect
5.4.45-01/11/15 Internal conversion in 137mBa

4.4.07-00

Rectifier circuits

5.2.46-01/11/15 Photonuclear cross-section /

Compton scattering cross-section

4.4.08-00

RC Filters

5.2.47-01/11/15 X-ray fluorescence and Moseleys law

4.4.09-01/15 High-pass and low-pass filters

4.4.10-00

RLC measuring bridge

5.3

Solid-state Physics

4.4.11-00

Resistance, phase shift and power in AC circuits

5.3.01-01

Hall effect in p-germanium

4.4.12-11

Induction impulse

5.3.01-11

Hall effect in p-germanium with Cobra3

4.5

Electromagnetic Oscillations and Waves

4.5.02-00

Coupled oscillating circuits

4.5.04-00

Interference of microwaves

4.5.05-00

Diffraction of microwaves

4.5.06-00
4.5.08-00
4.5.09-00

Frustrated total reflection / Microwaves

4.6

Handbooks

5.3.02-01/11

Hall effect in n-germanium

5.3.03-00

Hall effect in metals

5.3.04-01

Band gap of germanium

5.3.04-11

Band gap of germanium with Cobra3

Diffraction and polarization of microwaves

5.4

X-ray Physics

Radiation field of a horn antenna / Microwaves

5.4.01-00
5.4.02-00
5.4.03-00
5.4.04-00

Characteristic X-rays of copper

Characteristic X-rays of molybdenum
Characteristic X-rays of iron
The intensity of characteristic X-rays as a function of anode
current and anode voltage
Monochromatization of molybdenum X-rays
Monochromatization of copper X-rays
K
doublet splitting of molybdenum X-rays / fine structure
K
doublet splitting of iron X-rays / fine structure
Duane-Hunt displacement law and Planck's quantum of action
Characteristic X-ray lines of different anode materials /
Moseley's Law; Rydberg frequency and screening constant
Absorption of X-rays
K- and L-absorption edges of X-rays /
Moseley's Law and the Rydberg constant
Examination of the structure of NaCl monocrystals with
different orientations
X-ray investigation of different crystal structures /
Debye-Scherrer powder method
X-ray investigation of crystal structures / Laue method
Compton scattering of X-rays
X-ray dosimetry
Contrast medium experiment with a blood vessel model
Determination of the length and position of an object
which cannot be seen
Diffractometric Debye-Scherrer patterns of powder samples
with the three cubic Bravais lattices
Diffractometric Debye-Scherrer patterns of powder samples
with diamond structure (germanium and silicon)
Diffractometric Debye-Scherrer patterns of powder samples
with a hexagonal lattice structure
Diffractometric Debye-Scherrer patterns of powder samples
with a tetragonal lattice structure
Diffractometric Debye-Scherrer patterns of powder samples
with a cubic powder sample
Diffractometric measurements to determine the intensity of
Debye-Scherrer reflexes using a cubic lattice powder sample
Diffractometric Debye-Scherrer measurements
for the examination of the texture of rolled sheets

Demonstration Experiments Physics

Electricity/Electronics on the Magnetic Board 1 + 2

Physical Structure of Matter

5.4.05-00
5.4.06-00
5.4.07-00
5.4.08-00
5.4.09-00
5.4.10-00
5.4.11-00
5.4.12-00

5.1

Physics of the Electron

5.1.01-00

Elementary charge and Millikan experiment

5.1.02-00

Specific charge of the electron e/m

5.4.13-00

5.1.03-11

Franck-Hertz experiment with Hg-tube

5.4.14/15-00

5.1.03-15

Franck-Hertz experiment with Ne-tube

5.1.04-01/05 Plancks quantum of action from photoelectric effect

(line separation by interference filters)
5.1.05-01/05 Plancks quantum of action from the photoelectric effect
(line separation by defraction grating)
5.1.06-00

Fine structure, one-electron and two-electron spectra

5.1.07-00

Balmer series / Determination of Rydbergs constant

5.1.08-00

Atomic spectra of two-electron systems: He, Hg

5.1.10-05

Zeeman effect

5.1.11-01/11 Stern-Gerlach experiment

5.1.12-00

Electron spin resonance

5.1.13-00

Electron diffraction

5.2

Radioactivity

5.2.01-01

Half-life and radioactive equilibrium

5.4.16-00
5.4.17-00
5.4.18-00
5.4.19-00
5.4.20-00
5.4.21-00
5.4.22-00
5.4.23-00
5.4.24-00
5.4.25-00
5.4.26-00

5.2.01-11

Half-life and radioactive equilibrium with Cobra3

5.4.27-00

5.2.03-11

Poissons distribution and Gaussian distribution

of radioactive decay with Cobra3
Influence of the dead time of the counter tube

5.4

Handbooks

5.2.04-00

Visualisation of radioactive particles / Diffusion cloud chamber

X-Ray Experiments

5.2.20-15

Alpha-Energies of different sources with MCA

Interface-System Cobra3 Physics and Chemistry/Biology

10 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

1
Mechanics
Contents
1.1
1.1.01-00

Measurement Techniques
Measurement of basic constants: length, weight and time

1.2
1.2.01-00
1.2.02-00
1.2.03-00

Statics
Moments
Modulus of elasticity
Mechanical hysteresis

1.3
1.3.01-01
1.3.01-11
1.3.03-01/05
1.3.03-11/15

Dynamics
Hookes law
Hookes law with Cobra3
Newtons second law / Air track or Demonstration track
Newtons second law with Cobra3 / Air track or
Demonstration track
Laws of collision / Air track or Demonstration track
Laws of collision with Cobra3 / Air track or Demonstration track
Free fall
Free fall with Cobra3
Determination of the gravitational constant
with a Cavendish balance
Projectile motion
Ballistic Pendulum
Moment of inertia and angular acceleration
Moment of inertia and angular acceleration with Cobra3
Moment and angular momentum
Centrifugal force
Centrifugal force with Cobra3
Mechanical conservation of energy / Maxwells wheel
Laws of gyroscopes / 3-axis gyroscope
Laws of gyroscopes / cardanic gyroscope
Mathematical pendulum
Reversible pendulum
Pendulum oscillations / variable g pendulum
Pendulum oscillations with Cobra3
Coupled Pendula
Coupled Pendula with Cobra3
Harmonic oscillations of spiral springs
Springs linked in parallel and series
Forced Oscillations Pohls pendulum
Forced Oscillations Pohls pendulum;
Determination of resonance frequencies by Fourier analysis
Moments of inertia of different bodies / Steiners theorem
Moments of inertia of different bodies /
Steiners theorem with Cobra3
Torsional vibrations and torsion modulus
Moment of inertia and torsional vibrations

1.3.05-01/05
1.3.05-11/15
1.3.07-01
1.3.07-11
1.3.09-01
1.3.11-00
1.3.12-00
1.3.13-01
1.3.13-11
1.3.15-00
1.3.16-01
1.3.16-11
1.3.18-00
1.3.19-00
1.3.20-00
1.3.21-00
1.3.22-00
1.3.23-01
1.3.23-11
1.3.25-01
1.3.25-11
1.3.26-11
1.3.27-01
1.3.27-11
1.3.28-01
1.3.28-11
1.3.30-00
1.3.31-00

12 Laboratory Experiments Physics

1.3.32-00
1.3.33-00
1.4
1.4.01-00
1.4.02-00
1.4.03-00
1.4.04-00
1.4.05-00
1.4-06-11
1.4.07-00
1.4.08-00
1.5
1.5.01-00
1.5.03-11
1.5.04-01/11
1.5.05-15
1.5.06-01/15
1.5.07-01/15
1.5.08-11
1.5.09-11
1.5.10-00
1.5.11-00
1.5.12-00
1.5.13-00
1.5.14-00
1.5.15-15
1.5.16-15
1.5.17-15
1.5.18-00
1.5.19-15
1.5.20-00
1.5.21-15
1.5.22-00
1.5.23-00
1.5.24-15
1.6

The propagation of a periodically excited continuous transverse

wave
Phase velocity of rope waves
Mechanics of Liquids and Gaseous Bodies
Density of liquids
Surface of rotating liquids
Viscosity of Newtonian and non-Newtonian liquids
(rotary viscometer)
Viscosity measurements with the falling ball viscometer
Surface tension by the ring method (Du Nouy method)
Surface tension by the pull-out method with Cobra3
Barometric height formula
Lift and drag (resistance to flow)
Mechanical Vibration Acoustics
Vibration of strings
Velocity of sound in air with Cobra3
Acoustic Doppler effect
Chladni figures with FG-Module
Velocity of sound using Kundts tube
Wavelengths and frequencies with a Quincke tube
Resonance frequencies of Helmholtz resonators with Cobra3
Interference of acoustic waves, stationary waves and diffraction
at a slot with PC interface
Optical determination of velocity of sound in liquids
Phase and group velocity of ultrasonics in liquids
Temperature dependence of the Velocity of sound in liquids
Stationary ultrasonic waves, determination of wavelength
Absorption of ultrasonic in air
Ultrasonic diffraction at different single and double slit systems
Ultrasonic diffraction at different multiple slit systems
Diffraction of ultrasonic waves at a pin hole and a circular obstacle
Diffraction of ultrasound at a Fresnel zone plate /
Fresnels zone construction
Interference of two identical ultrasonic transmitters
Interference of ultrasonic waves by a Lloyd mirror
Determination of the velocity of sound (sonar principle)
Ultrasonic Michelson-Interferometer
Ultrasonic diffraction by a straight edge
Ultrasonic Doppler effect
Handbooks
Physics Experiments Linear Motion
Physics Demonstration Experiments Magnet Board Mechanics 1
Physics Demonstration Experiments Magnet Board Mechanics 2

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Measurement Techniques

Measurement of basic constants: length, weight and time 1.1.01-00

What you can learn about

Length

Diameter

Inside diameter thickness

Curvature

Vernier

Weight resolution

Time measurement

Principle:
Caliper gauges, micrometers and
spherometers are used for the accurate measurement of lengths, thicknesses, diameters and curvatures. A
mechanical balance is used for
weight determinations, a decade
counter is used for accurate time
measurements. Measuring procedures, accuracy of measurement and
reading accuracy are demonstrated.

What you need:

Vernier calipers, stainless steel
Micrometer
Spherometer
Light barrier, compact
Digital counter, 4 decades
Alternatively to 13600.93:
Timer 2-1

03010.00
03012.00
03017.00
11207.20
13600.93

1
1
1
1
1

13607.99

Knife-edge measuring faces

for inside measurement
Slide

Guide bar

Vernier

Depth measuring

Graduated scale

Movable jaw blade

Precision balance, double pan type, 500 g

Set of precision weights, 1 mg...200 g, in case
Iron column
Iron wire, d = 1.0 mm, l = 10 m
Aluminium foil, 4 sheets
Glass plate, 100 mm x 85 mm x 1 mm
Watch glass, d = 80 mm
Watch glass, d = 100 mm
Watch glass, d = 125 mm
Glass tube, AR-glass, straight,
d = 8 mm, l = 80 mm, 10 pcs.
Glass tubes, AR-glass, d = 24 mm, l = 120 mm
Cubes, set of 8
Fishing line on spool, d = 0,5 mm, l = 100 mm
Steel balls with eyelet, d = 32 mm
Rod with hook
Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 630 mm
Tripod base -PASSRight angle clamp -PASSMeasuring tape, l = 2 m
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 50 cm

44011.50
44070.20
03913.00
06104.01
06270.00
08203.00
34572.00
34574.00
34575.00

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

36701.65
45158.00
02214.00
02090.00
02466.01
02051.00
02027.55
02002.55
02040.55
09936.00
07361.01
07361.04
07361.02

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1

Fixed
jaw
blade

Measuring faces
for depth
measurement

Measuring faces
for outside
measurement

Vernier caliper

Tasks:
1. Determination of the volume of
tubes with the caliper gauge.
2. Determination of the thickness of
wires, cubes and plates with the
micrometer.
3. Determination of the thickness of
plates and the radius of curvature
of watch glasses with the spherometer.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Measurement of basic constants:
length, weight and time
P2110100
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 13

Mechanics

Statics

1.2.01-00 Moments
What you can learn about

Moments

Couple

Equilibrium

Statics

Lever

Coplanar forces

Principle:
Coplanar forces (weight, spring balance) act on the moments disc on
either side of the pivot. In equilibrium, the moments are determined as
a function of the magnitude and
direction of the forces and of the
reference point.

What you need:

m = 0.1 kg

Moments disk

02270.00

Precision spring balance 1 N

03060.01

r2 = 0.12 m

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 400 mm

02026.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Swivel clamp -PASS-

02041.55

Bolt with pin

02052.00

Weight holder for slotted weights

02204.00

Slotted weights, 10 g, coated black

02205.01

Slotted weight, 50 g, coated black

02206.01

Fishing line on spool, d = 0,5 mm, l = 100 mm

02090.00

Rule, plastic, 200 mm

09937.01

=  /2.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Moments
P2120100

Moment as a function of the distance between the origin of the coordinates

and the point of action of the force.

Tasks:
1. Moment as a function of the distance between the origin of the
coordinates and the point of action of the force,
2. moment as a function of the angle
between the force and the position vector to the point of action
of the force,
3. moment as a function of the force.

14 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Statics

Modulus of elasticity 1.2.02-00

What you can learn about

Youngs modulus

Modulus of elasticity

Stress

Deformation

Poissons ratio

Hookes law

Principle:
A flat bar is supported at two points.
It is bent by the action of a force
acting at its centre. The modulus of
elasticity is determined from the
bending and the geometric data of
the bar.

What you need:

Material

Dimensions [mm]

E
N m-2

Steel

10 1.5

2.059 1011

17570.00

Steel

10 2

2.063 1011

Knife-edge with stirrup

03015.00

Bolt with knife edge

02049.00

Steel

10 3

2.171 1011

Weight holder for slotted weights

02204.00

Steel

151.5

2.204 1011

Precision spring balance 1 N

03060.01

Steel

201.5

2.111 1011

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Aluminium

102

6.702 1010

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 630 mm

02027.55

Brass

102

9.222 1010

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Slotted weights, 10 g, coated black

02205.01 10

Slotted weight, 50 g, coated black

02206.01

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Dial gauge, 10/0.01 mm

03013.00

Holder for dial gauge

03013.01

Flat rods, set

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Modulus of elasticity
P2120200

Table 1: The modulus of elasticity for different materials.

Tasks:
1. Determination of the characteristic curve of the dial gauge
2. Determination the bending of flat
bars as a function
of the force
of the thickness, at constant
force
of the width, at constant force
of the distance between the
support points at constant force
3. Determination the modulus of
elasticity of steel, aluminium and
brass.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 15

Mechanics

Statics

1.2.03-00 Mechanical hysteresis

What you can learn about

Mechanical hysteresis

Elasticity

Plasticity

Relaxation

Torsion molulus

Plastic flow

Torque

Hookes law

Principle:
The relationship between torque and
angle of rotation is determined when
metal bars are twisted. The hysteresis curve is recorded.

Tasks:
1. Record the hysteresis curve of
steel and copper rods.
2. Record the stress-relaxation curve
with various relaxation times of
different materials.

What you need:

Torsion apparatus

02421.00

Torsion rod, steel, d = 2 mm, l = 500 mm

02421.01

Torsion rod, Al, d = 2 mm, l = 500 mm

02421.02

Torsion rod, Al, d = 2 mm, l = 400 mm

02421.03

Torsion rod, Al, d = 2 mm, l = 300 mm

02421.04

Torsion rod, Al, d = 3 mm, l = 500 mm

02421.05

Torsion rod, Al, d = 4 mm, l = 500 mm

02421.06

Torsion rod, brass, d = 2 mm, l = 500 mm

02421.07

Torsion rod, copper, d = 2 mm, l = 500 mm

02421.08

Precision spring balance 1 N

03060.01

Precision spring balances, 2.5 N

03060.02

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Support base -PASS-

02005.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 630 mm

02027.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Mechanical hysteresis curve for the torsion of a copper rod of 2 mm diameter

and 0.5 m long.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Mechanical hysteresis
P2120300
16 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Statics

Hookes law 1.3.01-01

What you can learn about

Hooke's law

Spring constant

Limit of elasticity

Elastic hysteresis

Elastic after-effect

Principle:
The validity of Hooke's law is determined for two helical springs with
different spring constants. The elongation of the helical spring, which
depends on the deforming force, is
studied by means of the weights of
masses. For comparison, a rubber
band, for which no proportionality
exists between the exerted force and
the resulting elongation, is submitted to the same forces.

Tasks:
1. Determining the spring constants
of helical springs
2. Study of the elongation of a rubber band

What you need:

Theory (Hooks Law)

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 1000 mm

02028.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Cursor for scale, 2 pieces, plastic, red

02201.00

Weight holder for slotted weights

02204.00

Slotted weights, 10 g, coated black

02205.01

Slotted weights, 10 g, silver colour

02205.02

Slotted weight, 50 g, coated black

02206.01

Slotted weights, 50 g, silver bronzing

02206.02

Helical springs, 3 N/m

02220.00

Helical springs, 20 N/m

02222.00

Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm

02412.00

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Holding pin

03949.00

Square section rubber strip, l = 10 m

03989.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Hookes law
P2130101
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Fw
N
2,0

Experiment

X
X
X
X

1,5

X
X
X
X

1,0

X
10

12

14

16

18

X
X
X
X

0,5

X
X
X
X
X

0
0

l
cm

Acting weight Fw as a function of the extension l for a rubber band

(elastic hysteresis).

Laboratory Experiments Physics 17

Mechanics

Statics

1.3.01-11 Hookes law with Cobra3

What you can learn about

Spring constant

Limit of elasticity

Extension and compression

Principle:
The validity of Hookes Law is proven
using various helical springs with
different spring constants. In comparison, the behaviour of a stretched
rubber band is examined, for which
there is no proportionality between
acting force and resulting extension.

Tasks:
1. Calibration of the system (movement sensor and force sensor).
2. Measurement of the tensile force
as a function of the path for three
different helical springs and a rubber band.
3. Determination of the spring constant and evaluation of a hysteresis curve.
4. Verification of Hookes law.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Power supply 12V/2A
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Software Cobra3 Force/Tesla
Square section rubber strip, l = 10 m
Newton measuring module
Newton Sensor
Movement sensor with cable
Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair
Adapter, BNC socket - 4 mm plug
Helical springs, 3 N/m
Helical springs, 20 N/m
Helical springs, 30 N/m
Right angle clamp -PASSSupport rod -PASS-, square, l = 1000 mm
Stand tube
Barrel base -PASSBench clamp -PASSPlate holder, opening width 0...10 mm
Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm
Nylon thread on spool, d = 0,4 mm, l = 50 mm
PC, Windows 95 or higher

12150.00
12151.99
14602.00
14515.61
03989.00
12110.00
12110.01
12004.10
07542.27
07542.20
02220.00
02222.00
02224.00
02040.55
02028.55
02060.00
02006.55
02010.00
02062.00
03001.00
02095.00

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Characteristic elongation curve for a helical spring with D = 20 N/m.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Hookes law with Cobra3
P2130111
18 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Dynamics

Newtons second law / Air track or Demonstration track

1.3.03-01/05

What you can learn about

Velocity

Acceleration

Force

Acceleration of gravity

Principle:
The distance-time law, the velocitytime law, and the relationship between mass, acceleration and force
are determined with the aid of the
air track rail for uniformly accelerated motion in a straight line.

Set-up of experiment P2130301 with air track

What you need:

Experiment P2130305 with demo track
Experiment P2130301 with air track
Timer 4-4
Light barrier, compact
Precision pulley
Air track rail
Blower 230V/50Hz
Pressure tube, l = 1.5 m
Glider for air track
Diaphragm, l = 100 mm
Slotted weights, 1 g, polished
Slotted weights, 10 g, coated black
Slotted weight, 50 g, coated black
Stop, adjustable
Endholder for air track rail
Starter system, mechanical with release
Starter system for motion track
Magnet with plug for starter system
Fork with plug
Tube with plug
Plasticine, 10 sticks
Hook with plug
Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm
Weight holder, 1g, silver bronzing
Barrel base -PASSSupport rod -PASS-, square, l = 400 mm
Right angle clamp -PASSShutter plate for low friction cart, w = 100 mm
Needle with plug
Demonstration Track, Aluminium, l = 1.5 m
Cart, low friction sapphire bearings
Pulley for demonstration track
Holder for pulley
Weight for low friction cart, 400 g
End holder for demonstration track
Holder for light barrier
Portable Blance, OHAUS CS2000

13605.99
1 1
11207.20
4 4
11201.02
1
11202.17
1
13770.97
1
11205.01
1
11202.02
1
11202.03
1
03916.00 20 20
02205.01
8 8
02206.01
4 4
11202.19
1
11202.15
1
11202.13
1
11309.00
1
11202.14
1 1
11202.08
1 1
11202.05
1 1
03935.03
1 1
11202.07
1 1
02412.00
1 1
02407.00
1 1
02006.55
4
02026.55
4
02040.55
4
11308.00
1
11202.06
1 1
11305.00
1
11306.00
1
11305.10
1
11305.11
1
11306.10
1
11305.12
1
11307.00
4
48892.00
1 1

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

The distance travelled s plotted as a function of the time t ;

m1 = 10 g, m2 = 201 g.

You can find more

Tasks:
Determination of:

experiments in
experimental literature

1. Distance travelled as a function of

time

Linear Motion

3. Acceleration as a function of the

accelerated mass

Order No. 16001.02

(see page 82)

2. Velocity as a function of time

4. Acceleration as a function of
force.

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 100 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 200 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, black, l = 200 cm

07363.01
07363.02
07363.04
07365.02
07365.05

4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
1
1

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Newtons second law /
Air track or Demonstration track
P21303 01/05
Laboratory Experiments Physics 19

Mechanics
1.3.03-11/15

Dynamics

Newtons second law with Cobra3 / Air track or Demonstration track

What you can learn about

Linear motion

Velocity

Acceleration

Conservation of energy

Principle:
According to Newtons 2nd law of
motion for a mass point, the relationship between mass, acceleration
and force are investigated.

Set-up of experiment P2130315 with demo track

What you need:

Experiment P2130315 with demo track
Experiment P2130311 with air track
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3, Translation/ Rotation

14512.61

Light barrier, compact

11207.20

Air track rail

11202.17

Blower 230V/50Hz

13770.97

Pressure tube, l = 1.5 m

11205.01

Glider for air track

11202.02

Slotted weights, 1 g, polished

03916.00

Slotted weights, 10 g, coated black

02205.01

Slotted weights, 50 g, silver bronzing

02206.02

Stop, adjustable

11202.19

Tasks:

Starter system, mechanical with release

11202.13

The distance-time law, the velocitytime law and the relationship between mass, acceleration and force
are determined. The conservation of
energy can be investigated.

1
20

Path-time law.

Magnet with plug for starter system

11202.14

Tube with plug

11202.05

Plasticine, 10 sticks

03935.03

Hook with plug

11202.07

Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm

02412.00

Weight holder, 1 g, silver bronzing

02407.00

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Bosshead

02043.00

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8,

l = 250 mm, d = 10 mm

02031.00

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 100 mm

02030.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm

07363.01

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm

07363.04

Needle with plug

11202.06

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 100 cm 07363.02

Demonstration Track, Aluminium, l = 1.5 m

11305.00

Connecting plug, pack of 2

07278.05

Cart, low friction sapphire bearings

11306.00

Crocodile clips, black, plastic insulation, pack of 10

07276.15

Holder for pulley

11305.11

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Weight for low friction cart, 400 g

11306.10

End holder for demonstration track

11305.12

Portable Blance, OHAUS CS2000

48892.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Newtons second law with Cobra3 /
Air track or Demonstration track
P21303 11/15

20 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Dynamics

Laws of collision / Air track or Demonstration track

1.3.05-01/05

What you can learn about

Conservation of momentum

Conservation of energy

Linear motion

Velocity

Elastic loss

Elastic collision

Principle:
The volocities of two gliders, moving
without friction on an air-cushion
track, are measured before and after
collision, for both elastic and inelastic collision.

Set-up of experiment P2130505 with demo track

What you need:

Experiment P2130505 with demo track
Experiment P2130501 with air track
Air track rail
11202.17
Blower 230V/50Hz
13770.97
Pressure tube, l = 1.5 m
11205.01
Glider for air track
11202.02
Diaphragm, l = 100 mm
11202.03
Tube with plug
11202.05
Needle with plug
11202.06
Fork with plug
11202.08
Rubber bands for fork with plug, 10 pcs.
11202.09
Plate with plug
11202.10
Starter system, mechanical with release
11202.13
Magnet with plug for starter system
11202.14
Endholder for air track rail
11202.15
Slotted weights, 10 g, coated black
02205.01
Slotted weight, 50 g, coated black
02206.01
Light barrier, compact
11207.20
Timer 4-4
13605.99
Portable Blance, OHAUS CS2000
48892.00
Barrel base -PASS02006.55
Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 400 mm
02026.55
Right angle clamp -PASS02040.55
Demonstration Track, Aluminium, l = 1.5 m
11305.00
Cart, low friction sapphire bearings
11306.00
Starter system for motion track
11309.00
Weight for low friction cart, 400 g
11306.10
Shutter plate for low friction cart, w = 100 mm
11308.00
Holder for light barrier
11307.00
End holder for demonstration track
11305.12
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm
07363.01
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 100 cm 07363.02
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm 07363.04

1
1
1
2
2
2 2
1 2
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1 1
1
10 10
6 6
2 2
1 1
1 1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
2 2
2 2
2 2

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Laws of collision /
Air track or Demonstration track
P21305 01/05
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Elastic collision: calculated energies after the collision as functions of the

mass ratio of the gliders.

Tasks:
1. Elastic collision
1.1 The impulses of the two gliders
as well as their sum after the
collision. For comparison the
mean value of the impulses of
the first glider is entered as a
horizontal line in the graph.
1.2 Their energies, in a manner analogous to Task 1.1
1.3 In accordance with the mean
value of the measured impulse of
the first glider before the collision, the theoretical values of the
impulses for the two gliders are
entered for a range of mass
ratios from 0 to 3. For purposes
of comparison the measuring
points (see 1.1) are plotted in the
graph.
1.4 In accordance with the mean
value of the measured energy of
the first glider before the colli-

sion, the theoretical values of the

energy after the collision are
plotted analogously to Task 1.3.
In the process, the measured values are compared with the theoretical curves.
2. Inelastic collision
2.1 The impulse values are plotted as
in Task 1.1.
2.2 The energy values are plotted as
in Task 1.2.
2.3 The theoretical and measured
impulse values are compared as
in Task 1.3.
2.4 As in Task 1.4, the theoretical an
measured energy values are
compared. In order to clearly
illustrate the energy loss and its
dependence on the mass ratios,
the theoretical functions of the
total energy of both gliders and
the energy loss after the collision
are plotted.
Laboratory Experiments Physics 21

Mechanics
1.3.05-11/15

Dynamics

Laws of collision with Cobra3 / Air track or Demonstration track

What you can learn about

Conservation of momentum

Conservation of energy

Linear motion

Velocity

Elastic loss

Principle:
The velocity of two gliders, moving
without friction on an air-cushion
track, are measured before and after
collision, for both elastic and inelastic collision.

Set-up of experiment P2130511 with air track

What you need:

Experiment P2130515 with demo track
Experiment P2130511 with air track
Air track rail
Blower 230V/50Hz
Pressure tube, l = 1.5 m
Glider for air track
Diaphragm, l = 100 mm
Tube with plug
Needle with plug
Fork with plug
Rubber bands for fork with plug, 10 pcs.
Plate with plug
Starter system, mechanical with release
Magnet with plug for starter system
Endholder for air track rail
Slotted weights, 10 g, coated black
Slotted weight, 50 g, coated black
Light barrier, compact
Portable Blance, OHAUS CS2000
Demonstration Track, Aluminium, l = 1.5 m
Cart, low friction sapphire bearings
Starter system for motion track
Weight for low friction cart, 400 g
Shutter plate for low friction cart, w = 100 mm
Holder for light barrier
End holder for demonstration track
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 100 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Power supply 12V/2A
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Software Cobra3, Timer/Counter
Plasticine, 10 sticks
Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 500 mm
Barrel base -PASSBosshead
Stop, adjustable
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 10 cm
Diaphragm, l = 25 mm
PC, Windows 95 or higher

11202.17
13770.97
11205.01
11202.02
11202.03
11202.05
11202.06
11202.08
11202.09
11202.10
11202.13
11202.14
11202.15
02205.01
02206.01
11207.20
48892.00
11305.00
11306.00
11309.00
11306.10
11308.00
11307.00
11305.12
07363.01
07363.02
07363.04
12150.00
12151.99
14602.00
14511.61
03935.03
02032.00
02006.55
02043.00
11202.19
07359.01
11202.04

1
1
1
1
2
2 2
2 2
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1 1
2
4 10
4 6
2 2
1 1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
2 2
2 2
2 2
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
2
2
2
1
2 2
2

Measuring parameters for velocity measurement

Tasks:
1. Elastic collision
A glider whose mass always remains unchanged collides with a
second resting glider at a constant
velocity. A measurement series, in
which the velocities of the first
glider before the collision and the
velocities of both gliders after it
are to be measured, is conducted
by varying mass of the resting
glider.

2. Inelastic collision
A glider, whose mass always remains unchanged, collides with a
constant velocitiy with a second
resting glider. A measurement series with different masses of the
resting glider is performed: the
velocities of the first glider before
the collision and those of both
gliders, which have equal velocities, after it are to be measured.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Laws of collision with Cobra3 /
Air track or Demonstration track
P21305 11/15
22 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Dynamics

Free fall 1.3.07-01

What you can learn about

Linear motion due to constant
acceleration

Laws of falling bodies

Gravitational acceleration

Principle:
A sphere falling freely covers certain
distances. The falling time is measured and evaluated from diagrams.
The acceleration due to gravity can
be determined.

Tasks:
1. To determine the functional relationship between height of fall
and falling time (h = h(t)=1/2 gt2).
2. To determine the acceleration due
to gravity.

What you need:

Falling sphere apparatus

02502.88

Digital counter, 4 decades

13600.93

Timer 2-1

13607.99

Support base -PASS-

02005.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Plate holder, opening width 0...10 mm

02062.00

Cursor for scale, 2 pieces, plastic, red

02201.00

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Alternatively to 13600.93:

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 1000 mm

02028.55

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm

07363.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm

07363.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Free fall
P2130701
Height of fall as a function of falling time.
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 23

Mechanics

Dynamics

1.3.07-11 Free fall with Cobra3

What you can learn about

Linear motion due to constant
acceleration

Laws governing falling bodies

Acceleration due to gravity

Principle:
The fall times t are measured for different heights of fall h. h is represented as the function of t or t2, so
the distance-time law of the free fall
results as
1
h =
g t2
2
Then the measured values are taken
to determine the acceleration due to
gravity g.

Tasks:
Determination of:
Distance time law for the free fall.
Velocity-time law for the free fall.
Precise measurement of the acceleration due to gravity for the free
fall.

What you need:

Falling sphere apparatus
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Power supply 12V/2A
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Software Cobra3, Timer/Counter
Tripod base -PASSSupport rod -PASS-, square, l = 1000 mm
Right angle clamp -PASSMeasuring tape, l = 2 m
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 75 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 150 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 150 cm
PC, Windows 95 or higher

02502.88
12150.00
12151.99
14602.00
14511.61
02002.55
02028.55
02040.55
09936.00
07362.02
07362.04
07364.02
07364.04

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
Height of fall as a function of falling time.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Free fall with Cobra3
P2130711

24 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Dynamics

Determination of the gravitational constant with a Cavendish balance 1.3.09-01

What you can learn about

Law of gravitation

Torsional vibrations

Free and damped oscillations

Forced oscillations

Angular restoring moment

Moment of inertia of spheres
and rods

Steiner`s theorem

Shear modulus

Principle:
Two small lead balls of equal mass
are positioned one at each end of a
beam which is held suspended by a
thin tungsten thread, so that it can
swing freely across its equilibrium
position. When two further, but larger, lead balls held on a swivel arm are
now brought near to the small lead
balls, forces of attraction resulting
from gravitation effect acceleration
of the small balls in the direction of
the larger balls. At the same time,
the twisted metal thread generates a
restoring moment of rotation, so

What you need:

Cavendish-balance, computerized

02540.00

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Circular level with mounting, d = 35 mm

02122.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Determination of the gravitational constant
with a Cavendish balance
P2130901
Output voltage of the free and damped oscillating Cavendish balance.

that the beam is subjected to

damped oscillation across a new
equilibrium position. The gravitational constant can be determined
both from the difference in the angle
of rotation of the different equilibrium positions and from the dynamic
behaviour of the swinging system
during attraction.
An integrated capacitive sensor produces a direct voltage that is proportional to the angle of deflection. This
can be recorded over time by an interface system, and the value of the
angle of rotation that is required be
so determined.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Tasks:
1. Calibrate the voltage of the capacitive angle sensor.
2. Determine the time of oscillation
and the damping of the freely
swinging torsion pendulum.
3. Determine the gravitational constant, using either the acceleration method, the final deflection
method or the resonance method.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 25

Mechanics

Dynamics

1.3.11-00 Projectile motion

What you can learn about

Trajectory parabola

Motion involving uniform
acceleration

Ballistics

Principle:
A steel ball is fired by a spring at different velocities and at different
angles to the horizontal. The relationships between the range, the
height of projection, the angle of inclination, and the firing velocity are
determined.

What you need:

Ballistic unit

11229.10

Recording paper, 1 roll, 25 m

11221.01

Steel ball, hardened and polished, d = 19 mm

02502.01

Two tier platform support

02076.03

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Speed measuring attachment

11229.30

Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A with DC-socket 2.1 mm

13900.99

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Projectile motion
P2131100

Maximum range as a function of the angle of inclination
for different initial

velocity v0: Curve 1 v0 = 5.3 m/s
Curve 2 v0 = 4.1 m/s
Curve 3 v0 = 3.1 m/s

Tasks:
1. To determine the range as a function of the angle of inclination.
2. To determine the maximum height
of projection as a function of the
angle of inclination.
3. To determine the (maximum)
range as a function of the initial
velocity.

26 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Dynamics

Ballistic Pendulum 1.3.12-00

What you can learn about

Potential and kinetic energy

Rotational energy

Moment of inertia

Inelastic collision

Principle of conservation of
momentum

Angular momentum

Measurement of projectile
velocities

Principle:

Tasks:

What you need:

Ballistic unit

11229.10

Ballistic pendulum f. ballistic unit

11229.20

Speed measuring attachment

11229.30

Steel ball, hardened and polished, d = 19 mm

02502.01

Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A with DC-socket 2.1 mm

13900.99

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Ballistic Pendulum
P2131200

1. Measurement of the oscillation

amplitudes of the ballistic pendulum after capturing the steel ball
for the three possible tension
energies of the throwing device.
2. Calculation of the initial velocities
of the ball from the measured
oscillation amplitudes and the
mechanical data of the pendulum
is performed using the approximation formula (3).
3. Plotting of the velocity v of the
steel ball as a function of the
maximum deflection  (090 ) of
the pendulum according to formula (3), taking into consideration
the special mechanical data of the
experiment.
4. Determination of the correction
factor fcor for the utilised pendulum for the conversion of the
velocities determined by using the
approximation formula into the
values obtained from the exact
theory. Correction of the velocity
values from Tasks 2.

Experimental set-up with supplement for direct measurement of the initial

velocity of the ball.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

A classic method of determining the

velocity of a projectile is to shoot the
projectile into a resting mass which
is large compared to the projectiles
mass and hung as a pendulum. In the
process, the projectile remains in the
pendulum mass and oscillates with
it. This is an inelastic collision in
which the momentum remains
unchanged. If the pendulums
mechanical data are known, one can
infer the velocity of the pendulums
mass (including the projectiles mass)
at the lowest point of the
pendulums oscillation from the
amplitude of the pendulums oscillation. The momentum of the two
masses in this phase of the oscillation must thus be equal to the
impulse of the projectile before it
struck the pendulum. If one knows
the masses of the pendulum and the
projectile, one can calculate the
projectiles velocity.
In order to be able to use this measuring principle without danger, the
following set-up is used here: A steel
ball is shot at the mass of a pendulum with the aid of a spring catapult.
The pendulum mass has a hollow
space in which the steel ball is held.
If, additionally, two light barriers and
a time measuring device are available, an independent, direct measurement of the initial velocity of the
ball can be made.

5. If the supplementary devices for

the direct measurement of the
initial velocity are available,
measure the initial velocities corresponding to the three tension
steps of the throwing device by
performing 10 measurements
each with subsequent mean value
calculation. Plot the measured
points in the diagram from Task 3.
Give reasons for contingent
systematic deviations from the
theoretical curve.
Laboratory Experiments Physics 27

Mechanics

Dynamics

1.3.13-01 Moment of inertia and angular acceleration

What you can learn about

Angular velocity

Rotary motion

Moment

Moment of inertia of a disc

Moment of inertia of a bar

Moment of inertia of a mass
point

Principle:
A moment acts on a body which can
be rotated about a bearing without
friction. The moment of inertia is
determined from the angular acceleration.

Tasks:
From the angular acceleration, the
moment of inertia are determined as
a function of the mass and of the
distance from the axis of rotation.
1. of a disc,
2. of a bar,
3. of a mass point.

What you need:

Turntable with angular scale

02417.02

Aperture plate for turntable

02417.05

Air bearing

02417.01

Inertia rod

02417.03

Holding device with cable release

02417.04

Precision pulley

11201.02

Blower 230V/50Hz

13770.97

Pressure tube, l = 1.5 m

11205.01

Light barrier with counter

11207.30

Power supply 5 V DC/2.4 A with 4 mm plugs

11076.99

Supporting blocks, 10, 20, 30, 40 mm

02070.00

Slotted weights, 1 g, polished

03916.00 20

Slotted weights, 10 g, coated black

02205.01 10

Slotted weight, 50 g, coated black

02206.01

Weight holder, 1g, silver bronzing

02407.00

Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm

02412.00

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 1000 mm

02028.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 400 mm

02026.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Moment of inertia
and angular acceleration
P2131301

Moment of inertia of a mass point as a function of the square of its distance

from the axis of rotation.
28 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Dynamics

Moment of inertia and angular acceleration with Cobra3 1.3.13-11

What you can learn about

Angular velocity

Rotation

Moment

Torque

Moment of inertia

Rotational energy

Principle:
If a constant torque is applied to a
body that rotates without friction
around a fixed axis, the changing
angle of rotation increases proportionally to the square of the time and
the angular velocity proportional to
the time.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Power supply 12V/2A
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Software Cobra3, Translation/ Rotation
Light barrier, compact
Blower 230V/50Hz
Pressure tube, l = 1.5 m
Air bearing
Turntable with angular scale
Holding device with cable release
Aperture plate for turntable
Slotted weights, 1 g, polished
Slotted weights, 10 g, coated black
Slotted weight, 50 g, coated black
Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm
Weight holder for slotted weights
Bench clamp -PASSTripod base -PASSStand tube
Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 250 mm, d = 10 mm
Measuring tape, l = 2 m
Circular level with mounting, d = 35 mm
Bosshead
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 100 cm
PC, Windows 95 or higher

12150.00
12151.99
14602.00
14512.61
11207.20
13770.97
11205.01
02417.01
02417.02
02417.04
02417.05
03916.00
02205.01
02206.01
02412.00
02204.00
02010.00
02002.55
02060.00
02031.00
09936.00
02122.00
02043.00
07363.01
07363.04
07363.02

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
9
3
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Potential energy and additionally the rotational energy.

Tasks:
1. Measurement of the laws of angle
and angular velocity according to
time for a uniform rotation movement.
2. Measurement of the laws of angle
and angular velocity according to
time for a uniformly accelerated
rotational movement.
3. Rotation angle  is proportional to
the time t required for the rotation.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Moment of inertia and angular acceleration
with Cobra3
P2131311

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 29

Mechanics

Dynamics

1.3.15-00 Moment and angular momentum

What you can learn about

Circular motion

Angular velocity

Angular acceleration

Moment of inertia

Newtons laws

Rotation

Principle:
The angle of rotation and angular
velocity are measured as a function
of time on a body which is pivoted so
as to rotate without friction and
which is acted on by a moment. The
angular acceleration is determined
as a function of the moment.

What you need:

Turntable with angular scale

02417.02

Aperture plate for turntable

02417.05

Holding device with cable release

02417.04

Air bearing

02417.01

Precision pulley

11201.02

Pressure tube, l = 1.5 m

11205.01

Blower 230V/50Hz

13770.97

Light barrier with counter

11207.30

Power supply 5 V DC/2.4 A with 4 mm plugs

11076.99

Capacitor 100 nF/250 V, G1

39105.18

Adapter, BNC plug/4 mm socket

07542.26

Weight holder, 1 g, silver bronzing

02407.00

Slotted weights, 1 g, polished

03916.00 20

Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm

02412.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm

07363.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm

07363.01

Circular level with mounting, d = 35 mm

02122.00

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Moment and angular momentum
P2131500

Angle of rotation as a function of time with uniformly accelerated rotary

motion for m = 0.01 kg, r = 0.015 m.

Tasks:
With uniformly accelerated rotary
motion, the following will be determined:
1. the angle of rotation as a function
of time,

3. the angular acceleration as a

function of time,
4. the angular acceleration as a
function of the lever arm.

2. the angular velocity as a function

of time.
30 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Dynamics

Centrifugal force 1.3.16-01

What you can learn about

Centripetal force

Rotary motion

Angular velocity

Apparent force

Principle:
A body with variable mass moves on
a circular path with adjustable radius
and variable angular velocity. The
centrifugal force of the body will be
measured as a function of these
parameters.

Tasks:
Determination of the centrifugal
force as a function
1. of the mass,
2. of the angular velocity,
3. of the distance from the axis of
rotation to the centre of gravity of
the car.

What you need:

Centrifugal force apparatus

11008.00

Car for measurements and experiments

11060.00

Holding pin

03949.00

Laboratory motor, 220 VAC

11030.93

Gearing 30:1

11029.00

Bearing unit

02845.00

Driving belt

03981.00

Support rod with hole, stainless steel, l = 10 cm

02036.01

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Power supply 5 V DC/2.4 A with 4 mm plugs

11076.99

Spring balance holder

03065.20

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Bosshead

02043.00

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Fishing line on spool, d = 0,5 mm, l = 100 mm

02090.00

Transparent spring balances, 2 N

03065.03

Slotted weights, 10 g, coated black

02205.01

Slotted weight, 50 g, coated black

02206.01

Light barrier with counter

11207.30

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Centrifugal force
P2131601
Centrifugal force as a function of the angular velocity v.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 31

Mechanics

Dynamics

1.3.16-11 Centrifugal force with Cobra3

What you can learn about

Centrifugal force

Centripetal force

Rotary motion

Angular velocity

Apparent force

Principle:
A body with variable mass moves on
a circular path with adjustable radius
and variable angular velocity. The
centrifugal force of the body will be
measured as a function of these parameters.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Newton measuring module

12110.00

Newton Sensor

12110.01

Software Cobra3 Force/Tesla

14515.61

Centrifugal force apparatus

11008.00

Car for measurements and experiments

11060.00

Holding pin

03949.00

Laboratory motor, 220 VAC

11030.93

Gearing 30:1

11029.00

Bearing unit

02845.00

Driving belt

03981.00

Support rod with hole, stainless steel, l = 10 cm

02036.01

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Fishing line on spool, d = 0,5 mm, l = 100 mm

02090.00

Slotted weights, 10 g, coated black

02205.01

Slotted weight, 50 g, coated black

02206.01

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Typical evaluation of central force as a function of the square of angular

velocity.

Tasks:
Determination of the centrifugal
force as a function
1. of the mass,
2. of the angular velocity,
3. of the distance from the axis of
rotation to the centre of gravity of
the car.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Centrifugal force with Cobra3
P2131611

32 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Dynamics

Mechanical conservation of energy / Maxwells wheel 1.3.18-00

What you can learn about

Maxwell disk

Energy of translation

Energy of rotation

Potential energy

Moment of inertia

Angular velocity

Angular acceleration

Instantaneous velocity

Gyroscope

Principle:
A disk, which can unroll with its axis
on two cords, moves in the gravitational field. Potential energy, energy
of translation and energy of rotation
are converted into one another and
are determined as a function of time.

Tasks:

What you need:

Support base -PASS-

02005.55

The moment of inertia of the

Maxwell disk is determined.

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 1000 mm

02028.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Using the Maxwell disk,

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

1. the potential energy,

Cursor for scale, 2 pieces, plastic, red

02201.00

2. the energy of translation,

Maxwell wheel

02425.00

3. the energy of rotation,

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm

07363.01

are determined as a function of time.

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm

07363.04

Light barrier with counter

11207.30

Holding device with cable release

02417.04

Plate holder, opening width 0...10 mm

02062.00

Adapter, BNC plug/4 mm socket

07542.26

Capacitor 100 nF/250 V, G1

39105.18

Power supply 5 V DC/2.4 A with 4 mm plugs

11076.99

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Mechanical conservation of energy /
Maxwells wheel
P2131800
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Energy of the Maxwell disk as a

function of time.
1. Negative potential energy
2. Energy of translation
3. Energy of rotation

Laboratory Experiments Physics 33

Mechanics

Dynamics

1.3.19-00 Laws of gyroscopes / 3-axis gyroscope

What you can learn about

Momentum of inertia

Torque

Angular momentum

Precession

Nutation

Principle:
The momentum of inertia of the
gyroscope is investigated by measuring the angular acceleration caused
by torques of different known values.
In this experiment, two of the axes of
the gyroscope are fixed.
The relationship between the precession frequency and the gyro-frequency of the gyroscope with 3 free
axes is examined for torques of different values applied to the axis of
rotation.
If the axis of rotation of the forcefree gyroscope is slightly displaced, a
nutation is induced. The nutation
frequency will be investigated as a
function of gyro-frequency.

What you need:

Gyroscope with 3 axis

02555.00

Light barrier with counter

11207.30

Power supply 5 V DC/2.4 A with 4 mm plugs

11076.99

Additional gyro disk with counter weight

02556.00

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Slotted weights, 10 g, coated black

02205.01

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Laws of gyroscopes / 3-axis gyroscope
P2131900

Determination of the momentum of inertia from the slope of straight line

tR-1 = f(tP).

Tasks:

34 Laboratory Experiments Physics

1. Determination of the momentum

of inertia of the gyroscope by
measurement of the angular
acceleration.

3. Investigation of the relationship

between precession and gyro-frequency and its dependence from
torque.

2. Determination of the momentum

of inertia by measurement of the
gyro-frequency and precession
frequency.

4. Investigation of the relationship

between nutation frequency and
gyro-frequency.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Dynamics

Laws of gyroscopes / cardanic gyroscope 1.3.20-00

What you can learn about

Moment of inertia

Torque

Angular momentum

Nutation

Precession

Chaotic behaviour

Principle:
If the axis of rotation of the forcefree
gyroscope is displaced slightly, a nutation is produced. The relationship
between precession frequency or nutation frequency and gyro-frequency
is examined for different moments of
inertia.
Additional weights are applied to a
gyroscope mounted on gimbals, so
causing a precession.

What you need:

Gyroscope, Magnus type, incl. Handbook

02550.00

1. m2

= 0.163 kg

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

2. m2 m1

= 0.112 kg

Digital stroboscopes

21809.93

3. m1

= 0.051 kg

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Laws of gyroscopes / cardanic gyroscope
P2132000

Tasks:

Note:

1. To determine the precession frequency as a function of the torque

and the angular velocity of the
gyroscope.

A detailed handbook (128 pages)

containing additional experiments is
included, free of charge, in the
equipment.

2. To determine the nutational frequency as a function of the angular velocity and the moment of
inertia.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Precession frequency as a function of the gyro frequency for different additional masses.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 35

Mechanics

Dynamics

1.3.21-00 Mathematical pendulum

What you can learn about

Duration of oscillation

Period

Amplitude

Harmonic oscillation

Principle:
A mass, considered as of point form,
suspended on a thread and subjected
to the force of gravity, is deflected
from its position of rest. The period
of the oscillation thus produced is
measured as a function of the thread
length and the angle of deflection.

What you need:

Light barrier with counter

11207.30

Power supply 5 V DC/2.4 A with 4 mm plugs

11076.99

Steel balls with eyelet, d = 25.4 mm

02465.01

Steel balls with eyelet, d = 32 mm

02466.01

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Cursor for scale, 2 pieces, plastic, red

02201.00

Fishing line on spool, d = 0,5 mm, l = 100 mm

02090.00

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Clamping pads on stem

02050.00

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 1250 mm

02029.55

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Mathematical pendulum
P2132100

Period of the pendulum as a function of the angle of deflection.

Tasks:
1. For small deflections, the oscillation period is determined as a
function of the cord length.
2. The acceleration due to gravity is
determined.
3. The oscillation period is determined as a function of the deflection.

36 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Dynamics

Reversible pendulum 1.3.22-00

What you can learn about

Physical pendulum

Moment of inertia

Steiners law

Reduced length of pendulum

Reversible pendulum

Terrestrial gravitational
acceleration

Principle:
By means of a reversible pendulum,
terrestrial gravitational acceleration
g may be determined from the period of oscillation of a physical pendulum, knowing neither the mass nor
the moment of inertia of the latter.

Tasks:
1. Measurement of the period for
different axes of rotation.
2. Determination of terrestrial gravitational acceleration g.

What you need:

Bearing bosshead for reversing pendulum

02805.00

Support rod, stainless steel, l = 750 mm

02033.00

Bolt with knife edge

02049.00

Power supply 5 V DC/2.4 A with 4 mm plugs

11076.99

Light barrier with counter

11207.30

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Reversible pendulum
P2132200

T2
S
X

1.50

1.56

1.42
30

1.38

40

50

60

X
X

1.34

X
X
X

X
X

1.30

'a

'min

's

'
cm

Period T2 as a function of the position of the axis of rotation of the physical

pendulum.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 37

Mechanics

Dynamics

1.3.23-01 Pendulum oscillations / variable g pendulum

What you can learn about

Oscillation period

Harmonic oscillation

Mathematical pendulum

Physical pendulum

Decomposition of force

Moment of inertia

Principle:
Investigate the oscillation behaviour
of a pendulum (rod pendulum) by
varying the magnitude of the components of the acceleration of gravity which are decisive for the oscillation period. The pendulum that is to
be used is constructed in such a
manner that its oscillation plane can
be progressively rotated from a vertical orientation to a horizontal one.
The angle F, by which the oscillation
plane deviates from its normal vertical position, can be read from a
scale.

Tasks:
1. Measurement of the oscillation
period of the pendulum as a function of the angle of inclination 
of the oscillation plane for two
different pendulum lengths.
2. Graphical analysis of the measured correlations and a comparison with the theoretical curves,
which have been standardised
with the measured value at  = 0.
3. Calculation of the effective pendulum length l for the acceleration of gravity, which is assumed
to be known. Comparison of this
value with the distance between
the pivot point of the pendulum
and the centre of gravity of the
mobile pendulum weight.

What you need:

Variable g-pendulum

02817.00

Holder for light barrier

02817.10

Light barrier, compact

11207.20

Timer 4-4

13605.99

13607.99

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 50 cm

07361.02

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Alternatively to 13605.99:
Timer 2-1

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Pendulum oscillations /
variable g pendulum
P2132301

38 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Oscillation period of the pendulum

as a function of the slope . of the
oscillation plane. The measured
points are plotted above the corresponding theoretical curve (solid
line). Upper curve: L = 270 mm;
lower curve: L = 141 mm.

4. On the moons surface the lunar

acceleration of gravity gm is only
16.6 % of the earths acceleration
of gravity g. Calculate the angle 
and set it on the device such that
the pendulum in the laboratory
oscillates with the same oscillation period with which it would
oscillate on the moon in a perpendicular position. Compare the
measured oscillation period with
the calculated one.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Dynamics

Pendulum oscillations with Cobra3 1.3.23-11

What you can learn about

Oscillation period

Harmonic oscillation

Mathematical pendulum

Physical pendulum

Variable g-pendulum

Decomposition of force

Gravitational force

Principle:
Earths gravitational acceleration g is
determined for different lengths of
the pendulum by means of the oscillating period. If the oscillating plane
of the pendulum is not parallel to the
gravitational field of the earth, only
one component of the gravitational
force acts on the pendulum movement.

Tasks:
1. Determination of the oscillation
period of a thread pendulum as a
function of the pendulum length.
2. Determination of g.
3. Determination of the gravitational acceleration as a function of
the inclination of the pendulum
force.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Power supply 12V/2A
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Software Cobra3, Translation/ Rotation
Movement sensor with cable
Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair
Adapter, BNC socket - 4 mm plug
Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm
Fishing line on spool, d = 0,7 mm, l = 20 mm
Weight holder, 1g, silver bronzing
Steel balls with eyelet, d = 32 mm
Tripod base -PASSSupport rod -PASS-, square, l = 1000 mm
Stand tube
Plate holder, opening width 0...10 mm
Right angle clamp -PASSBench clamp -PASSProtractor scale with pointer
Circular level with mounting, d = 35 mm
Measuring tape, l = 2 m
Pendulum
PC, Windows 95 or higher

12150.00
12151.99
14602.00
14512.61
12004.10
07542.27
07542.20
02412.00
02089.00
02407.00
02466.01
02002.55
02028.55
02060.00
02062.00
02040.55
02010.00
08218.00
02122.00
09936.00
12004.11

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1

Typical measurement result

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Pendulum oscillations with Cobra3
P2132311
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 39

Mechanics

Dynamics

1.3.25-01 Coupled Pendula

What you can learn about

Spiral spring

Gravity pendulum

Spring constant

Torsional vibration

Torque

Beat

Angular velocity

Angular acceleration

Characteristic frequency

Principle:
Two equal gravity pendula with a
particular characteristic frequency
are coupled by a soft spiral spring.
The amplitudes of both pendula are
recorded as a function of time for
various vibrational modes and different coupling factors using a y/t
recorder. The coupling factors are
determined by different methods.

Tasks:
1. To determine the spring constant
of the coupling spring.
2. To determine and to adjust the
characteristic frequencies of the
uncoupled pendula.
3. To determine the coupling factors
for various coupling-lengths using
a) the apparatus constants
b) the angular frequencies for
inphase and in opposite
phase vibration
c) the angular frequencies of the
beat mode.
4. To check the linear relation
between the square of the
coupling-lengths and

What you need:

Pendulum with recorder connection

02816.00

Helical springs, 3 N/m

02220.00

Rod with hook

02051.00

Weight holder for slotted weights

02204.00

Slotted weights, 10 g, coated black

02205.01

Yt recorder, 2 channels

11415.95

Power supply 0-12 V DC/ 6 V, 12 V AC

13505.93

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 630 mm

02027.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 100 cm

07363.02

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm

07363.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm

07363.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Coupled Pendula
P2132501

40 Laboratory Experiments Physics

a) the particular frequencies of

the beat mode
l = 30 cm

b) the square of the frequency for

in opposite phase vibration.
5. To determine the pendulums
characteristic frequency from the
vibrational modes with coupling
and to compare this with the
characteristic frequency of the
uncoupled pendula.

l = 60 cm

l = 90 cm

Amplitude curves of the vibrations of

coupled pendula in the beat case for
three different coupling lengths l as
a function of time.
Speed of recorder: t = 10 s/Div.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Dynamics

Coupled Pendula with Cobra3 1.3.25-11

What you can learn about

Spiral spring

Gravity pendulum

Spring constant

Torsional vibration

Torque

Beat

Angular velocity

Angular acceleration

Characteristic frequency

Principle:
Two equal gravity pendula with a
particular characteristic frequency
are coupled by a soft spiral spring.
The amplitudes of both pendula are
recorded as a function of time for
various vibrational modes and different coupling factors using a y/t
recorder. The coupling factors are
determined by different methods.

Tasks:
1. To determine the spring constant
of the coupling spring.
2. To determine and to adjust the
characteristic frequencies of the
uncoupled pendula.
3. To determine the coupling factors
for various coupling-lengths using
a) the apparatus constants
b) the angular frequencies for
inphase and in opposite
phase vibration
c) the angular frequencies of the
beat mode.

What you need:

Pendulum with recorder connection
Helical springs, 3 N/m
Rod with hook
Weight holder for slotted weights
Slotted weights, 10 g, coated black
Electrolyte capacitors G1, 10 F
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Power supply 12V/2A
Software Cobra3 Universal recorder
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Power supply 0-12 V DC/ 6 V, 12 V AC
Bench clamp -PASSSupport rod -PASS-, square, l = 630 mm
Right angle clamp -PASSMeasuring tape, l = 2 m
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm
PC, Windows 95 or higher

l = 30 cm
02816.00
02220.00
02051.00
02204.00
02205.01
39105.28
12150.00
12151.99
14504.61
14602.00
13505.93
02010.00
02027.55
02040.55
09936.00
07363.01
07363.04

2
1
1
1
5
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
4
4

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Coupled Pendula with Cobra3
P2132511
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

4. To check the linear relation between the square of the couplinglengths and
a) the particular frequencies of
the beat mode
b) the square of the frequency for
in opposite phase vibration.

l = 60 cm

5. To determine the pendulums

characteristic frequency from the
vibrational modes with coupling
and to compare this with the
characteristic frequency of the
uncoupled pendula.

l = 90 cm

Amplitude curves of the vibrations of

coupled pendula in the beat case for
three different coupling lengths
l (30 cm, 60 cm and 90 cm) as a
function of time.
Laboratory Experiments Physics 41

Mechanics

Dynamics

1.3.26-11 Harmonic oscillations of spiral springs Springs linked in parallel and series
What you can learn about

Spring constant

Hookes law oscillations

Limit of elasticity

Parallel springs

Serial springs

Use of an interface

Principle:
The spring constant D is determined
for different experimental set-ups
from the oscillation period and the
suspended mass.

Tasks:
1. Determination of the spring constant D for different springs.
2. Determination of the spring constant for springs linked in parallel.
3. Determination of the spring constant for springs linked in series.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Power supply 12V/2A
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Software Cobra3, Translation/ Rotation
Light barrier, compact
Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm
Weight holder for slotted weights
Slotted weights, 10 g, coated black
Slotted weight, 50 g, coated black
Tripod base -PASSSupport rod -PASS-, square, l = 1000 mm
Stand tube
Rod with hook
Right angle clamp -PASSHelical springs, 3 N/m
Helical springs, 20 N/m
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 100 cm
PC, Windows 95 or higher

12150.00
12151.99
14602.00
14512.61
11207.20
02412.00
02204.00
02205.01
02206.01
02002.55
02028.55
02060.00
02051.00
02040.55
02220.00
02222.00
07363.01
07363.04
07363.02

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
7
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1

Typical measurement result

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Harmonic oscillations of spiral springs
Springs linked in parallel and series
P2132611
42 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Dynamics

Forced Oscillations Pohls pendulum 1.3.27-01

What you can learn about

Angular frequency

Characteristic frequency

Resonance frequency

Torsion pendulum

Torsional vibration

Torque and Restoring torque

Damped/undamped free
oscillation

Forced oscillation

Ratio of attenuation/
decrement

Damping constant

Logarithmic decrement

Aperiodic case

Creeping

Principle:
If an oscillating system is allowed to
swing freely it is observed that the
decrease of successive maximum
amplitudes is highly dependent on
the damping. If the oscillating
system is stimulated to swing by an

What you need:

Torsion pendulum after Pohl

11214.00

Power supply, universal

13500.93

Bridge rectifier, 30 VAC/1 ADC

06031.10

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 25 cm

07360.02

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Forced Oscillations Pohls pendulum
P2132701
Resonance curves for different dampings.

Tasks:
B. Forced oscillation

A. Free oscillation
1. To determine the oscillating
period and the characteristic
frequency of the undamped
case.

1. The resonance curves are to be

determined and to be represented graphically using the
damping values of A.

2. To determine the oscillating

periods and the corresponding
characteristic frequencies for
different damping values. Successive, unidirectional maximum amplitudes are to be plotted as a function of time. The
corresponding ratios of attenuation, the damping constants
and the logarithmic decrements
are to be calculated.

2. The resonance frequencies are

to be determined and are to be
compared with the resonance
frequency values found beforehand.

3. To realize the aperiodic case

and the creeping.

3. The phase shifting between the

torsion pendulum and the stimulating external torque is to be
observed for a small damping
value assuming that in one case
the stimulating frequency is far
below the resonance frequency
and in the other case it is far
above it.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

external periodic torque, we observe

that in the steady state the amplitude is a function of the frequency
and the amplitude of the external
periodic torque and of the damping.
The characteristic frequencies of the
free oscillation as well as the resonance curves of the forced oscillation for different damping values are
to be determined.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 43

Mechanics

Dynamics

1.3.27-11 Forced Oscillations Pohls pendulum

Determination of resonance frequencies by Fourier analysis
What you can learn about

Angular frequency

Characteristic frequency

Resonance frequency

Torsion pendulum

Torsional vibration

Torque

Testoring torque

Damped /undamped free
oscillation

Forced oscillation

Ratio of attenuation /
decrement

Damping constant

Logarithmic decrement

Aperiodic case

Creeping

Chaotic behaviour

Principle:

What you need:

Torsion pendulum after Pohl

11214.00

Power supply, universal

13500.93

Bridge rectifier, 30 VAC/1 ADC

06031.10

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 25 cm

07360.02

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3, Translation/ Rotation

14512.61

Movement sensor with cable

12004.10

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Adapter, BNC socket - 4 mm plug

07542.20

Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm

02412.00

Weight holder, 1g, silver bronzing

02407.00

Support base -PASS-

02005.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 400 mm

02026.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

If an oscillating system is allowed to

swing freely it is observed that the
decrease of successive maximum
amplitudes is highly dependent on
the damping. If the oscillating
system is stimulated to swing by an
external periodic torque, we observe
that in the steady state the amplitude is a function of the frequency
and the amplitude of the external
periodic torque and of the damping.
The characteristic frequencies of the

free oscillation as well as the resonance curves of the forced oscillation for different damping values are
to be determined.
Therefore, the oscillations are
recorded with the Cobra3 systemin
connection with the movement sensor. The curves of the different oscillations are displayed and the necessary quantities for the determination
of the characteristic values can easily becalculated.

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Forced Oscillations Pohls pendulum
Determination of resonance frequencies by Fourier analysis P2132711
Tasks:
A. Free oscillation
1. To determine the oscillating period and the characteristic frequency of the undamped case.
2. To determine the oscillating periods and the corresponding characteristic frequencies for different
damping values. Successive, unidi44 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Recorded curve of the damped oscillation.

B. Forced oscillation
rectional maximum amplitudes are
to be plotted as a function of time.
The corresponding ratios of attenuation, the damping constants and the
logarithmic decrements are to be
calculated.
3. To realize the aperiodic case and
the creeping.

1. The resonance curves are to be

determined and to be represented
graphically using the damping
values of A.
2. The resonance frequencies are to
be determined and are to be compared with the resonance frequency values found beforehand.

3. The phase shifting between the

torsion pendulum and the stimulating external torque is to be
observed for a small damping
value assuming that in one case
the stimulating frequency is far
below the resonance frequency
and in the other case it is far
above it.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Dynamics

Moments of inertia of different bodies / Steiners theorem 1.3.28-01

What you can learn about

Rigid body

Moment of inertia

Centre of gravity

Axis of rotation

Torsional vibration

Spring constant

Angular restoring force

Principle:
The period of vibration of a circular
disc which performs torsional vibrations about various parallel axes, is
measured. The moment of inertia of
the disc is determined as a function
of the perpendicular distance of the
axis of rotation from the centre of
gravity.

What you need:

Rotation axle

02415.01

Disk with diametrical holes

02415.07

Transparent spring balances, 2 N

03065.03

Light barrier with counter

11207.30

Power supply 5 V DC/2.4 A with 4 mm plugs

11076.99

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Rule, plastic, 200 mm

09937.01

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Moments of inertia of different bodies /
Steiners theorem
P2132801

Tasks:
1. Determination of the angular
restoring constant of the spiral
spring.
2. Determination of the moment of
inertia of a circular disc as a function of the perpendicular distance
of the axis of rotation from the
centre of gravity.

Moment (torque) of a spiral spring as a function of the angle of rotation.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 45

Mechanics

Dynamics

1.3.28-11 Moments of inertia of different bodies / Steiners theorem with Cobra3

What you can learn about

Rigid body

Moment of inertia

Centre of gravity

Axis of rotation

Torsional vibration

Spring constant

Angular restoring force

Principle:
The moment of inertia of a solid body
depends on its mass distribution and
the axis of rotation. Steiners theorem elucidates this relationship.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3, Translation/ Rotation

14512.61

Light barrier, compact

11207.20

Angular oscillation apparatus

02415.88

Portable Blance, OHAUS CS2000

48892.00

Flat cell battery, 9 V

07496.10

Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm

02412.00

Weight holder, 1g, silver bronzing

02407.00

Slotted weights, 1 g, polished

03916.00

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Stand tube

02060.00

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm

07363.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm

07363.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 100 cm

07363.02

Typical measuring result

Tasks:
The moments of inertia of different
bodies are determined by oscillation
measurements. Steiners theorem is
verified.

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Moments of inertia of different bodies /
Steiners theorem with Cobra3
P2132811

46 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Dynamics

Torsional vibrations and torsion modulus 1.3.30-00

What you can learn about

Shear modulus

Angular velocity

Torque

Moment of inertia

Angular restoring torque

G-modulus

Modulus of elasticity

Principle:
Bars of various materials will be exciting into torsional vibration. The
relationship between the vibration
period and the geometrical dimensions of the bars will be derived and
the specific shear modulus for the
material determined.

Tasks:
1. Static determination of the torsion modulus of a bar.
2. Determination of the moment of
inertia of the rod and weights
fixed to the bar, from the vibration
period.
3. Determination of the dependence
of the vibration period on the
length and thickness of the bars.
4. Determination of the shear modulus of steel, copper, aluminium
and brass.

What you need:

Torsion apparatus
Torsion rod, steel, d = 2 mm, l = 500 mm
Torsion rod, Al, d = 2 mm, l = 500 mm
Torsion rod, Al, d = 2 mm, l = 400 mm
Torsion rod, Al, d = 2 mm, l = 300 mm
Torsion rod, Al, d = 3 mm, l = 500 mm
Torsion rod, Al, d = 4 mm, l = 500 mm
Torsion rod, brass, d = 2 mm, l = 500 mm
Torsion rod, copper, d = 2 mm, l = 500 mm
Precision spring balance 1 N
Precision spring balances, 2.5 N
Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s
Sliding weight
Support base -PASSSupport rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm
Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 630 mm
Right angle clamp -PASS-

02421.00
02421.01
02421.02
02421.03
02421.04
02421.05
02421.06
02421.07
02421.08
03060.01
03060.02
03071.01
03929.00
02005.55
02025.55
02027.55
02040.55

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Torsional vibrations and torsion modulus
P2133000
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Torque and deflection of a torsion bar.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 47

Mechanics

Dynamics

1.3.31-00 Moment of inertia and torsional vibrations

What you can learn about

Rigid body

Moment of inertia

Axis of rotation

Torsional vibration

Spring constant

Angular restoring moment

Moment of inertia of a
sphere

Moment of inertia of a disc

Moment of inertia of a
cylinder

Moment of inertia of a long
bar

Moment of inertia of 2 point
masses

Principle:
Various bodies perform torsional
vibrations about axes through their
centres of gravity. The vibration
period is measured and the moment
of inertia determined from this.

What you need:

Rotation axle

02415.01

Sphere

02415.02

Disk

02415.03

Hollow cylinder

02415.04

Solid cylinder

02415.05

Rod with movable masses

02415.06

Precision spring balances, 2.5 N

03060.02

Light barrier with counter

11207.30

Power supply 5 V DC/2.4 A with 4 mm plugs

11076.99

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Moment of inertia and torsional vibrations P2133100

Tasks:
The following will be determined:
1. The angular restoring moment of
the spiral spring.
2. The moment of inertia
a) of a disc, two cylinder, a sphere
and a bar,
b) of two point masses, as a function of the perpendicular distance to the axis of rotation.
The centre of gravity lies in the
axis of rotation.

48 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Moment of inertia of two equal masses, of 0.214 kg each, as a function of the

distance between them.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Dynamics

The propagation of a periodically excited continuous transverse wave 1.3.32-00

What you can learn about

Periodic motion

Frequency

Wavelength

Phase velocity

Standing waves

Natural frequency

Free and fixed end

Damping of waves

Principle:
The periodicity of connected stationary oscillators is demonstrated on
the example of a continuous, harmonic transverse wave generated by
a wave machine. The number of
oscillations carried out by different
oscillators within a certain time is
determined and the velocity of propagation is measured. A relation between frequency, wavelength and
phase velocity is established. The
formation of standing waves is
demonstrated and studied.

What you need:

fk
Hz

fk
k

0.38

0.38

2L/1

0.74

0.37

2L/2

0.94

0.31

2L/3

1.43

0.36

2L/4

Wave machine

11211.00

Dual power supply 2 x 15 V-/ 2 A

13520.93

Light barrier with counter

11207.30

Light barrier, compact

11207.20

Laboratory motor, 220 VAC

11030.93

Gearing 30:1

11029.00

Gearing 100:1

11027.00

Stopwatch, 15 minutes

03076.01

Screened cable, BNC, l = 1500 mm

07542.12

The resonance frequencies measured with increasing speed of rotation.

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 400 mm

02026.55

Tasks:

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 200 cm

07365.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 200 cm

07365.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 150 cm

07364.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 150 cm

07364.02

Adapter, BNC plug/4 mm socket

07542.26

1. The frequency of the oscillators 1,

10, 20, 30 and 40 is to be determined with the electronic counter
of the light barrier and the stopwatch for a particular frequency
of excitation.

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

The propagation of a periodically excited
continuous transverse wave
P2133200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

2. By means of a path-time measurement the phase velocity of a

transverse wave is to be determined.

3. For three different frequencies the

corresponding wavelengths are to
be measured and it is to be shown
that the product of frequency and
wavelength is a constant.
4. The four lowest natural frequencies with two ends of the oscillator system fixed are to be detected.
5. The four lowest natural frequencies with one end of the oscillator
system fixed and the other one
free are to be detected.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 49

Mechanics

Dynamics

1.3.33-00 Phase velocity of rope waves

What you can learn about

Wavelength

Phase velocity

Group velocity

Wave equation

Harmonic wave

Principle:
A quadrangular rubber rope is inserted through the demonstration motor
and a linear polarised fixed wave is
generated. With the help of a stroboscope, the frequency and the wave
length are determined. Then the
phase velocity of rope waves with a
fixed tensile stress is ascertained.
Subsequently, the mathematical
relationship between the phase
velocity of the rope and the tensile
on the rope is examined.

What you need:

Grooved wheel after Hoffmann

02860.00

Square section rubber strip, l = 10 m

03989.00

Laboratory motor, 220 VAC

11030.93

Gearing 10:1

11028.00

Cotton cord, d = 2,5 mm, l = 10 mm

02091.00

Support base -PASS-

02005.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 1000 mm

02028.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Rod with hook

02051.00

Pulleys, fixed, on rod, d = 10 mm

02260.00

Precision spring balances, 10.0 N

03060.03

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm

02412.00

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Digital stroboscopes

21809.93

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Phase velocity of rope waves
P2133300

The square of phase velocity depending upon the force F applied on the rope.

Tasks:
1. With constant tensile stress, the
frequency f, which depends on
the wavelength
of the wave
that propagates itself along the
rope. The frequency is plotted as a
function of 1/
. From this graph,
the phase velocity c is determined.
2. The phase velocity c of the rope
waves, which depends on the tensile stress on the rope is to be
measured. The quadrant of the
phase velocity is plotted as a
function of tensile stress.

50 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Mechanics of Liquids and Gaseous Bodies

Density of liquids 1.4.01-00

What you can learn about

Hydrogen bond

H2O anomaly

Volume expansion

Melting

Evaporation

Mohr balance

Principle:
The density of water and glycerol is
determined as a function of temperature using the Mohr balance.

What you need:

Westphal/Mohr density balance

45016.00

Immersion thermostat TC10

08492.93

Accessory set for TC10

08492.01

Bath for thermostat, Makrolon

08487.02

Glycerol, 250 ml

30084.25

Water, distilled 5 l

31246.81

Sodium chloride, 500 g

30155.50

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Density of liquids
P2140100

Density of water as a function of temperature.

Tasks:
The density of water and glycerol is
measured in 1 to 2 steps over a
temperature range from 0 to 20C,
then in larger steps up to 50C.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 51

Mechanics

Mechanics of Liquids and Gaseous Bodies

1.4.02-00 Surface of rotating liquids

What you can learn about

Angular velocity

Centrifugal force

Rotary motion

Paraboloid of rotation

Equilibrium

Principle:
A vessel containing liquid is rotated
about an axis. The liquid surface
forms a paraboloid of rotation, the
parameters of which will be determined as a function of the angular
velocity.

What you need:

Rotating liquid cell

02536.01

Bearing unit

02845.00

Driving belt

03981.00

Motor with gearing, 12 VDC

11610.00

Power supply 0-12 V DC/ 6 V, 12 V AC

13505.93

Light barrier with counter

11207.30

Power supply 5 V DC/2.4 A with 4 mm plugs

11076.99

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Methylene blue sol., alkal. 250 ml

31568.25

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Surface of rotating liquids
P2140200
Tasks:
On the rotating liquid surface, the
following are determined:
1. the shape,
2. the location of the lowest point as
a function of the angular velocity,
3. the curvature.

Location of the lowest point
c
of the liquid as a function of the angular

velocity.

52 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Mechanics of Liquids and Gaseous Bodies

Viscosity of Newtonian and non-Newtonian liquids (rotary viscometer) 1.4.03-00

What you can learn about

Shear stress

Velocity gradient

Internal friction

Viscosity

Plasticity

Principle:
The viscosity of liquids can be determined with a rotation viscometer, in
which a motor with variable rotation
speed drives a cylinder immersed in
the liquid to be investigated with a
spiral spring. The viscosity of the liquid generates a moment of rotation
at the cylinder which can be measured with the aid of the torsion of
the spiral spring and read on a scale.

Tasks:
1. Determine the gradient of the rotational velocity as a function of
the torsional shearing stress for
two Newtonian liquids (glycerine,
liquid paraffin).
2. Investigate the temperature dependence of the viscosity of Castor oil and glycerine.
3. Determine the flow curve for a
non-Newtonian liquid (chocolate).

What you need:

Rotary viscosimeter
Support base -PASSSupport rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 500 mm
Right angle clamp
Magnetic stirrer MR 3001 K
Magnetic stirring rod, cylindrical, l = 30 mm
Separator for magnetic bars, PTFE
Beaker, DURAN, short form, 600 ml
Beaker, DURAN, tall form, 250 ml
Stirring rods, BORO 3.3, l = 200 mm, d = 5 mm
Digital thermometer, NiCr-Ni
Immersion probe NiCr-Ni,-50/1000C
Glycerol, 250 ml
Liquid Paraffin, 250 ml
Castor oil, 250 ml
Acetone, chemical pure, 250 ml

18221.93
02005.55
02032.00
37697.00
35720.93
46299.02
35680.03
36015.00
36004.00
40485.03
07050.00
13615.03
30084.25
30180.25
31799.27
30004.25

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
3

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Viscosity of Newtonian and non-Newtonian
liquids (rotary viscometer)
P2140300
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Temperature dependence of the viscosity of castor oil.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 53

Mechanics

Mechanics of Liquids and Gaseous Bodies

1.4.04-00 Viscosity measurements with the falling ball viscometer

What you can learn about

Liquid

Newtonian liquid

Stokes law

Fluidity

Dynamic and kinematic
viscosity

Viscosity measurements

Principle:
Due to internal friction among their
particles, liquids and gases have different viscosities. The viscosity, a
function of the substances structure
and its temperature, can be experimentally determined, for example, by
measuring the rate of fall of a ball in
a tube filled with the liquid to be investigated.

What you need:

Falling ball viscosimeter

18220.00

Immersion thermostat C10

08492.93

Accessory set for TC10

08492.01

Bath for thermostat, Makrolon

08487.02

Retort stand, h = 750 mm

37694.00

Right angle clamp

37697.00

Universal clamp with joint

37716.00

Pyknometer, 25 ml, calibrated

03023.00

Volumetric flasks with standard joint and PP stopper,

BORO 3.3, 100 ml

36548.00

Beaker, DURAN, tall form, 150 ml

36003.00 11

Beaker, DURAN, short form, 250 ml

36013.00

Pasteur pipettes, l = 145 ml

36590.00

Rubber caps, 10 pcs

39275.03

Hose clip, d = 8-12 mm

40996.01

Rubber tubing, di = 6 mm, l = 1 m

39282.00

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Laboratory balance, 120/240/620 g

48852.93

Wash bottle, plastic, 500 ml

33931.00

Methanol 500 ml

30142.50

Water, distilled 5 l

31246.81

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Viscosity measurements with the falling ball
viscometer
P2140400

Temperature dependence of the dynamic viscosity  of water (o) and

methanol (+), respectively.

Tasks:
Measure the viscosity
1. of methanol-water mixtures of
various composition at a constant
temperature,
2. of water as a function of the temperature and

54 Laboratory Experiments Physics

3. of methanol as a function of temperature.

From the temperature dependence of
the viscosity, calculate the energy
barriers for the displaceability of
water and methanol.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Mechanics of Liquids and Gaseous Bodies

Surface tension by the ring method (Du Nouy method) 1.4.05-00

What you can learn about

Surface energy

Interface

Surface tension

Adhesion

Critical point

Etvs equation

Principle:
The force is measured on a ring
shortly before a liquid film tears
using a torsion meter. The surface
tension is calculated from the diameter of the ring and the tear-off
force.

Tasks:
1. Determine the surface tension of
olive oil as a function of temperature.
2. Determine the surface tension of
water/methanol mixtures as functions of the mixture ratio.

What you need:

Torsion dynamometer, 0.01 N
Surface tension measuring ring
Retort stand, 210 mm x 130 mm, h = 500 mm
Magnetic stirrer MR 3001 K
Support rod with hole, stainless steel, l = 50 cm, M10 thread
Magnetic stirring rod, cylindrical, l = 15 mm
Universal clamp
Right angle clamp
Right angle clamp -PASSCrystallizing dishes, BORO 3.3., 1000 ml
Crystallizing dishes, BORO 3.3., 560 ml
Laboratory thermometers, -10...+250C
Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm
Glass tube, AR-glass, straight, d = 8 mm, l = 150 mm, 10 pcs.
Glass stopcocks, 1 way, straight
Rubber tubing, di = 6 mm, l = 1 m
Volumetric pipettes, 10 ml
Volumetric pipettes, 20 ml
Safety pipettor Flip
Pipette dish
Graduated cylinder, BORO 3.3, 100 ml
Water jet pump, plastic
Ethyl alcohol, absolute, 500 ml
Olive oil, pure, 100 ml
Water, distilled 5 l

02416.00
17547.00
37692.00
35720.93
02022.20
46299.01
37718.00
37697.00
02040.55
46245.00
46244.00
38065.00
02412.00
36701.64
36705.00
39282.00
36578.00
36579.00
36592.00
36589.00
36629.00
02728.00
30008.50
30177.10
31246.81

1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
1

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Temperature dependency of surtace tension of olive oil.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Surface tension by the ring method
(Du Nouy method)
P2140500
Laboratory Experiments Physics 55

Mechanics

Mechanics of Liquids and Gaseous Bodies

1.4.06-11 Surface tension by the pull-out method with Cobra3

What you can learn about

Surface energy

Surface tension

Surface adhesion

Bounding surface

Principle:
The force exerted on a measuring
ring shortly before the liquid film is
torn away is determined with a force
meter. The surface tension is calculated from the diameter of the ring
and the tearing force.

What you need:

Surface tension measuring ring

17547.00

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3 Force/Tesla

14515.61

Newton measuring module

12110.00

Newton Sensor

12110.01

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Lab jack, 160 x 130 mm

02074.00

Petri dishes, d = 200 mm

64796.00

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Surface tension by the pull-out method
with Cobra3
P2140611

Typical measurement values

Tasks:
Determination of the surface tension
of water and other liquids.

56 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Mechanics of Liquids and Gaseous Bodies

Barometric height formula 1.4.07-00

What you can learn about

Kinetic gas theory

Pressure

Equation of state

Temperature

Gas constant

Principle:
Glass or steel balls are accelerated by
means of a vibrating plate, and
thereby attain different velocities
(temperature model). The particle
density of the balls is measured as a
function of the height and the vibrational frequency of the plate.

What you need:

Kinetic gas theory apparatus

09060.00

Variable transformer with rectifier 15 V~/12 V-, 5 A

13530.93

Light barrier with counter

11207.30

Power supply 5 V DC/2.4 A with 4 mm plugs

11076.99

Digital stroboscopes

21809.93

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 400 mm

02026.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Barometric height formula
P2140700

Number of steel balls (m = 0.034 g), as a function of the height h, which pass
through the volume element V in 30 seconds (vibrational frequency 50 Hz).

Tasks:
Measurement of the particle density
as a function of:
1. the height, at fixed frequency
2. the vibrational frequency of the
exciting plate, at fixed height.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 57

Mechanics

Mechanics of Liquids and Gaseous Bodies

1.4.08-00 Lift and drag (resistance to flow)

What you can learn about

Resistance to pressure

Frictional resistance

Drag coefficient

Turbulent flow

Laminar flow

Reynolds number

Dynamic pressure

Bernoulli equation

Aerofoil

Induced resistance

Circulation

Angle of incidence

Polar diagram
A) Objects of different cross-section
and shape are placed in a laminar
air stream. The drag is examined
as a function of the flow velocity
and the geometry of the objects.
B) A rectangular plate or an aerofoil
in a stream of air experiences a
buoyant force (lift) and a resistance force (drag). These forces are
determined in relation to area, rate
of flow and angle of incidence.

What you need:

Aerodynamic bodies, set of 14

02787.00

Aerofoil model

02788.00

Pitot tube, Prandtl type

03094.00

Precision manometer

03091.00

Holder with bearing points

02411.00

Double shaft holder

02780.00

Precision pulley

11201.02

Transparent spring balances, 0.2 N

03065.01

Vernier calipers, stainless steel

03010.00

Blower, mains voltage 220 V

02742.93

Power regulator

32288.93

Pipe probe

02705.00

Universal clamp with joint

37716.00

Support base -PASS-

02005.55

1
1

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 1000 mm

02028.55

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Rod with hook

02051.00

Stand tube

02060.00

Pointed rod

02302.00

Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm

02412.00

Tasks:

Rule, plastic, 200 mm

09937.01

Rubber tubing, di = 6 mm, l = 1 m

39282.00

A) Determination of the drag as a

function of:

B) Determination of the lift and the

drag of flat plates as a function of:

1. the cross-section of different

bodies,

1. the plate area

2. the flow velocity,

3. the angle of incidence (polar diagram)

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Lift and drag (resistance to flow)
P2140800

Drag of an object as a function of its cross-sectional area A (q = 0.85 hPa).

3. determination of the drag coefficients cw for objects of various

shape.

58 Laboratory Experiments Physics

2. the dynamic pressure

4. Determination of the pressure distribution over the aerofoil for various angles of incidence.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

Vibration of strings 1.5.01-00

What you can learn about

Natural vibration

Mass-spring system

Harmonic sound intervals

Principle:
A tensioned metal string is made to
vibrate. The vibrations of the string
are optically scanned, the vibration
process observed on the oscilloscope
and the dependence of the frequency on the string tension and string
length and the density of the material are investigated.

What you need:

String tensioning device with rod
Nickel wire, d = 0.3 mm
Kanthal wire, 19.1 /m, d = 0.3 mm, l = 100 m
Constantan wire, 6.9 /m, d = 0.3 mm
Constantan wire, 0.98 /m, d = 0.4 mm
Copper wire, d = 0.4 mm
Copper wire, d = 0.5 mm
Barrel base -PASSBench clamp -PASSSupport rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm
Right angle clamp -PASSRod with hook
Sign holder
Fishing line on spool, d = 0,5 mm, l = 100 mm
Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm
Precision spring balances, 100.0 N
Striking hammer
Photoelement for optical base plate
Lamp socket E 10, G1
Filament lamps, 6 V/0.5 A
Distributor
Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels
LF amplifier, 220 V
Digital counter, 4 decades
Plug with push-on sleeve
Adapter, BNC socket - 4 mm plug
Adapter, BNC plug/4 mm socket
T type connector, BNC, socket, socket, plug
Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair
Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm
Screened cable, BNC, l = 30 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

03431.01
06090.00
06092.00
06101.00
06102.00
06106.02
06106.03
02006.55
02010.00
02025.55
02040.55
02051.00
02066.00
02090.00
03001.00
03060.04
03429.00
08734.00
17049.00
35673.03
06024.00
11459.95
13625.93
13600.93
07542.04
07542.20
07542.26
07542.21
07542.27
07542.11
07542.10
07362.01
07362.04

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Vibrations of strings
P2150100
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Fundamental frequency f as a function of string length l at a given tensioning force F = 30 N.

Tasks:
1. To measure the frequency of a
string (e.g. constantan, 0.4 mm
dia.) as a function of the tensioning force and the length of the
string.

2. To measure the frequency for various types and cross-sections of

string, at a fixed tension and
string length.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 59

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

1.5.03-11 Velocity of sound in air with Cobra3

What you can learn about

Linear relationship between
the propagation time of
sound and its respective path

Longitudinal waves

Velocity of sound

Principle:
The speed of sound in air is determined by measurements of sound
travel times.

What you need:

v /(m/s)

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

338.438

338.448

Software Cobra3, Timer/Counter

14511.61

338.753

Measuring microphone with amplifier

03543.00

337.230

Flat cell battery, 9 V

07496.10

Support rod with hole, stainless steel, l = 10 cm

02036.01

Support

09906.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

337.258
Table 1

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Tasks:

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm

07360.01

Determination of the velocity of

sound in air.

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm

07360.04

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Velocity of sound in air with Cobra3
P2150311

60 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

Acoustic Doppler effect

1.5.04-01/11

What you can learn about

Propagation of sound waves

Doppler shift of frequency

Principle:
If a source of sound is in motion relative to its medium of propagation,
the frequency of the waves that are
emitted is displaced due to the
Doppler effect.

Set-up of experiment P2150411 with Cobra3

What you need:

Movement toward
the sound source

Experiment P2150411 with Cobra3

Experiment P2150401 with yt recorder
Power frequency generator, 1 MHz

13650.93

Yt recorder, 1 channel

11414.95

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Measuring microphone

03542.00

Flat cell battery, 9 V

07496.10

Loudspeaker/Sound head

03524.00

Car, motor driven

11061.00

Attachment for car

11061.02

Battery cell, 1.5 V, baby size, type C

07922.01

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Stand tube

02060.00

Movement away from

the sound source

v /m/s

0.162

0.157

v /m/s

0.159

0.156

v /m/s

0.158

0.157

v /m/s

0.159

0.156

Mean
v /m/s

0.160

0.157

Mean
fmeasured/Hz

16199

16184

fcalculated/Hz

16199.6

16184.5

Table

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 100 cm 07363.02

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 150 cm

07364.04

Tasks:

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 75 cm 07362.02

1 Track, l = 900 mm

11606.00

The frequency changes are measured

and analysed for different relative
velocities of source and observer.

Connecting cord, 32 A, l = 1500 mm, red

07364.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 10 cm

07359.01

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Support

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm

07363.01

07363.04

2
1

09906.00

Software Cobra3, Timer/Counter

14511.61

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm

Function generator

13652.93

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Double socket, pair red and black

07264.00

03065.20

Plug with socket and crosshole, 2 pcs.

07206.01

Diaphragm, l = 100 mm

11202.03

Spring balance holder

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 600 mm

02037.00

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Light barrier, compact

11207.20

Bosshead

02043.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Acoustic Doppler effect
P21504 01/11

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 61

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

1.5.05-15 Chladni figures with FG-Module

What you can learn about

Wavelength

Stationary waves

Natural vibrations

Two-dimensional standing
waves

Principle:
To show the two-dimensional standing waves on the surface of a square
or circular plate.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3 PowerGraph

14525.61

Measuring module Function Generator

12111.00

LF amplifier, 220 V

13625.93

Loudspeaker/Sound head

03524.00

Sound pattern plates

03478.00

Support base, variable

02001.00

Bosshead

02043.00

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 250 mm, d = 10 mm

02031.00

Stand tube

02060.00

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Chladni figures with FG-Module
P2150515
Two dimensional oscillation of quadratic plates.

You can find more

experiments in Handbook
Physics Experiments
with Cobra3
Order No. 01310.02

62 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Tasks:
A frequency generator is connected
to a sound head. The sound head
drives a Chaldni plate. White sand is
sprinkled randomly to cover the entire black surface of the plate.
Drive the plate at a predetermined
harmonic frequency and the sand
will migrate into the nodal regions. A

well defined standing wave pattern

can be clearly seen in the first photo.
The circular and square Chladni
plates will create characteristic patterns. Adjust the oscillator slowly in
the 0.2 to 2 kHz frequency range and
watch for the pattern to emerge
when a harmonic is tuned.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

Velocity of sound using Kundts tube

1.5.06-01/15

What you can learn about

Longitudinal waves

Sound velocity in gases and
solids

Frequency

Wavelength

Stationary waves

Natural vibrations

Principle:
A metal rod is made to vibrate longitudinally by rubbing it with a cloth.
The gas column in a glass tube is
caused to vibrate naturally as a
result of resonance, through the
radiation of sound from a disc
attached to the end of the rod.
The ratio of the velocities of sound in
the gas and in the vibration generator is determined by measuring the
wavelength.

Set-up of experiment P2150615 with FG-Module

What you need:

Experiment P2150615 with FG-Module
Exp. P2150601 with vibration generator
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Power supply 12V/2A
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Software Cobra3 PowerGraph
Measuring module Function Generator
LF amplifier, 220 V
Loudspeaker/Sound head
Support base, variable
Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair
Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm
Glass tubes, AR-glass, d = 38 mm, l = 640 mm
Cork powder, 3 g
Universal clamp
Charging strip
Tuning piston
Vibration generator, brass
Vibration generator, steel
Lycopodium powder, 10 g
Laboratory thermometers, -10...+ 30C
Bench clamp -PASSMeter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm
Pressure-reducing valves, CO2 / He
Steel cylinders, carbon dioxide, 10 l
Wrench for steel cylinders
Glass tube, AR-glass, straight,
d = 8 mm, l = 80 mm, 10 pcs.
Rubber stopper, d = 38/31 mm, 1 hole, d = 7 mm
Rubber tubing, di = 6 mm, l = 1 m
PC, Windows 95 or higher

12150.00
12151.99
14602.00
14525.61
12111.00
13625.93
03524.00
02001.00
07542.27
07542.11
07361.01
07361.04
03918.00
03477.00
37718.00
03474.01
03474.02
03476.01
03476.02
02715.00
05949.00
02010.00
03001.00
33481.00
41761.00
40322.00

1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1

36701.65
39260.01
39282.00

1
1
1

1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Velocity of sound using Kundts tube
P21506 01/15
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Positions of the vibration nodes as a function of the number of nodes.

Tasks:
1. To measure the wavelength of stationary waves using a steel or a
brass rod as the vibration generator. The longitudinal velocity of
sound in the material of the vibration generator is determined,
given the velocity of sound in air.
2. To measure the wavelength for
CO2, and to determine the sound
velocity in CO2 from the ratios of
the wavelengths in air determined
in 1. above.
Laboratory Experiments Physics 63

Mechanics
1.5.07-01/15

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

Wavelengths and frequencies with a Quincke tube

What you can learn about

Transverse and longitudinal
waves

Wavelength

Amplitude

Frequency

Phase shift

Interference

Velocity of sound in air

Loudness

Weber-Fechner law

Principle:
If a sound wave of a particular frequency is divided into two coherent
components (like, for example, light
waves in an interferometer experiment), and if the path of one of the
component waves is altered, it is
possible to calculate the wavelength
of the sound wave and its frequency
from the interference phenomena
recorded with a microphone.

Set-up of experiment P2150715 with FG-Module

What you need:

Experiment P2150715 with FG-Module
Experiment P2150701 with multimeter
Interference tube, Quincke type
03482.00
Measuring microphone
03542.00
Power frequency generator, 1 MHz
13650.93
Digital multimeter 2010
07128.00
Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair
07542.27
Loudspeaker/Sound head
03524.00
Vernier calipers, stainless steel
03010.00
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 150 cm 07364.04
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 150 cm 07364.01
Support base -PASS02005.55
Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 630 mm
02027.55
Right angle clamp -PASS02040.55
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
12150.00
Power supply 12V/2A
12151.99
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
14602.00
Measuring module Function Generator
12111.00
Software Cobra3 PowerGraph
14525.61
LF amplifier, 220 V
13625.93
Connection box
06030.23
Carbon resistor 10 , 1W, G1
39104.01
Measuring microphone with amplifier
03543.00
Support
09906.00
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm
07361.01
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm
07361.04
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 10 cm
07359.01
PC, Windows 95 or higher

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
5

1
1
1
1
1
2
5
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Interference of sound waves in a Quincke tube. Sound amplitude as a function of the displacement d.

Tasks:
1. Record of the extension of a
Quincke tube for given frequencies in the range 2000 Hz to 6000
Hz.
2. Calculation of the frequencies
from the wavelengths determined,
comparison with the given frequencies.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Wavelengths and frequencies
with a Quincke tube
P21507 01/15
64 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

Resonance frequencies of Helmholtz resonators with Cobra3 1.5.08-11

What you can learn about

Cavity resonator

Resonance frequency

Acoustic resonant circuit

Principle:
Acoustic cavity resonators posses a
characteristic frequency which is determined by their geometrical form.
In this case the resonator is excited
to vibrations in its resonance frequency by background noise.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3 Fourier Analysis

14514.61

Measuring microphone with amplifier

03543.00

Flat cell battery, 9 V

07496.10

Glass tubes, AR-glass, d = 12 mm, l = 300 mm

45126.01

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 500 mm

02032.00

Universal clamp

37718.00

Bosshead

02043.00

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Long-neck round-bottom flask, 1000 ml

36050.00

Long-neck round-bottom flask, 1000 ml

36046.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Resonance frequencies of Helmholtz
resonators with Cobra3
P2150811

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Time signal, spectrum and parameter settings for measurements on the empty
1000 ml round-bottomed flask.

Tasks:
Determination of different resonance
frequencies of a resonator depending
on the volume.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 65

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

1.5.09-11 Interference of acoustic waves, stationary waves and diffraction at a slot with PC interface
What you can learn about

Interference

Reflection

Diffraction

Acoustic waves

Stationary waves

Huygens-Fresnel principle

Use of an interface

Principle:
Two acoustic sources emit waves
of the same frequency and if their
distance is a multiple of the wavelength, an interference structure
becomes apparent in the space
where the waves are superimposed.
An acoustic wave impinges perpendicularly onto a reflector, the
incident and the reflected wave
are superimposed to a stationary
wave. In case of reflection, a pressure antinode will always occur at
the point of reflection.

What you need:

Loudspeaker/Sound head

03524.00

Measuring microphone

03542.00

Flat cell battery, 9 V

07496.10

Screen, metal, 300 mm x 300 mm

08062.00

Function generator

13652.93

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Stand tube

02060.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Plate holder, opening width 0...10 mm

02062.00

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm

02412.00

Weight holder, 1 g, silver bronzing

02407.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm

07363.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm

07363.04

Movement sensor with cable

12004.10

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Adapter, BNC socket - 4 mm plug

07542.20

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Software Cobra3 Force/Tesla

14515.61

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Measurement example, stationary waves.

Tasks:
1. To measure the interference of
acoustic waves.
2. To analyze the reflection of acoustic waves stationary waves.
3. To measure the diffraction at a
slot of acoustic waves.

An acoustic wave impinges on a

sufficiently narrow slot, it is diffracted into the geometrical shadow spaces. The diffraction and the
interference pattern occurring
behind the slot can be explained
by means of the Huygens-Fresnel
principle and confirm the wave
characteristics of sound.

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Interference of acoustic waves, stationary waves
and diffraction at a slot with PC interface P2150911

66 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

Optical determination of velocity of sound in liquids 1.5.10-00

What you can learn about

Ultrasonics

Sound velocity

Frequency

Wavelength

Sound pressure

Stationary waves

Principle:
A stationary ultrasonic wave in a
glass cell full of liquid is traversed by
a divergent beam of light. The sound
wavelength can be determined from
the central projection of the sound
field on the basis of the refractive
index which canges with the sound
pressure.

What you need:

Ultrasonic generator

13920.99

Laser, He-Ne 1.0 mW, 230 VAC

08181.93

Glass cell, 150 x 55 x 100 mm

03504.00

Lens holder

08012.00

Lens, mounted, f = +20 mm

08018.01

Screen, metal, 300 mm x 300 mm

08062.00

Optical profile bench, l = 1000 mm

08282.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Swinging arm

08256.00

Table top on rod

08060.00

Laboratory thermometers, -10...+ 30C

05949.00

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 250 mm, d = 10 mm

02031.00

Universal clamp

37718.00

Glycerol, 250 ml

30084.25

Water, distilled 5 l

31246.81

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Optical determination of velocity
of sound in liquids
P2151000

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Image of a screen.

Tasks:
To determine the wavelength of
sound in liquids, and from this calucate the sound velocity, from the
structure of the centrally projected
image.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 67

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

1.5.11-00 Phase and group velocity of ultrasonics in liquids

What you can learn about

Longitudinal waves

Velocity of sound in liquids

Wavelength

Frequency

Piezoelectric effect

Piezoelectric ultrasonics
transformer

Principle:
The sound waves transmitted to a
liquid by the ultrasonic generator are
picked up by a piezoelectric ultrasonic pick-up and the signal from
transmitter and receiver compared
on an oscilloscope.
The wavelength is determined and
the phase velocity calculated from
the relative phase position of the
signals. The group velocity is determined from measurements of the
sound pulse delay time.

What you need:

Ultrasonic pickup

13920.00

Ultrasonic generator

13920.99

Glass cell, 150 x 55 x 100 mm

03504.00

Insulating support

07924.00

1
1

Optical profile bench, l = 600 mm

08283.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Table top on rod

08060.00

Swinging arm

08256.00

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 500 mm

02032.00

Universal clamp

37718.00

Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels

11459.95

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 10 cm

07359.01

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Laboratory thermometers, -10...+ 30C

05949.00

Glycerol, 250 ml

30084.25

Sodium chloride, 500 g

30155.50

Water, distilled 5 l

31246.81

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Phase and group velocity of ultrasonics
in liquids
P2151100

68 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Detector displacement l as a function of the number n of wavelengths covered, for water, glycerol and sodium chloride solution (temperature  = 25 C).

Tasks:
The signals from the ultrasonic generator and the ultrasonic pick-up are
recorded on the oscilloscope.

2.1. To determine the oscilloscopes

coefficient of sweep with the aid
of the ultrasonic frequency.

1. To measure the relative phase

position of the signal from the
ultrasonic pick-up as a function of
its distance from the ultrasonic
generator (which is in the sine
mode), and to determine the
ultrasonic wavelength and the
phase velocity when the frequency is known.

2.2. With the generator in the pulsed

mode, to record the delay time
of the sound pulses as a function
of the distance between a generator and the pick-up, and to
determine the group velocity.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

Temperature dependence of the Velocity of sound in liquids 1.5.12-00

What you can learn about

Wavelength

Frequency

Velocity of sound in liquids

Compressibility

Density

Ultrasonics

Piezoelectric effect

Piezoelectric ultrasonic
transducer

Principle:
Sound waves are radiated into a liquid by an ultrasonic transmitter and
detected with a piezoelectric transducer. The wavelength of the sound
is found by comparing the phase of
the detector signal for different
sound paths and, when the frequency is known, the velocity of sound as
a function of the temperature of the
liquid is determined.

What you need:

Ultrasonic pickup

13920.00

Ultrasonic generator

13920.99

Sliding device, horizontal

08713.00

Optical profile bench, l = 600 mm

08283.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Swinging arm

08256.00

Insulating support

07924.00

Immersion thermostat TC10

08492.93

Accessory set for TC10

08492.01

Bath for thermostat, Makrolon

08487.02

Laboratory thermometers, -10...+100C

38056.00

Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels

11459.95

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 100 mm

02030.00

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Universal clamp with joint

37716.00

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Glycerol, 250 ml

30084.25

Water, distilled 5 l

31246.81

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 10 cm

07359.01

Slide mount

08286.00

1
Velocity of sound in water as a function of the temperature.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Temperature dependence of the Velocity
of sound in liquids
P2151200

Tasks:
The wavelength is found from the
phase position of the sound pickup
signal relative to the generator signal as a function of the sound path
and the velocity of the sound is de-

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

termined when the ultrasonic frequency is known. The measurement

is made for water and glycerol as the
temperatures of the liquids are
changed step-by-step.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 69

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

1.5.13-00 Stationary ultrasonic waves, determination of wavelength

What you can learn about

Longitudinal waves

Superposition of waves

Reflection of longitudinal
waves

Stationary longitudinal waves

Principle:
An ultrasonic wave is subjected to
surface reflection from a metal plate.
The reflected wave superimposes on
the incident wave, coincident in
phase and amplitude, to form a
standing wave. The intensity of this
wave along the direction of propagation is measured using a movable ultrasonic receiver.

What you need:

Ultrasound operation unit

13900.00

Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A with DC-socket 2.1 mm

13900.99

Ultrasonic transmitter

13901.00

Ultrasonic receiver on stem

13902.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Optical profile bench, l = 600 mm

08283.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Sliding device, horizontal

08713.00

Swinging arm

08256.00

Screen, metal, 300 mm x 300 mm

08062.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Stationary ultrasonic waves, determination
of wavelength
P2151300

The change in the sound pressure intensity in the direction of propagation as

a function of the distance.

Tasks:
1. Determine the intensity of a
standing ultrasonic wave by moving an ultrasonic receiver along
the direction of propagation.
2. Plot a graph of the measured values as a function of the distance.
3. Determine the wavelength of the
ultrasonic wave.

70 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

Absorption of ultrasonic in air 1.5.14-00

What you can learn about

Longitudinal waves

Plane waves

Spherical waves

Propagation of sound waves

Sound pressure

Alternating sound pressure

Sound intensity

Absorption coefficient of
ultrasonic waves

Law of absorption

Principle:
Sound needs a material medium with
which it can enter into reciprocal action for its propagation, whereby a
loss of energy occurs. The amplitude,
and so also the intensity, decreases
along the propagation path.

What you need:

Ultrasound operation unit

13900.00

Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A with DC-socket 2.1 mm

13900.99

Ultrasonic transmitter

13901.00

Ultrasonic receiver on stem

13902.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Optical profile bench, l = 1500 mm

08281.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Absorption of ultrasonic in air
P2151400
The change in sound pressure intensity as a function of the distance from the
source of sound.

Tasks:
1. Move an ultrasonic receiver along
the direction of propagation of a
sound wave to measure the sound
intensity as a function of the distance from the source of the
sound.
2. Plot linear and logarithmic graphs
of the values of the sound intensity as a function of the distance.
3. Confirm the law of absorption and
determine the absorption coefficient.
4. Verify that the emitted wave is a
spherical wave near to the transmitter.
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 71

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

1.5.15-15 Ultrasonic diffraction at different single and double slit systems

What you can learn about

Longitudinal waves

Huygens principle

Interference

Fraunhofer and Fresnel
diffraction

Principle:
A plane ultrasonic wave is subjected
to diffraction at single slits of various widths and at various double
slits. The intensity of the diffracted
and interfering partial waves are automatically recorded using a motordriven, swivel ultrasound detector
and a PC.

What you need:

Goniometer with reflecting mirror

13903.00

Goniometer Operation Unit

13903.99

Ultrasound operation unit

13900.00

Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A with DC-socket 2.1 mm

13900.99

Ultrasonic transmitter

13901.00

Ultrasonic receiver on stem

13902.00

Object holder for goniometer

13904.00

Diffraction objects for ultrasonic

13905.00

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Software Goniometer

14523.61

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Ultrasonic diffraction at different single
and double slit systems
P2151515

The angular distribution of the intensity of a plane ultrasonic wave diffracted at a slit.

Tasks:
1. Record the intensity of an ultrasonic wave diffracted by various
slits and double slits as a function
of diffraction angle.
2. Determine the angular positions
of the maximum and minimum
values and compare them with the
theoretical results.

72 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

Ultrasonic diffraction at different multiple slit systems 1.5.16-15

What you can learn about

Longitudinal waves

Huygens principle

Interference

Fraunhofer and Fresnel
diffraction

Principle:
An ultrasonic plane wave is subjected to diffraction at various multiple
slits. The intensity of the diffracted
and interfering partial waves are automatically recorded using a motordriven, swivel ultrasound detector
and a PC.

What you need:

Goniometer with reflecting mirror

13903.00

Goniometer Operation Unit

13903.99

Ultrasound operation unit

13900.00

Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A with DC-socket 2.1 mm

13900.99

Ultrasonic transmitter

13901.00

Ultrasonic receiver on stem

13902.00

Object holder for goniometer

13904.00

Diffraction objects for ultrasonic

13905.00

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Vernier calipers, stainless steel

03010.00

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Software Goniometer

14523.61

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Ultrasonic diffraction at different multiple
slit systems
P2151615

The angular distribution of the intensity of a plane ultrasonic wave diffracted by a fourfold slit.

Tasks:
1. Determine the angular distribution of a plane ultrasonic wave
diffracted by various multiple slits.
2. Determine the angular positions
of the maximum and mininum
values and compare them with the
theoretical values.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 73

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

1.5.17-15 Diffraction of ultrasonic waves at a pin hole and a circular obstacle

What you can learn about

Longitudinal waves

Huygens principle

Interference

Fraunhofer and Fresnel
diffraction

Fresnels zone construction

Poissons spot

Babinets theorem

Bessel function

Principle:
An ultrasonic plane wave is subjected to diffraction by a pin-hole obstacle and a complementary circular
obstacle. The intensity distribution of
the diffracted and interfering partial
waves are automatically recorded
using a motor-driven, swivel ultrasound detector and a PC.

What you need:

Goniometer with reflecting mirror

13903.00

Goniometer Operation Unit

13903.99

Ultrasound operation unit

13900.00

Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A with DC-socket 2.1 mm

13900.99

Ultrasonic transmitter

13901.00

Ultrasonic receiver on stem

13902.00

Object holder for goniometer

13904.00

Pin hole and circular obstacle for ultrasonic

13906.00

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Software Goniometer

14523.61

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Diffraction of ultrasonic waves at a pin hole
and a circular obstacle
P2151715

The angular distribution of the intensity of a plane ultrasonic wave diffracted by a pin-hole obstacle.

Tasks:
1. Determine the angular distribution of an ultrasonic wave
diffracted by a pin-hole and circular obstacle.
2. Compare the angular positions of
the minimum intensities with the
theoretical values.

74 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

Ultrasonic diffraction at Fresnel lenses / Fresnels zone contruction 1.5.18-00

What you can learn about

Longitudinal waves

Huygens principle

Interference

Fraunhofer and Fresnel
diffraction

Fresnels zone construction

Zone plates

Principle:
An ultrasonic plane wave strikes a
Fresnel zone plate. The ultrasonic intensity is determined as a function of
the distance behind the plate, using
an ultrasonic detector that can be
moved in the direction of the zone
plate axis.

What you need:

Ultrasound operation unit

13900.00

Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A with DC-socket 2.1 mm

13900.99

Ultrasonic transmitter

13901.00

Ultrasonic receiver on stem

13902.00

Fresnel zone plates for ultrasonic

13907.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Optical profile bench, l = 1500 mm

08281.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount

08286.00

Stand tube

02060.00

Plate holder, opening width 0...10 mm

02062.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Ultrasonic diffraction at Fresnel lenses /
Fresnels zone contruction
P2151800

Graph of the intensity of the ultrasound as a function of the distance from a

Fresnel zone plate( curve a ); curve b without zone plate.

Tasks:
1. Determine and plot graphs of the
intensity of the ultrasonic behind
different Fresnel zone plates as a
function of the distance behind
the plates.
2. Carry out the same measurement
series without a plate.
3. Determine the image width at
each distance of the transmitter
from the zone plate and compare
the values obtained with those
theoretically expected.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 75

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

1.5.19-15 Interference of two identical ultrasonic transmitters

What you can learn about

Longitudinal waves

Sound pressure

Huygens principle

Interference

Fraunhofer and Fresnel
diffraction

Principle:
Ultrasonic waves of the same frequence, amplitude and direction of
propagation are generated by two
sources positioned parallel to each
other. The sources can vibrate both
in-phase and out-of phase. The angular distribution of the intensity of
the waves, which interfere with each
other, is automatically recorded
using a motor-driven ultrasonic detector and a PC.

What you need:

Goniometer with reflecting mirror

13903.00

Goniometer Operation Unit

13903.99

Ultrasound operation unit

13900.00

Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A with DC-socket 2.1 mm

13900.99

Ultrasonic transmitter

13901.00

Ultrasonic receiver on stem

13902.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Software Goniometer

14523.61

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Interference of two indentical ultrasonic
transmitters
P2151915

Angular distribution of the intensity of two interfering ultrasonic waves having the same phase, amplitude, frequency and direction of propagation.

Tasks:
1. Determine the angular distribution of the sound pressure of two
ultrasonic transmitters vibrating
in-phase.
2. Determine the angular positions
of the interference minima and
compare the values found with
those theoretically expected.
3. Repeat the measurements with
the two ultrasonic transmitters vibrating out-of-phase.
4. Repeat the first measurement and
additionally determine with the
angular distribution of the sound
pressure of each single transmitter.
76 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

Interference of ultrasonic waves by a Lloyd mirror 1.5.20-00

What you can learn about

Longitudinal waves

Superposition of waves

Reflection of longitudinal
waves

Interference

Principle:
A partial packet of radiation passes
directly from a fixed ultrasonic
transmitter to a fixed ultrasonic receiver. A further partial packet hits
against a metal screen that is positioned parallel to the connecting line
between the transmitter and receiver, and is reflected in the direction of
the receiver. The two packets of radiation interfere with each other at
the receiver. When the reflector is
moved parallel to itself, the difference in the path lengths of the two
packets changes. According to this
difference, either constructive or destructive interference occurs.

What you need:

Ultrasound operation unit

13900.00

Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A with DC-socket 2.1 mm

13900.99

Ultrasonic transmitter

13901.00

Ultrasonic receiver on stem

13902.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Optical profile bench, l = 600 mm

08283.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Slide mount

08286.00

Sliding device, horizontal

08713.00

Swinging arm

08256.00

Screen, metal, 300 mm x 300 mm

08062.00

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Interference of ultrasonic waves
by a Lloyd mirror
P2152000

The received signal as a function of the reflector distance d.

Tasks:
1. The sliding device is to be used to
move the reflector screen positioned parallel to the connecting
line between the transmitter and
receiver parallel to itself in steps
of d = (0.5-1) mm. The reflector
voltage U is to be recorded at each
step.
2. The d values of the various maxima and minima are to be determined from the U = U(d) graph
and compared with the theoretically expected values.
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 77

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

1.5.21-15 Determination of the velocity of sound (sonar principle)

What you can learn about

Longitudinal waves

Sound pressure

Phase- and group velocity

Sonar principle

Principle:
An ultrasonic transmitter emits
sound pulses onto a reflector, from
which recording of them by a receiver shows a time delay. The velocity of
sound is calculated from the path
length and transmission time of the
sound pulses.

What you need:

Ultrasound operation unit

13900.00

Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A with DC-socket 2.1 mm

13900.99

Ultrasonic transmitter

13901.00

Ultrasonic receiver on stem

13902.00

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Screen, metal, 300 mm x 300 mm

08062.00

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Software Cobra3 Universal recorder

14504.61

Measured time between the transmitted and the received reflected ultrasonic
waves.

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Determination of the velocity of sound
(sonar principle)
P2152115

Tasks:
1. Determine transmission times for
different distances apart of the
transmitter and the receiver.
2. Plot a graph of the path lengths of
the sound pulses against their
transmission time.
3. Determine the velocity of sound
from the graph.

78 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

Ultrasonic Michelson-Interferometer 1.5.22-00

What you can learn about

Longitudinal waves

Reflection of longitudinal
waves

Superposition of waves

Interference

Interferometer

Principle:
A semi-permeable membrane divides an ultrasonic wave into two
partial packets which travel at right
angles to each other. They are subsequently reflected at different hard
metal reflectors, one of which is fixed
in position, and the other of which
can be displaced in the direction of
the beam, before being reunited.
Shifting the displaceable reflector
changes the path length of the corresponding packet, so that superpositioning of the reunited partial packets gives maxima and minima of the
alternating sound pressure according
to the differenc in the distance travelled. The wavelength of the ultrasound can be determined from these.

What you need:

Ultrasound operation unit

13900.00

Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A with DC-socket 2.1 mm

13900.99

Ultrasonic transmitter

13901.00

Ultrasonic receiver on stem

13902.00

Multi range meter, analogue

07028.01

Optical profile bench, l = 600 mm

08283.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Sliding device, horizontal

08713.00

Screen, metal, 300 mm x 300 mm

08062.00

Screen, translucent, 250 mm x 250 mm

08064.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Stand tube

02060.00

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Ultrasonic Michelson-Interferometer
P2152200
Intensity of the alternating sound pressure as a function of the displacement
d of reflector screen Sc2.

Tasks:
1. Determine the intensity of the
alternating sound pressure in dependence on the displacement of
one of the reflectors.
2. Calculate the wavelength of the
ultrasound from the measurement
curve.
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 79

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

1.5.23-00 Ultrasonic diffraction by a straight edge

What you can learn about

Longitudinal waves

Superposition of waves

Huygens principle

Interference

Fraunhofer and Fresnel
diffraction

Fresnel zones

Fresnel integrals

Cornus spiral

Principle:
An ultrasonic wave hits a straight
edge which limits the wave field to
one side. According to Huygens
principle, the edge is a point source
for secondary waves, and these penetrate also into the shaded area of
the edge. In the transmission range,
secondary waves interfere with the
primary waves, so that a succession
of maxima and minima of the alternating sound pressure are created
transverse to the edge.

What you need:

Ultrasound operation unit

13900.00

Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A with DC-socket 2.1 mm

13900.99

Ultrasonic transmitter

13901.00

Ultrasonic receiver on stem

13902.00

Multi range meter, analogue

07028.01

Optical profile bench, l = 600 mm

08283.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Screen, metal, 300 mm x 300 mm

08062.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 400 mm

02026.55

Stand tube

02060.00

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Ultrasonic diffraction by a straight edge
P2152300

Diffraction at an edge: Course of intensity of the alternating sound pressure

as function of position coordinate x.

Tasks:
1. Determine the intensity distribution of an ultrasonic wave
diffracted at a straight edge as a
function of the transverse distance from the edge.
2. Compare the positions of the
maxima and minima found in the
experiment to those theoretically
expected.
3. Repeat the measurement of the
intensity distribution of the ultrasonic wave without the straight
edge.

80 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Mechanical Vibration Acoustics

Ultrasonic Doppler effect 1.5.24-15

What you can learn about

Propagation of sound waves

Superimposition of sound
waves

Doppler shift of frequency

Longitudinal waves

Principle:
If a source of sound is in motion relative to its medium of propagation,
the frequency of the waves that are
emitted is displaced due to the
Doppler effect.

What you need:

Ultrasound operation unit

13900.00

Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A with DC-socket 2.1 mm

13900.99

Ultrasonic transmitter

13901.00

Ultrasonic receiver on stem

13902.00

Car, motor driven

11061.00

Attachment for car

11061.02

Battery cell, 1.5 V, baby size, type C

07922.01

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Stand tube

02060.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm

07363.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 100 cm

07363.02

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm

07363.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 10 cm

07359.02

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

1 Track, l = 900 mm

11606.00

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Tasks:

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3, Timer/Counter

14511.61

The frequency changes are measured

and analysed for different relative
velocities of source and observer.

Double socket, pair red and black

07264.00

Electrode holder, slewable

18461.88

Diaphragm, l = 100 mm

11202.03

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 600 mm

02037.00

Light barrier, compact

11207.20

Bosshead

02043.00

Spring balance holder

03065.20

Doppler shift of frequency.

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Ultrasonic Doppler effect
P2152415
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 81

Mechanics

Handbooks

Physics Experiments Linear Motion

In the experimental literature Linear Motion you will find detailed descriptions of
experiments regarding the following concepts:
Uniform acceleration and deceleration
Momentum (elastic and inelastic collision)
Newtons laws
Potential and kinetic energy
Grade resistance/inclined plane
Almost all experiments can be performed either with the 2 m long air track 11202.17 or
with the 1.5 m long demonstration track 11305.00. For the measurements and data recording you can use the Cobra3 interface 12150.00, the 4-4 Timer 13605.99 or the 6-decade
digital counter 13603.93.

Physics Experiments Linear Motion No. 16001.02 15 Experiments described

1.1
P1198511
The linear uniform motion

2.1
P1198615
Uniformly accelerated motion
with an accelerating mass
2.2
P1198702
Uniformly accelerated motion
with a jet glider
2.3
P1198805
Uniformly accelerated motion with
an inclined track
2.4
P1198906
Uniformly decelerated motion
2.5
The free fall

P1199000

4.1
P1199502
Impulse and momentum
4.2
P1199605
Conservation of momentum
in elastic collisions
4.3
P1199711
Conservation of momentum in
inelastic collisions
4.4
P1199801
Conservation of momentum
in multiple elastic collisions
4.5
P1199902
Conservation of momentum
in multiple inelastic collisions
Newtons second law with Cobra3 and demonstration track.

3.1
P1199115
Law of inertia (Newton's 1st law)
3.2
P1199201
Fundamental law of dynamics
(Newton's 2nd Law)
3.3
P1199306
Law of reciprocal actions
(Newton's 3rd Law)
3.4
P1199405
Equivalence of inert mass
and heavy mass

Conservation of momentum in multiple inelastic collisions with 4-4 Timer and

air track.

82 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Mechanics

Handbooks

Physics Demonstration Experiments Magnet Board Mechanics 1

The use of the demonstration board for physics offers the following
advantages for the lecturer:
Minimal preparation time
DEMONSTRATION EXPERIMENTS
PHYSICS
Winfried Rssler
Georg Schollmeyer

Magnet Board Mechanics 1

Lucid and simple set-up

Labelling of the experiment directly on the board
Magnet-held arrows, linear and angular scales
Stable storage box
Both sides of board can be used for mechanics and optics
Galvanised sheet steel board in aluminium profile frame
Mechanics side: lacquered

01152.02

Optic side: white foil with lined grid

Physics Demonstration Experiments Magnet Board Mechanics 1 No. 01152.02 31 described Experiments
Please ask for a complete equipment list Ref. No. 21701

2 Simple machines

1 Forces
MT 1.1
Mass and weight

(12516)

MT 1.2
(12517)
Extension of a rubber band
and helical spring

MT 2.1
Double-sided lever

(12531)

MT 2.2
One-sided lever

(12532)

MT 2.3
(12533)
Double-sided lever and more than
two forces

MT 1.3
Hookes law

(12518)

MT 1.4
Making and calibrating a
dynamometer

(12519)

MT 1.5
Bending a leaf spring

(12520)

MT 2.5
(12535)
Moment of rotation (torque)

(12521)

MT 2.6
Beam balance

(12536)

MT 1.6
Force and counterforce

MT 2.7
Sliding weight balance

(12537)

MT 2.8
Fixed pulley

(12538)

MT 2.9
Free pulley

(12539)

MT 2.10
Block and tackle

(12540)

MT 2.11
Step wheel

(12541)

MT 2.12
Toothed-gearing

(12542)

MT 2.13
Belt drives

(12543)

MT 1.7
(12522)
Composition of forces having
the same line of application
MT 1.8
(12523)
Composition of non-parallel forces
MT 1.9
(12524)
Resolution of a force into
two non-parallel forces
MT 1.10
(12525)
Resolution of forces on an inclined
plane
MT 1.11
(12526)
Resolution of forces on a crane
MT 1.12
(12527)
Restoring force on a displaced
pendulum
MT 1.13
(12528)
Determination of the centre of
gravity of an irregular plate
MT 1.14
Frictional force

(12529)

MT 1.15
(12530)
Determination of the coefficient of
friction on an inclined plane

MT 2.4
Reaction at the supports

(12534)

Resolution of forces on an inclined plane (MT 1.10)

3 Oscillations
MT 3.1
Thread pendulum

(12544)

MT 3.2
Spring pendulum

(12545)

MT 3.3
Physical pendulum
(reversible pendulum)

(12546)

Fixed pulley (MT 2.8)

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 83

Mechanics

Handbooks

Physics Demonstration Experiments Magnet Board Mechanics 2

The use of the demonstration board for physics offers the following advantages
for the lecturer:
Minimal preparation time
DEMONSTRATION EXPERIMENTS
PHYSICS
Winfried Rssler
Georg Schollmeyer

Magnet Board Mechanics 2

Lucid and simple set-up

Labelling of the experiment directly on the board
Magnet-held arrows, linear and angular scales
Stable storage box
Both sides of board can be used for mechanics and optics
Galvanised sheet steel board in aluminium profile frame
Mechanics side: lacquered

01152.02

Optic side: white foil with lined grid

Physics Demonstration Experiments Magnet Board Mechanics 2 No. 01153.02 18 described Experiments
Please ask for a complete equipment list Ref. No. 21702

4 Movement
MT 4.1
(12960)
Uniform rectilinear movement

6 Mechanics of Fluids
and Gases
MT 6.1
U-tube manometer

(12967)

MT 6.2
Hydrostatic pressure

(12968)

MT 4.3
(12962)
Horizontal and sloping trajectories

MT 5.3
Communicating vessels

(12969)

MT 4.4
Newtons basic principle

MT 6.4
Hydraulic press

(12970)

MT 6.5
Artesian well

(12971)

MT 6.6
Archimedes principle

(12972)

MT 4.2
(12961)
Uniform accelerated rectilinear
movement

(12963)

5 Forms of Mechanical Energy

MT 5.1
(12964)
Energy transformation during
upward and downward runs
MT 5.2
Kinetic energy
MT 5.3
Energy of refraction

(12965)
(12966)

MT 6.7
(12973)
Density determination by measuring
buoyancy

Energy transformation during upward and downward runs (MT 5.1)

MT 6.8
(12974)
Discharge velocity of a vessel
MT 6.9
Pressure in flowing fluids

(12975)

MT 6.10
Pressure in gases

(12976)

MT 6.11
Boyle and Mariottes law

(12977)

Horizontal and sloping trajectories (MT 4.3)

84 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

2
Optics

2
Optics
Contents
2.1

Geometrical Optics

2.5

Polarisation

2.1.01-00 Measuring the velocity of light

2.5.01-00 Polarisation by quarterwave plates

2.1.02-00 Laws of lenses and optical instruments

2.5.02-00 Polarimetry

2.1.03-00 Dispersion and resolving power of the prism and grating spectroscope

2.5.03-00 Fresnels equations theory of reflection

2.2

Interference

2.2.01-00 Interference of light

2.5.04-00 Malus law

2.6

Applied Optics

2.2.02-00 Newtons rings

2.6.01-00 Faraday effect

2.2.03-00 Interference at a mica plate according to Pohl

2.6.02-00 Kerr effect

2.2.04-00 Fresnels zone construction / zone plate

2.6.03-00 Recording and reconstruction of holograms

2.2.05-00 Michelson interferometer

2.6.04-00 CO2-laser

2.2.06-00 Coherence and width of spectral lines with Michelson interferometer

2.6.05-11 LDA Laser Doppler Anemometry with Cobra3

2.2.07-00 Refraction index of air and CO2 with Michelson interferometer

2.6.07-01 Helium Neon Laser

2.3

Diffraction

2.3.01-00 Diffraction at a slit and Heisenbergs uncertainty principle

2.3.02-00 Diffraction of light at a slit and an edge
2.3.03-00 Intensity of diffractions due to pin hole diaphragms
and circular obstacles
2.3.04-00 Diffraction intensity of multiple slits and grids
2.3.05-00 Determination of the diffraction intensity at slit
and double slit systems

2.6.08-00 Optical pumping

2.6.09-00 Nd-YAG laser
2.6.10-00 Fibre optics
2.6.11-00 Fourier optics 2f Arrangement
2.6.12-00 Fourier optics 4f Arrangement Filtering and reconstruction
2.7

Handbooks
Advanced Optics and Laser Physics
Physics Demonstration Experiments Magnet Board Optics

2.3.06-00 Diffraction intensity through a slit and a wire Babinets theorem

2.4

Photometry

2.4.02-01 Photometric law of distance

2.4.02-11 Photometric law of distance with Cobra3
2.4.04-00 Lamberts law

86 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Geometrical Optics

Measuring the velocity of light 2.1.01-00

What you can learn about

Refractive index

Wavelength

Frequency

Phase

Modulation

Electric field constant

Magnetic field constant

Principle:
The intensity of the light is modulated and the phase relationship of the
transmitter and receiver signal compared. The velocity of light is calculated from the relationship between
the changes in the phase and the
light path.

What you need:

Light velocity measuring apparatus

11224.93

Screened cable, BNC, l = 1500 mm

07542.12

Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels

11459.95

Block, synthetic resin

06870.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Measuring the velocity of light
P2210100

Measuring the velocity of light in other media.

Tasks:
1. To determine the velocity of light
in air.
2. To determine the velocity of light
in water and synthetic resin and
to calculate the refractive indices.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 87

Optics

Geometrical Optics

2.1.02-00 Laws of lenses and optical instruments

What you can learn about

Law of lenses

Magnification

Focal length

Object distance

Telescope

Microscope

Path of a ray

Convex lens

Concave lens

Real image

Virtual image

Principle:
The focal lengths of unknown lenses
are determined by measuring the
distances of image and object and by
Bessels method. Simple optical
instruments are then constructed
with these lenses.

What you need:

Lens, mounted, f = +20 mm

08018.01

Lens, mounted, f = +50 mm

08020.01

Lens, mounted, f = +100 mm

08021.01

Lens, mounted, f = +300 mm

08023.01

Lens, mounted, f = -50 mm

08026.01

Lens, mounted, f = -200 mm

08028.01

Screen, translucent, 250 mm x 250 mm

08064.00

Screen with arrow slit

08133.01

Ground glass screen, 50 mm d = 50 mm

08136.01

Double condenser, f = 60 mm

08137.00

Object micrometer 1mm i.100 parts

62171.19

Ctenocephalus, msl

87337.10

Slide -Emperor Maximilian-

82140.00

Optical profile bench, l = 1000 mm

08282.00

Tasks:

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

1. To determine the focal length of

two unknown convex lenses by
measuring the distances of image
and object.

Diaphragm holder for optical base plate

08040.00

Lens holder

08012.00

Condenser holder

08015.00

Swinging arm

08256.00

Experimenting lamp 5, with stem

11601.10

Power supply 0-12 V DC/ 6 V, 12 V AC

13505.93

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Rule, plastic, 200 mm

09937.01

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Laws of lenses and optical instruments
P2210200

88 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Path of a ray in Galileo telescope.

2. To determine the focal length of a

convex lens and of a combination
of a convex and a concave lens
using Bessels method.
3. To construct the following optical
instruments:
1. Slide projector; image scale to
be determined
2. Microscope; magnification to
be determined
3. Kepler-type telescope
4. Galileos telescope
(opera glasses).

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Geometrical Optics

Dispersion and resolving power of the prism and grating spectroscope 2.1.03-00
What you can learn about

Maxwell relationship

Dispersion

Polarizability

Refractive index

Prism

Rowland grating

Spectrometer-goniometer

Principle:
The refractive indices of liquids,
crown glass and flint glass are determined as a function of the wavelength by refraction of light through
the prism at minimum deviation. The
resolving power of the glass prisms is
determined from the dispersion
curve.

Tasks:
1. To adjust the spectrometer-goniometer.
2. To determine the refractive index
of various liquids in a hollow prism.

What you need:

Spectrometer/goniometer with verniers

35635.02

Lamp holder, pico 9, for spectral lamps

08119.00

Spectral lamp Hg 100, pico 9 base

08120.14

Power supply for spectral lamps

13662.97

Prism, 60, Crownglass, h = 30 mm

08231.00

Hollow prism 60, l = 60 mm, h = 60 mm

08240.00

Diffraction grating, 4 lines/mm

08532.00

Diffraction grating, 8 lines/mm

08534.00

Diffraction grating,10 lines/mm

08540.00

Diffraction grating, 50 lines/mm

08543.00

Diffraction grating, 600 lines/mm

08546.00

Vernier calipers, stainless steel

03010.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

1
1

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Stand tube

02060.00

Wash bottle, plastic, 250 ml

33930.00

Glycerol, 250 ml

30084.25

Methanol 500 ml

30142.50

Cyclohexane for synthesis, 100 ml

31236.10

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Dispersion and resolving power of the prism
and grating spectroscope
P2210300

Dispersion curves of various substances.

3. To determine the refractive index

of various glass prism.
4. To determine the wavelengths of
the mercury spectral lines.
5. To demonstrate the relationship
between refractive index and
wavelength (dispersion curve).
6. To calculate the resolving power
of the glass prisms from the slope
of the dispersion curves.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

7. Determination of the grating constant of a Rowland grating based

on the diffraction angle (up to the
third order) of the high intensity
spectral lines of mercury.
8. Determination of the angular dispersion of a grating.
9. Determination of the resolving
power required to separate the
different Hg-Lines. Comparison
with theory.
Laboratory Experiments Physics 89

Optics

Interference

2.2.01-00 Interference of light

What you can learn about

Wavelength

Phase

Fresnel biprism

Fresnel mirror

Virtual light source

Principle:
By dividing up the wave-front of a
beam of light at the Fresnel mirror
and the Fresnel biprism, interference
is produced. The wavelength is determined from the interference patterns.

What you need:

Fresnel biprisms

08556.00

Prism table with holder

08254.00

Fresnel mirror

08560.00

Lens, mounted, f = +20 mm

08018.01

Lens, mounted, f = +300 mm, achromatic

08025.01

Lens holder

08012.00

Swinging arm

08256.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Optical profile bench, l = 1000 mm

08282.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Laser, He-Ne 1.0 mW, 230 VAC

08181.93

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Interference of light
P2220100

Geometrical arrangement, using the Fresnel mirror.

Tasks:
Determination of the wavelength of
light by interference
1. with Fresnel mirror,
2. with Fresnel biprism.

90 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Interference

Newtons rings 2.2.02-00

What you can learn about

Coherent light

Phase relationship

Path difference

Interference in thin films

Newtons ring apparatus

Principle:
In a Newtons rings apparatus,
monochromatic light interferes in
the thin film of air between the
slightly convex lens and a plane glass
plate. The wavelengths are determined from the radii of the interference rings.

What you need:

Newton rings apparatus

08550.00

Lens, mounted, f = + 50 mm

08020.01

Interference filters, set of 3

08461.00

Screen, translucent, 250 mm x 250 mm

08064.00

Mercury vapour high pressure lamp, 50 W

08144.00

Power supply 230V/50 Hz for 50 W Hg-lamp

13661.97

Double condenser, f = 60 mm

08137.00

Lens holder

08012.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Optical profile bench, l = 1000 mm

08282.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Rule, plastic, 200 mm

09937.01

Condenser holder

08015.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Newtons rings
P2220200

Radius of the interference rings as a function of the order number for various
wavelengths.

Tasks:
Using the Newtons rings apparatus,
to measure the diameter of the rings
at different wavelengths and:
1. to determine the wavelengths for
a given radius of curvature of the
lens
2. to determine the radius of curvature at given wavelengths.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 91

Optics

Interference

2.2.03-00 Interference at a mica plate according to Pohl

What you can learn about

Interference of equal
inclination

Interference of thin layers

Plane parallel plate

Refraction

Reflection

Optical path difference

Principle:
Monochromatic light falls on a plane
parallel mica plate. The light rays,
reflected at the front surface as well
as at the rear surface, will interfere
to form a pattern of concentric rings.
The radii of the rings depend on the
geometry of the experimental setup, the thickness of the mica plate
and the wavelength of the light.

What you need:

Mica plate

08558.00

Colour filter, 440 nm

08411.00

Colour filter, 525 nm

08414.00

Colour filter, 580 nm

08415.00

Spectral lamp Hg 100, pico 9 base

08120.14

Spectral lamp Na, pico 9 base

08120.07

Lamp holder, pico 9, for spectral lamps

08119.00

Swinging arm

08256.00

Plate holder with tension spring

08288.00

Screen, metal, 300 mm x 300 mm

08062.00

Stand tube

02060.00

Optical profile bench, l = 600 mm

08283.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Power supply for spectral lamps

13662.97

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Interference at a mica plate
according to Pohl
P2220300

Interference order m as a function of sin2
for Na-light.

Tasks:
The experiment will be performed
with the light of a Na-lamp and with
the light of different wavelengths of
a Hg-vapour tube.
1. The thickness of the mica plate is
determined from the radii of the
interference rings and the wavelength of the Na-lamp.
2. The different wavelengths of the
Hg-vapour tube are determined
from the radii of the interference
rings and the thickness of the
mica plate.

92 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Interference

Fresnels zone construction / zone plate 2.2.04-00

What you can learn about

Huygens-Fresnel principle

Fresnel and Fraunhofer
diffraction

Interference

Coherence

Fresnels zone construction

Zone plates

Principle:
A zone plate is illuminated with parallel laser light. The focal points of
several orders of the zone plate are
projected on a ground glass screen.

What you need:

Laser, He-Ne 1.0 mW, 230 VAC

08181.93

Fresnel zone plate, after Fresnel

08577.03

Lens holder

08012.00

Lens, mounted, f = +20 mm

08018.01

Lens, mounted, f = +50 mm

08020.01

Lens, mounted, f = +100 mm

08021.01

Lens, mounted, f = -50 mm

08026.01

Object holder 50 mm x 50 mm

08041.00

Ground glass screen, 50 mm d = 50 mm

08136.01

Polarisation filter, 50 mm, d = 50 mm

08613.00

Optical profile bench, l = 1000 mm

08282.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Fresnels zone construction / zone plate
P2220400
Geometry of the zone plate.

Tasks:
1. The laser beam must be widened
so that the zone plate is well illuminated. It must be assured that
the laser light beam runs parallel
over several meters.
2. The focal points of several orders
of the zone plate are projected on
a ground glass screen. The focal
lengths to be determined are plotted against the reciprocal value of
their order.
3. The radii of the zone plate are calculated.
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 93

Optics

Interference

2.2.05-00 Michelson interferometer

What you can learn about

Interference

Wavelength

Refractive index

Velocity of light

Phase

Virtual light source

Principle:
In the Michelson arrangement interference will occur by the use of 2
mirrors. The wavelength is determined by displacing one mirror using
the micrometer screw.

What you need:

Michelson interferometer

08557.00

Laser, He-Ne 1.0 mW, 230 VAC

08181.93

Swinging arm

08256.00

Lens, mounted, f = +20 mm

08018.01

Lens mounted, f = +5 mm

08017.01

Lens holder

08012.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

1
2

Optical profile bench, l = 600 mm

08283.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Screen, metal, 300 mm x 300 mm

08062.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Michelson interferometer
P2220500

Formation of circles on interference.

Tasks:

You can find more

Determination of the wavelength of

the light of the used laser.

advanced optics
in this brochure
Order No. 00117.02
(see page 121)
ADVANCED OPTICS
AND LASER PHYSICS

94 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Interference

Coherence and width of spectral lines with Michelson interferometer 2.2.06-00

What you can learn about

Fraunhofer and Fresnel diffraction

Interference

Spatial and time coherence

Coherence conditions

Coherence length for non
punctual light sources

Coherence time

Spectral lines (shape and half
width value)

Broadening of lines due to
Doppler effect and pressure
broadening

Michelson interferometer

Magnification

Principle:
The wavelengths and the corresponding lengths of coherence of the
green spectral lines of an extreme
high pressure Hg vapour lamp are
determined by means of a Michelson
interferometer.

What you need:

Michelson Interferometer

08557.00

High pressure mercury vapour lamp CS 50 W

08144.00

Power supply for Hg-CS/50 W Lamp

13661.97

Optical profile bench, l = 100 cm

08282.00

Base for optical profile bench

08284.00

Slide mount, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Lens holder

08012.00

Object holder 50 x 50 mm

08041.00

Swingin arm

08256.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Stand tube

02060.00

Mounted lens f = 20 mm

08018.01

Mounted lens f = 200 mm

08024.01

Iris diaphragm

08045.00

Coloured filter, green, 525 nm

08414.00

Ground-glass screen 50 x 50 mm

08136.01

Diaphragm holder, attachable

11604.09

Measuring magnifier

09831.00

Slit, adjustable up to 1 mm

11604.07

Diaphragm with 4 double slits

08523.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Coherence and width of spectral lines
with Michelson interferometer
P2220600

Beam path in Michelsons interferometer.

Different double slit combinations

are illuminated to verify the coherence conditions of non punctual
light sources. An illuminated auxiliary adjustable slit acts as a non
punctual light source.

Tasks:
1. Determination of the wavelength
of the green Hg spectral line as
well as of its coherence length.
2. The values determined in 1. are
used to calculate the coherence
time and the half width value of
the spectral line.
3. Verification of the coherence condition for non punctual light
sources.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 95

Optics

Interference

2.2.07-00 Refraction index of air and CO2 with Michelson interferometer

What you can learn about

Interference

Wavelength

Phase

Refraction index

Light velocity

Virtual light source

Principle:
A measurement cuvette set in the
beam path of a Michelson interferometer can be evacuated or filled
with CO2. The refraction indexes of
air or CO2 are determined through
the assessed modification of the
interference pattern.

What you need:

Michelson interferometer

08557.00

Laser, He-Ne 1.0 mW, 230 VAC

08181.93

Glass cell, diam. 21,5 mm

08625.00

Manual vacuum pump with manometer

08745.00

1
1

Optical profile bench, l = 600 mm

08283.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Swinging arm

08256.00

Lens holder

08012.00

Lens mounted, f = +5 mm

08017.01

Compressed gas, CO2, 21 g

41772.06

Fine control valve for pressure bottles

33499.00

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Screen, metal, 300 mm x 300 mm

08062.00

Tubing connect., Y-shape, d = 8-9 mm

47518.03

PVC tubing, d = 7 mm

03985.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Refraction index of air and CO2
with Michelson interferometer
P2220700

Number N of minima changes as a function of air pressure in the measuring

cuvette.

You can find more

advanced optics
in this brochure
Order No. 00117.02
(see page 121)
ADVANCED OPTICS
AND LASER PHYSICS

96 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Diffraction

Diffraction at a slit and Heisenbergs uncertainty principle 2.3.01-00

What you can learn about

Diffraction

Diffraction uncertainty

Kirchhoffs diffraction formula

Measurement accuracy

Uncertainty of location

Uncertainty of momentum

Wave-particle dualism

De Broglie relationship

Principle:
The distribution of intensity in the
Fraunhofer diffraction pattern of a
slit is measured. The results are evaluated both from the wave pattern
viewpoint, by comparison with
Kirchhoffs diffraction formula, and
from the quantum mechanics standpoint to confirm Heisenbergs uncertainty principle.

What you need:

Laser, He-Ne 1.0 mW, 230 VAC

08181.93

Diaphragm with 3 single slits

08522.00

Diaphragm with 4 double slits

08523.00

Diaphragm with 4 multiple slits

08526.00

Diaphragm holder for optical base plate

08040.00

Photoelement for optical base plate

08734.00

Sliding device, horizontal

08713.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Universal measuring amplifier

13626.93

1
1

Optical profile bench, l = 1500 mm

08281.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Diffraction at a slit and Heisenbergs
uncertainly principle
P2230100
Intensity in the diffraction pattern of a 0.1 mm wide slit at a distance of
1140 mm. The photocurrent is plotted as a function of the position.

Tasks:
1. To measure the intensity distribution of the Fraunhofer diffraction pattern of a single slit (e. g.
0.1 mm).
The heights of the maxima and
the positions of the maxima and
minima are calculated according
to Kirchhoffs diffraction formula
and compared with the measured
values.
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

2. To calculate the uncertainty of

momentum from the diffraction
patterns of single slits of differing
widths and to confirm Heisenbergs uncertainty principle.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 97

Optics

Diffraction

2.3.02-00 Diffraction of light at a slit and an edge

What you can learn about

Intensity

Fresnel integrals

Fraunhofer diffraction

Principle:
Monochromatic light is incident on a
slit or an edge. The intensity distribution of the diffraction pattern is
determined.

What you need:

Laser, He-Ne 1.0 mW, 230 VAC
Photoelement for optical base plate
Lens holder
Lens, mounted, f = -50 mm
Slit, adjustable
Screen, metal, 300 mm x 300 mm
Barrel base -PASSMeter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm
G-clamp
Measuring tape, l = 2 m
Multi-range meter with amplifier

08181.93
08734.00
08012.00
08026.01
08049.00
08062.00
02006.55
03001.00
02014.00
09936.00
07034.00

1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1

*Alternative:
Universal measuring amplifier
Digital multimeter 2010
Connecting cord, l = 75 cm, red
Connecting cord, l = 75 cm, blue

13625.93
07128.00
07362.01
07362.04

1
1
1
1

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Diffraction of light at a slit and an edge
P2230200

Intensity distribution on diffraction at the slit, as a function of the position

along a straight line parallel to the plane of the slit, standardised on the
intensity without the slit.

Tasks:

You can find more

1. Measurement of the width of a

given slit.

advanced optics

2. Measurement of the intensity distribution of the diffraction pattern

of the slit and

in this brochure
Order No. 00117.02

3. of the edge.

(see page 121)

ADVANCED OPTICS
AND LASER PHYSICS

98 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Diffraction

Intensity of diffractions due to pin hole diaphragms and circular obstacles 2.3.03-00
What you can learn about

Huygens principle

Interference

Fraunhofer and Fresnel
diffraction

Fresnels zone construction

Coherence

Laser

Airy disk

Airy ring

Poissons spot

Babinets theorem

Bessel function

Resolution of optical
instruments

Principle:
Pin hole diaphragms and circular
obstacles are illuminated with laser
light. The resulting intensity distributions due to diffraction are measured
by means of a photo diode.

What you need:

Laser, He-Ne 1.0 mW, 230 VAC

08181.93

Universal measuring amplifier

13626.93

1
1

Optical profile bench, l = 1500 mm

08281.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Sliding device, horizontal

08713.00

Object holder 50 mm x 50 mm

08041.00

Screen, metal, 300 mm x 300 mm

08062.00

Screen with diffracting elements

08577.02

Photoelement for optical base plate

08734.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Intensity of diffractions due to pin hole
diaphragms and circular obstacles
P2230300

Diffracted intensity I vs position x of the photodiode, using a diaphragm with

D1 = 0.25 mm.

Tasks:
1. The complete intensity distribution of the diffraction pattern of a
pin hole diaphragm (D1 = 0.25
mm) is determined by means of a
sliding photo diode. The diffraction peak intensities are compared
with the theoretical values. The
diameter of the pin hole diaphragm is determined from the
diffraction angles of peaks and
minima.
2. The positions and intensities of
minima and peaks of a second pin
hole diaphragm (D2 = 0.5 mm) are
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

determined. The diffraction peak

intensities are compared with the
theoretical values. The diameter of
the pin hole diaphragm is determined.
3. The positions of minima and peaks
of the diffraction patterns of two
complementary circular obstacles
(D*1 = 0.25 mm and D*2 = 0.5
mm) are determined. Results are
discussed in terms of Babinets
Theorem.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 99

Optics

Diffraction

2.3.04-00 Diffraction intensity of multiple slits and grids

What you can learn about

Huygens principle

Interference

Fraunhofer und Fresnel
diffraction

Coherence

Laser

Principle:
Multiple slits which all have the
same width and the same distance
among each other, as well as transmission grids with different grid constants, are submitted to laser light.
The corresponding diffraction patterns are measured according to
their position and intensity, by
means of a photo diode which can be
shifted.

What you need:

Laser, He-Ne 1.0 mW, 230 VAC

08181.93

Universal measuring amplifier

13626.93

1
1

Optical profile bench, l = 1500 mm

08281.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Sliding device, horizontal

08713.00

Lens holder

08012.00

Object holder 50 mm x 50 mm

08041.00

Lens, mounted, f = +20 mm

08018.01

Lens, mounted, f = +100 mm

08021.01

Photoelement for optical base plate

08734.00

Diaphragm with 3 single slits

08522.00

Diaphragm with 4 multiple slits

08526.00

Diffraction grating, 4 lines/mm

08532.00

Diffraction grating, 8 lines/mm

08534.00

Diffraction grating,10 lines/mm

08540.00

Diffraction grating, 50 lines/mm

08543.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Diffraction intensity
of multiple slits and grids
P2230400

Diffraction intensity I as a function of the position x for a threefold slit,

b1 = 0.1 mm and g = 0.25 mm. Distance between threefold slit and photocell: L = 107 cm. For comparison, the intensity distribution of a single slit,
b = 0.1 mm, is entered as a dotted line.

Tasks:
1. The position of the first intensity
minimum due to a single slit is
determined, and the value is used
to calculate the width of the slit.
2. The intensity distribution of the
diffraction patterns of a threefold, fourfold and even a fivefold
slit, where the slits all have the
same widths and the same distance among each other, is to be

100 Laboratory Experiments Physics

determined. The intensity relations

of the central peaks are to be
assessed.
3. For transmission grids with different lattice constants, the position
of the peaks of several orders of
diffraction is to be determined,
and the found value used to calculate the wavelength of the laser
light.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Diffraction

Determination of the diffraction intensity at slit and double slit systems 2.3.05-00
What you can learn about

Huygens principle

Interference

Fraunhofer and Fresnel
diffraction

Coherence

Laser

Principle:
Slit and double slit systems are illuminated with laser light. The corresponding diffraction patterns are
measured by means of a photodiode
which can be shifted, as a function
of location and intensity.

What you need:

Laser, He-Ne 1.0 mW, 230 VAC

08181.93

Universal measuring amplifier

13626.93

1
1

Optical profile bench, l = 1500 mm

08281.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Sliding device, horizontal

08713.00

Lens holder

08012.00

Object holder 50 mm x 50 mm

08041.00

Lens, mounted, f = +20 mm

08018.01

Lens, mounted, f = +100 mm

08021.01

Photoelement for optical base plate

08734.00

Diaphragm with 3 single slits

08522.00

Diaphragm with 4 double slits

08523.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Diffraction intensity I as a function of location x for the single slit b1 =

0.1 mm and b2 = 0.2 mm.
The x axis of the graph for b1 = 0.1 mm is shifted upwards. The intensity of
the areas next to the central peak is represented enlarged by a factor of 10.
(Distance between slit and photodiode L = 107 cm;  = 632.8 nm).

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Determination of diffraction intensity
at slit and double slit systems
P2230500

You can find more

advanced optics

Tasks:
1. Determination of the intensity
distribution of the diffraction patterns due to two slits of different
widths.
The corresponding width of the
slit is determined by means of the
relative positions of intensity values of the extremes. Furthermore,
intensity relations of the peaks are
evaluated.

2. Determination of location and

intensity of the extreme values of
the diffraction patterns due to
two double slits with the same
widths, but different distances
between the slits. Widths of slits
and distances between the slits
must be determined as well as the
intensity relations of the peaks.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

in this brochure
Order No. 00117.02
(see page 121)
ADVANCED OPTICS
AND LASER PHYSICS

Laboratory Experiments Physics 101

Optics

Diffraction

2.3.06-00 Diffraction intensity through a slit and a wire Babinets theorem

What you can learn about

Huygens principle

Interference

Fraunhofer und Fresnel
diffraction

Babinets theorem

Poissons spot

Coherence

Laser

Principle:
An aperture consisting of a single slit
and a complementary strip (wire) is
illuminated with a laser beam. The
corresponding diffraction patterns
are measured according to position
and intensity with a photocell which
can be shifted.

What you need:

Laser, He-Ne 1.0 mW, 220 V AC

08181.93

Universal measuring amplifier

13626.93

Optical profile bench l = 150 cm

08281.00

Base f. opt. profile-bench, adjust.

08284.00

Slide mount f. opt. pr.-bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Slide device, horizontal

08713.00

Object holder, 5 x 5 cm

08041.00

Photoelement f. opt. base plt.

08734.00

Screen, with diffracting elements

08577.02

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Connecting cable, l = 750 mm, red

07362.01

Connecting cable, l = 750 mm, blue

07362.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Diffraction intensity through a slit
and a wire Babinets theorem
P2230600

You can find more

advanced optics
in this brochure
Order No. 00117.02
(see page 121)
ADVANCED OPTICS
AND LASER PHYSICS

102 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Diffraction intensity I as a function of the position x for single slit a) and

strip b). Width of the diffracting object b = 0.2 mm.
The intensities in the areas next to the central peak are represented extended by a factor of 10. (Distance between diffracting object and photocell
L = 120 cm; Wavelength of the laser light  = 632.8 nm)

Tasks:
1. Determination of the intensity
distribution of the diffraction patterns due to a slit and complementary strip (wire).

3. Babinets theorem is discussed

using the diffraction patterns of
the slit and the complimentary
strip.

2. Determination of the intensity

relations of the diffraction pattern
peaks for the single slit.
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Photometry

Photometric law of distance 2.4.02-01

What you can learn about

Luminous flux

Quantity of light

Luminous intensity

Illuminance

Luminance

Principle:
The luminous intensity emitted by a
punctual source is determined as a
function of distance.

What you need:

Hand held measuring instrument Lux, RS 232

07137.00

Luxmeter probe

12107.01

1
1

Optical profile bench, l = 600 mm

08283.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Lamp socket E 14, on stem

06175.00

Filament lamps, 6 V/5 A

06158.00

Power supply 0-12 V DC/ 6 V, 12 V AC

13505.93

Universal clamp

37718.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Photometric law of distance
P2240201

Illuminance as a function of the reciprocal values of the square of the distances.

Tasks:
1. The luminous intensity emitted by
a punctual source is determined as
a function of distance from the
source.
2. The photometric law of distance is
verified by plotting illuminance as
a function of the reciprocal value
of the square of the distance.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 103

Optics

Photometry

2.4.02-11 Photometric law of distance with Cobra3

What you can learn about

Luminous flux

Quantity of light

Luminous intensity

Illuminance

Luminance

Principle:
The luminous intensity emitted by a
punctual source is determined as a
function of distance.

Experimental objective:
The luminous intensity is a function
of the distance of the light sensor
from the light source. The law for
point light sources on which this is
based should be determined.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3 Force/Tesla

14515.61

Lamp socket E 14, on stem

06175.00

Filament lamps, 6 V/5 A

06158.00

Power supply 0-12 V DC/ 6 V, 12 V AC

13505.93

Stand tube

02060.00

Distributor

06024.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Photo diode, G1

39119.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Carbon resistor 470 , 1W, G1

39104.15

Tasks:

Movement sensor with cable

12004.10

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

1. The luminous intensity emitted by

a punctual source is determined as
a function of distance from the
source.

Adapter, BNC socket - 4 mm plug

07542.20

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Plate holder, opening width 0...10 mm

02062.00

Weight holder, 1g, silver bronzing

02407.00

Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm

02412.00

Luminous intensity as a function of the square of the reciprocal of the distance (lamp diode)

2. The photometric law of distance is

verified by plotting illuminance as
a function of the reciprocal value
of the square of the distance.

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Photometric law of distance with Cobra3
P2240211

104 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Photometry

Lamberts law 2.4.04-00

What you can learn about

Luminous flux

Light quantity

Light intensity

Illuminance

Luminance

Principle:
Visible light impinges on a diffusely
reflecting surface. The luminance of
this surface is determined as a function of the angle of observation.

What you need:

Housing for experiment lamp

08129.01

Halogen lamp, 12 V/50 W

08129.06

Holder G 6.35 for 50/100 W halogen lamp

08129.04

Double condenser, f = 60 mm

08137.00

Lens holder

08012.00

Lens, mounted, f = +200 mm

08024.01

Zinc sulphide screen, 90 mm x 120 mm

08450.00

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Stand tube

02060.00

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 100 mm

02030.00

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 1000 mm

02028.55

Articulated radial holder

02053.01

Graduated disk, for demonstration

02053.02

Universal clamp with joint

37716.00

Power supply 0-12 V DC/ 6 V, 12 V AC

13505.93

Luxmeter probe

12107.01

Hand held measuring instrument Lux, RS 232

07137.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Lamberts law
P2240400

Illuminance as a function of cos .

Tasks:
1. The luminous flux emitted reflected by a diffusely reflecting surface
is to be determined as a function
of the angle of observation.
2. Lamberts law (cos-law) is to be
verified using the graph of the
measurement values.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 105

Optics

Photometry

2.5.01-00 Polarisation by quarterwave plates

What you can learn about

Plane

Circularly and elliptically
polarised light

Polariser

Analyzer

Plane of polarisation

Double refraction

Optic axis

Ordinary and extraordinary
ray

Principle:
Monochromatic light falls on a mica
plate perpendicular to its optic axis.
At the appropriate plate thickness
(/4, or quarter-wave plate) there is
a 90 phase shift between the ordinary and the extraordinary ray when
the light emerges from the crystal.
The polarisation of the emergent
light is investigated at different
angles between the optic axis of the
/4 plate and the direction of polarisation of the incident light.

What you need:

Photoelement for optical base plate

08734.00

Lens holder

08012.00

Lens, mounted, f = +100 mm

08021.01

Diaphragm holder for optical base plate

08040.00

Iris diaphragm

08045.00

Double condenser, f = 60 mm

08137.00

Condenser holder

08015.00

Mercury vapour high pressure lamp, 50 W

08144.00

Power supply 230V/50 Hz for 50 W Hg-lamp

13661.97

Interference filter yellow, 578 nm

08461.01

Polarisation filter on stem

08610.00

Optical profile bench, l = 1000 mm

08282.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Polarisation specimen, mica

08664.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Universal measuring amplifier

13626.93

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Polarisation by quarterwave plates
P2250100

Intensity distribution of polarised light as a function of the direction of transmission of the analyser: with /4 plate at various angular settings.

Tasks:
1. To measure the intensity of planepolarised light as a function of the
position of the analyser.

3. To perform experiment 2. with two

/4 plates one behind the other.

2. To measure the light intensity

behind the analyser as a function
of the angle between the optic
axis of the /4 plate and that of
the analyser.
106 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Polarisation

Polarimetry 2.5.02-00
What you can learn about

Half-shade principle

Optical rotatory power

Optical activity

Saccharimetry

Specific rotation

Reaction rate

Weber-Fechner law

Principle:
The rotation of the plane of polarisation through a sugar solution measured with a half-shade penumbra
polarimeter and the reaction rate
constant for the inversion of cane
sugar determined.

What you need:

Half-shade polarimeter, 230 V AC

35906.93

Immersion thermostat TC10

08492.93

Accessory set for TC10

08492.01

Bath for thermostat, Makrolon

08487.02

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Crucible tongs, l = 200 mm, stainless steel

33600.00

Beaker, 250 ml, low form, plastic

36013.01

Graduated cylinder, 100 ml, plastic

36629.01

Graduated vessel, 1 l, with handle

36640.00

Funnel, plastic, d = 100 mm

36891.00

Spoon with spatula end, l = 180 mm, PA, wide

38833.00

Stirring rods, BORO 3.3, l = 300 mm, d = 8 mm

40485.06

Pipette, with rubber bulb, long

64821.00

D (+)-Sucrose, 100 g

30210.10

Hydrochloric acid 37 %, 1000 ml

30214.70

Water, distilled 5 l

31246.81

D(+)-Lactose, powder 100 g

31577.10

Balance LG 311, 4 beams

44007.31

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Polarimetry
P2250200

Semi-logarithmic plot of the measured values from cane sugar inversion.

Tasks:
1. To determine the specific rotation
of cane sugar (sucrose) and lactose by measuring the rotation of
various solutions of known concentration.
2. To determine the reaction rate
constant when cane sugar is
transformed into invert sugar.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 107

Optics

Polarisation

2.5.03-00 Fresnels equations theory of reflection

What you can learn about

Electromagnetic theory of
light

Reflection coefficient

Reflection factor

Brewsters law

Law of refraction

Polarization

Polarization level

Principle:
Plane-polarized light is reflected at a
glas surface. Both the rotation of the
plane of polarization and the intensity of the reflected light are to be
determined and compared with
Frewsnels formulae for reflection.

What you need:

Laser, He-Ne 1.0 mW, 230 VAC

08181.93

Polarisation filter on stem

08610.00

Prism, 60 degrees, h = 36 mm, flint

08237.00

Prism table with holder

08254.00

Photoelement for optical base plate

08734.00

Protractor scale with pointer

08218.00

Articulated radial holder

02053.01

Stand tube

02060.00

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

H-base -PASS-

02009.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 630 mm

02027.55

Multi-range meter with amplifier

07034.00

0.8

EXP.

0.6

THEOR.


0.4



0.2

''

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Fresnels equations theory of reflection
P2250300

20

40

p

60

80

Measured and calculated curves for
"r and
r as a function of the angle of
incidence.

You can find more

Tasks:

Order No. 00117.02

1. The reflection coefficients for light

polarized perpendicular and parallel to the plane of incidence are
to be determined as a function of
the angle of incidence and poltted
graphically.

(see page 121)

2. The refractive index of the flint

glass prism is to be found.

advanced optics
in this brochure

ADVANCED OPTICS
AND LASER PHYSICS

108 Laboratory Experiments Physics

3. The reflection coefficients are to

be calculated using Fresnels formulae and compared with the
measured curves.

4. The reflection factor for the flint

glass prism is to be calculated.
5. The rotation of the polarization
plane for plane polarized light
when reflected is to be determined as a function of the angle
of incidence and presented graphically. It is then to be compared
with values calculated using Fresnels formulae.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Polarisation

Malus law 2.5.04-00

What you can learn about

Electric theory of light

Polarization

Polarizer

Analyzer

Brewster's law

Malus' law

Principle:
Linear polarized light passes through
a polarization filter.
Transmitted light intensity is determined as a function of the angular
position of the polarization filter.

What you need:

Laser, He-Ne 1.0 mW, 230 VAC

08181.93

Optical profile bench, l = 600 mm

08283.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Polarisation filter on stem

08610.00

Photoelement for optical base plate

08734.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Malus law
P2250400

Corrected photo cell current as a function of the angular position  of the polarization plane of the analyzer.

You can find more

advanced optics
in this brochure
Order No. 00117.02
(see page 121)

Tasks:
1. The plane of polarization of a linear polarized laser beam is to be
determined.
2. The intensity of the light transmitted by the polarization filter is to
be determined as a function of the
angular position of the filter.
3. Malus law must be verified.

ADVANCED OPTICS
AND LASER PHYSICS

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 109

Optics

Applied Optics

2.6.01-00 Faraday effect

What you can learn about

Electromagnetic field
interaction

Electron oscillation

Electromagnetism

Polarization

Verdets constant

Hall effect

Principle:
The angle of rotation of the polarisation-plane of plane polarized light
through a flint glass rod is found to
be a linear function of the product of
the mean flux-densitiy and the
length of the optical medium. The
factor of proportionally, called
Verdets constant, is investigated as
a function of the wavelength and the
optical medium.

What you need:

Glass rod for Faraday effect
Coil, 600 turns
Pole pieces, drilled
Iron core, U-shaped, laminated
Housing for experiment lamp
Halogen lamp, 12 V/50 W
Holder G 6.35 for 50/100 W halogen lamp
Double condenser, f = 60 mm
Variable transformer 25 V~/20 V-, 12 A
Ampermeter, 1 mA...3 A DC/AC
Commutator switch
Teslameter, digital
Hall probe, axial
Lens, mounted, f = +150 mm
Lens holder
Table top on rod
Object holder 50 mm x 50 mm
Colour filter, 440 nm
Colour filter, 505 nm
Colour filter, 525 nm
Colour filter, 580 nm
Colour filter, 595 nm
Polarisation filter with vernier
Screen, translucent, 250 mm x 250 mm
Optical profile bench, l = 1000 mm
Base for optical profile bench, adjustable
Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm
Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm
Universal clamp
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

06496.00
06514.01
06495.00
06501.00
08129.01
08129.06
08129.04
08137.00
13531.93
07036.00
06034.03
13610.93
13610.01
08022.01
08012.00
08060.00
08041.00
08411.00
08413.00
08414.00
08415.00
08416.00
08611.00
08064.00
08282.00
08284.00
08286.01
08286.02
37718.00
07362.01
07362.04

1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
5
1
3
3

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Faraday effect
P2260100
110 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Verdets constant as a function of the wavelength

+ measured values
--- theoretical values.

Tasks:
1. To determine the magnetic fluxdensitiy between the pole pieces
using the axial Hall probe of the
teslameter for different coil currents. The mean flux-density is
calculated by numerical integration and the ratio maximum fluxdensity over mean flux-density established.

3. To determine the angle of rotation

as a function of the mean fluxdensity using different colour filters. To calculate the corresponding Verdets constant in each case.
4. To evaluate Verdets constant as a
function of the wavelength.

2. To measure the maximum fluxdensity as a function of the coil

current and to establish the relationship between mean flux-density and coil current anticipating
that the ratio found under 1. remains constant.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Applied Optics

Kerr effect 2.6.02-00

What you can learn about

Polarization of light

Birefraction

Optical anisotropy

Modulation of light

Electro-optical modulator

PLZT-element

Principle:
Monochromatic, vertically polarized
light impinges on a PLZT element
(lead-lanthanum-zirconium-titanium compount) which is set in its
holder at 45 to the vertical.
An electric field is applied to the
PLZT element and causes it to
become birefractive. The phase-shift
between the normal and the extraordinary light beam behind the PLZT
element is recorded as a function of
the applied voltage and it is shown
that the phase-shift is proportional
to the square of the electric field
strength respectively of the voltage
applied. From the constant of pro-

What you need:

Kerr cell, PLZT element

08641.00

High voltage supply 0...10 kV

13670.93

Laser, He-Ne 1.0 mW, 230 VAC

08181.93

Polarisation filter on stem

08610.00

2
1

Optical profile bench, l = 600 mm

08283.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Photoelement for optical base plate

08734.00

Universal measuring amplifier

13626.93

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Kerr effect
P2260200

You can find more

advanced optics
in this brochure
Order No. 00117.02
(see page 121)
ADVANCED OPTICS
AND LASER PHYSICS

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Relative luminous intensity I0 behind the analyser as a function of the voltage U applied to the PLZT element and the phase-shift  between normal
and extraordinary beam.

portionality the Kerr constant is calculated for the PLZT element.

The Kerr effect has usually been
demonstrated with nitrobenzene in
the past. Since nitrobenzene is very
toxic and needs high voltages of
some kV the PLZT element which
only needs some hundred volts represents an attractive alternative.

Tasks:
1. The phase-shift between the normal and the extra-ordinary light
beam is to be recorded for different voltages applied to the PLZTelement respectively for different
electric field strengs.The halfwave voltage U ( l2 ) is to be determined.
2. By plotting the square of the
applied voltage versus the phase
shift between normal and extraordinary beam it is to be shown that
the relation between the two
quantities is approximately linear.
From the slope of the straight line
the Kerr constant is to be calculated.
Laboratory Experiments Physics 111

Optics

Applied Optics

2.6.03-00 Recording and reconstruction of holograms

What you can learn about

Object beam

Reference beam

Real and virtual image

Phase holograms

Amplitude holograms

Interference

Diffraction

Coherence

Developing of film

Principle:
In contrast to normal photography a
hologram can store information about
the three-dimensionality of an object.
To capture the three-dimensionality
of an object, the film stores not only
the amplitude but also the phase of
the light rays. To achieve this, a coherent light beam (laser light) is split
into an object and a reference beam
by being passed through a beam splitter. These beams interfere in the plane
of the holographic film. The hologram
is reconstructed with the reference
beam which was also used to record
the hologram.

What you need:

Base plate in experimental case
He/Ne Laser, 5mW with holder
Power supply for laser head 5 mW
Magnetic foot for optical base plate
Holder for diaphragm/ beam plitter
Sliding device, horizontal
XY-shifting device
Adapter ring device
Achromatic objective 20 x N.A.0.4
Pin hole 30 micron
Adjusting support 35 x 35 mm
Surface mirror 30 x 30 mm
Surface mirror,large, d = 80 mm
Beam plitter 1/1, non polarizing
Object for holography
Holographic plates, 20 pcs.*
Darkroom equipment for holography

08700.01
08701.00
08702.93
08710.00
08719.00
08713.00
08714.00
08714.01
62174.20
08743.00
08711.00
08711.01
08712.00
08741.00
08749.00
08746.00
08747.88

1
1
1
6
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1

Setup for recording and reconstruction of a transmission hologram.

consisting of:
Plastic trays, 4 pcs. Laboratory gloves, medium, 100 pcs. Tray thermometer, offset, +40C Roller squeegee Clamps, 2 pcs. Film tongs, 2 pcs.
Darkroom lamp with green filter Light bulb 230 V/15 W Funnel
Narrow-necked bottles, 4 pcs.
Set of photographic chemicals
08746.88 1
Consisting of: Holographic developer Stop bath Wetting agent
Laminate; Paint
Bleaching chemicals:
Potassium dichromate, 250 g
Sulphuric acid, 95-98%, 500 ml

30102.25
30219.50

1
1

*Alternative:
Holographic sheet film
Glass plate, 120 x 120 x 2 mm

08746.01
64819.00

1
2

Tasks:
1. Capture the holographic image of
an object.
2. Perform the development and
bleaching of this phase hologram.
3. Reconstruct the transmission
hologram (reconstruction beam is
the reference beam during image
capture).

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Recording and reconstruction of holograms P2260300
112 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Applied Optics

CO2-laser 2.6.04-00
What you can learn about

Molecular vibration

Exitation of molecular
vibration

Electric discharge

Spontaneous emission

Vibration niveau

Rotation niveau

Inversion

Induced emission

Spectrum of emission

Polarization

Brewster angle

Optical resonator

Principle:
Among molecular laser, the CO2-laser
is of greatest practical importance.
The high level of efficiency with which
laser radiation can be generated in
continuous wave (cw) and pulse operation is its most fascinating feature.
The experimental equipment set is an
open CO2-didactic laser system of
max. 8 W power output. Since it is an
open system, all components of the
system can be handled individually
and the influence of each procedure
on the output power can be studied.
One very primary and essential target
in learning is the alignment of the
CO2-laser by means of a He-Ne-laser.

What you need:

CO2-laser tube, detachable, typically 5 W
Module box for CO2-laser tube
Set of laser mirrors, ZnSe and Si
Optical bench on steel rail, l = 1,3 m
HV-power supply 5 kV/50 mA DC
Ballast resistor unit incl. 3 HV cables
Cooling water unit, portable
Rotatory vane vacuum pump, two stages
Gas filter/buffer unit
He/Ne-laser/adjusting device
Diaphragm for adjusting CO2 Laser
Screen, translucent, 250 mm x 250 mm
Right angle clamp -PASSPowermeter 30 mW/10 Watt
Support for power probe
Protection glasses, 10.6 micro-m
Cleaning set for laser
ZnSe biconvex lens, d = 24 mm, f = 150 mm
Digital Thermometer, 2 x NiCr-Ni
HV-isolated temperature probe
Control panel with support, 1 gas*
Pressure control valve 200/3 bar, CO2/He*
Laser gas in bottle, 50 l/200 bar*

08596.00
08597.00
08598.00
08599.00
08600.93
08601.00
08602.93
02751.93
08605.00
08607.93
08608.00
08064.00
02040.55
08579.93
08580.00
08581.00
08582.00
08609.00
07050.01
08584.00
08606.00
08604.01
08603.00

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

*Alternative to:
Laser gas mixing unit, 3 gases

08606.88

08610.10

08611.00

Option:
Experiment set for laser beam analysis
1. Estimation of wavelength by diffraction grating and
2. Distribution of power by diaphragm
IR conversion plate for observation of CO2-laser
infrared radiation

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

CO2-laser
P2260400
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laser power as a function of the angle of inclination of the brewster window

normal N.

Tasks:
1. Align the CO2-laser and optimize
its power output.
2. Check the influence of the Brewster windows position on the
power output.
3. Determine the power output as a
function of the electric power
input and gasflow.
4. Evaluate the efficiency as a function of the electric power input
and gasflow.

5. If the gas-mixing unit is supplied

the influence of the different
components of the laser gas (CO2,
He, N2) to the output efficiency of
the CO2-laser are analyzed.
6. Measurement of temperatures
differences for the laser gas
(imput / output) for study of conversion efficiency.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 113

Optics

Applied Optics

2.6.05-11 LDA Laser Doppler Anemometry with Cobra3

What you can learn about

Interference

Doppler effect

Scattering of light by small
particles (Mie scattering)

High- and low-pass filters

Sampling theorem

Spectral power density

Turbulence

Principle:
Small particles in a current pass
through the LDA measuring volume
and scatter the light whose frequency is shifted by the Doppler effect
due to the particle movement.
The frequency change of the scattered light is detected and converted
into a particle or flow velocity.

What you need:

Optical base plate with rubberfeet
He/Ne Laser, 5 mW with holder
Power supply for laser head 5 mW
Adjusting support 35 x 35 mm
Surface mirror 30 x 30 mm
Magnetic foot for optical base plate
Holder for diaphragm/ beam plitter
Lens, mounted, f = +100 mm
Lens, mounted, f = +50 mm
Lens, mounted, f = +20 mm
Iris diaphragm
Beam plitter 1/1, non polarizing
Si-Photodetector with Amplifier
Control Unit for Si-Photodetector
Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair
Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm
Prism table with holder for optical base plate
Lens holder for optical base plate
Screen, white, 150 x 150 mm
XY-shifting device
Pin hole 30 micron
LDA-Accessory-Set
Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 630 mm
Right angle clamp -PASSUniversal clamp
Support base -PASSAspirator bottle, clear glass, 1000 ml
Silicone tubing, d = 7 mm
Pinchcock, width 10 mm
Glass tube, AR-glass, straight, d = 8 mm, l = 80 mm, 10 pcs.
Rubber stopper, d = 32/26 mm, 1 hole
Rubber stopper, d = 22/17 mm, 1 hole
Measuring tape, l = 2 m
Spatulas, double bladed, l = 150 mm, wide
Beaker, DURAN, short form, 150 ml
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
114 Laboratory Experiments Physics

08700.00
08701.00
08702.93
08711.00
08711.01
08710.00
08719.00
08021.01
08020.01
08018.01
08045.00
08741.00
08735.00
08735.99
07542.27
07542.11
08725.00
08723.00
09826.00
08714.00
08743.00
08740.00
02027.55
02040.55
37718.00
02005.55
34175.00
39296.00
43631.10
36701.65
39258.01
39255.01
09936.00
33460.00
36012.00
12150.00

1
1
1
2
2
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
4
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1

Measurement of the signal spectrum with a signal peak

Tasks:
1. Measurement of the light-frequency change of individual light
beams which are reflected by
moving particles.

2. Determination of the flow velocities.

Power supply 12V/2A

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Software Cobra3 Fourier Analysis
Sliding device, horizontal
PC, Windows 95 or higher

12151.99
14602.00
14514.61
08713.00

1
1
1
1

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

LDA Laser Doppler Anemometry
with Cobra3
P2260511
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Applied Optics

Helium Neon Laser 2.6.07-01

What you can learn about

Spontaneous and stimulated
light emission

Inversion

Collision of second type

Gas discharge tube

Resonator cavity

Transverse and longitudinal
resonator modes

Birefringence

Brewster angle

Littrow prism

Fabry Perot Etalon

Principle:
The difference between spontaneous
and stimulated emission of light is
demonstrated. The beam propagation
within the resonator cavity of a HeNe laser and its divergence are determined, its stability criterion is
checked and the relative output
power of the laser is measured as a
function of the tubes position inside
the resonator and of the tube current.

What you need:

HeNe laser, basic set

08656.93

Photoelement, silicon

08734.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Screen, white, 150 x 150 mm

09826.00

Danger sign Laser

06542.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Vernier calipers, stainless steel

03010.00

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Protection glasses HeNe laser

08581.10

Cleaning set for laser

08582.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Helium Neon Laser
P2260701
Option:
Experimentation set Helium-Neon laser, advanced set

08656.02

Helium Neon Laser, advanced set

P2260705

You can find more

advanced optics

Relative output power as a function of mirror spacing.

The following items can be realized

with advanced set 08656.02.
By means of a birefringent tuner and
a Littrow prism different wavelengths can be selected and quantitatively determined if a monochromator is available.
Finally you can demonstrate the existence of longitudinal modes and
the gain profile of the He-Ne laser
provided an analysing Fabry Perot
system is at your disposal.

3. Measure the integral relative output power as a function of the

laser tubes position within the
hemispherical resonator.
4. Measure the beam diameter within the hemispherical resonator
right and left of the laser tube.
5. Determine the divergence of the
laser beam.
6. Measure the integral relative output power as a function of the
tube current.

Tasks:

The He-Ne laser can be tuned using

a BFT or a LTP. Longitudinal modes
can be observed by use of a Fabry
Perot Etalon of low finesse. Remark:
These points can only be covered
quantitatively if a monochromator
and an analysing Fabry Perot system
are available.

in this brochure
Order No. 00117.02
(see page 121)
ADVANCED OPTICS
AND LASER PHYSICS

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

1. Set up the He-Ne laser. Adjust the

resonator mirrors by use of the
pilot laser. (left mirror: VIS, HR,
plane ; right mirror: VIS, HR, R =
700 mm)
2. Check on the stability condition of
a hemispherical resonator.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 115

Optics

Applied Optics

2.6.08-00 Optical pumping

What you can learn about

Spontaneous emission

Induced emission

Mean lifetime of a
metastable state

Relaxation

Inversion

Diode laser

Principle:
The visible light of a semiconductor
diode laser is used to excite the
neodymium atoms within a Nd-YAG
(Neodymium-Yttrium Aluminium
Garnet) rod. The power output of the
semiconductor diode laser is first
recorded as a function of the injection current. The fluorescent spectrum of the Nd-YAG rod is then determined and the maon absorption
lines of the Nd-atoms are verified.
Conclusively, the mean life-time of
the 4F3/2-level of the Nd-atoms is
measured in appoximation.

What you need:

Basic set optical pumping

08590.93

Sensor for measurement of beam power

08595.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels

11459.95

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

0,6

Protection glasses for Nd-YAG laser

08581.20

0,5

Prel

1,0
0,9
0,8
0,7

804,4 nm

0,4

808,4 nm

0,3

Optional:
Optical base plate in exp. case

812,9 nm

0,2

817,3 nm

0,1

08700.01

1
10

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Optical pumping
P2260800

20

30

40

50

60

T
C

Relative fluorescent power of the Nd-YAG rod as a function of the diode

temperature (wavelength) for I = 450 mA.

Tasks:
1. To determine the power output of
the semiconductor diode laser as a
function of the injection current.
2. To trace the fluorescent spectrum
of the Nd-YAG rod pumped by the
diode laser and to verify the main
absorption lines of neodymium.
3. To measure the mean life-time of
the 4F3/2-level of the Nd-atoms.
4. For further applications see experiment 2.6.09 Nd-YAG laser.

116 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Applied Optics

Nd-YAG laser 2.6.09-00

What you can learn about

Optical pumping

Spontaneous emission

Induced emission

Inversion

Relaxation

Optical resonator

Resonator modes

Polarization

Frequency doubling

Principle:
The rate equation model for an optically pumped four-level laser system
is determined. As lasing medium, a
Nd-YAG (Neodymium-Yttrium Aluminium Garnet) rod has been selected which is pumped by means of a
semiconductor diode laser.
The IR-power output of the Nd-YAG
laser is measured as a function of the
optical power input and the slope efficiency as well as the threshold
power are determined.

What you need:

PNd-YAG

Basic set optical pumping

08590.93

Sensor for measurement of beam power

08595.00

Nd-YAG laser cavity mirror/holder

08591.01

Laser cavity mirror frequency doubling

08591.02

Frequency doubling crystal in holder

08593.00

Filter plate, short pass type

08594.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels

11459.95

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Protection glasses for Nd-YAG laser

08581.20

Cleaning set for laser

08582.00

Optional:

mW
25

20

From graphic:
Threshold power = 57 mW

15

From graphic:
Slope efficiency: 30%

10

Optical base plate in exp. case

08700.01

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Nd-YAG laser
P2260900

Pump power
mW

Tasks:
1. Set up the Nd-YAG laser and optimize its power output.
2. The IR-power output of the NdYAG laser is to be measured as a
function of the pump power. The
slope efficiency and the threshold
power are to be determined.
3. Verify the quadratic relationship
betweenthe power of the fundamental wave, with  = 1064 nm,
and the beam power of the second
harmonic with  = 532 nm.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

50

100

150

Nd-YAG laser power output as a function of the pump power  = 808.4 nm.

Finally, a KTP-crystal is inserted into

the laser cavity and frequency doubling is demonstrated. The quadratic
relationship between the power of
the fundamental wave and the beam
power for the second harmonic is
then evident.
Laboratory Experiments Physics 117

Optics

Applied Optics

2.6.10-00 Fibre optics

What you can learn about

Total reflection

Diode laser

Gaussian beam

Monomode and multimode
fibre

Numerical aperture

Transverse and longitudinal
modes

Transit time

Threshold energy

Slope efficiency

Velocity of light

Principle:
The beam of a laser diode is treated
in a way that it can be coupled into
a monomode fibre. The problems
related to coupling the beam into
the fibre are evaluated and verified.
In consequence a low frequency signal is transmitted through the fibre.
The numerical aperture of the fibre is
recorded. The transit time of light

What you need:

Experimentation Set Fibre Optics

08662.93

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Oscilloscope 100 MHz, 2-channel

11451.99

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Fibre optics
P2261000

Relative output power at the fibre end versus angle readout.

through the fibre is measured and

the velocity of light within the fibre
is determined. Finally the measurement of the relative output power of
the diodelaser as a function of the
supply current leads to the characteristics of the diodelaser such as
threshold energy and slope
efficiency.

Tasks:
1. Couple the laser beam into the
fibre and adjust the setting-up in
a way that a maximum of output
118 Laboratory Experiments Physics

power is achieved at the exit of

the fibre.
2. Demonstrate the transmission of a
LF signal through the fibre.
3. Measure the numerical aperture
of the fibre.
4. Measure the transit time of light
through the fibre and determine
the velocity of light within the
fibre.
5. Determine the relative output
power of the diodelaser as a function of the supply current.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Applied Optics

Fourier optics 2f Arrangement 2.6.11-00

What you can learn about

Fourier transform

Lenses

Fraunhofer diffraction

Index of refraction

Huygens principle

Principle:
The electric field distribution of light
in a specific plane (object plane) is
Fourier transformed into the 2 f configuration.

What you need:

Optical base plate with rubberfeet

08700.00

He/Ne Laser, 5mW with holder

08701.00

Power supply for laser head 5 mW

08702.93

Adjusting support 35 x 35 mm

08711.00

Surface mirror 30 x 30 mm

08711.01

Magnetic foot for optical base plate

08710.00

Holder for diaphragm/ beam plitter

08719.00

Lens, mounted, f = +150 mm

08022.01

Lens, mounted, f = +100 mm

08021.01

Lens holder for optical base plate

08723.00

Screen, white, 150 x 150 mm

09826.00

Diffraction grating, 50 lines/mm

08543.00

Screen with diffracting elements

08577.02

Achromatic objective 20 x N.A.0.4

62174.20

Sliding device, horizontal

08713.00

XY-shifting device

08714.00

Adapter ring device

08714.01

Pin hole 30 micron

08743.00

Rule, plastic, 200 mm

09937.01

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Fourier optics 2 f Arrangement
P2261100

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Experimental set-up for the fundamental principles of Fourier optic (2f setup). *only required for the 5 mW laser!

Tasks:
Investigation of the Fourier transform by a convex lens for different
diffraction objects in a 2 f set-up.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 119

Optics

Applied Optics

2.6.12-00 Fourier optics 4f Arrangement Filtering and reconstruction

What you can learn about

Fourier transform

Lenses

Fraunhofer diffraction

Index of refraction

Huygens principle

Debye-Sears-effect

Principle:
The electric field distribution of light
in a specific plane (object plane) is
Fourier transformed into the 4f
configuration by 2 lenses and optically filtered with appropriate diaphragms.

What you need:

Optical base plate with rubberfeet
He/Ne Laser, 5mW with holder
Power supply for laser head 5 mW
Adjusting support 35 x 35 mm
Surface mirror 30 x 30 mm
Magnetic foot for optical base plate
Holder for diaphragm/beam plitter
Lens, mounted, f = +100 mm
Lens holder for optical base plate
Screen, white, 150 x 150 mm
Slide -Emperor MaximilianScreen with arrow slit
Diffraction grating, 4 lines/mm
Diffraction grating, 50 lines/mm
Diaphragms, d = 1, 2, 3 and 5 mm
Screen with diffracting elements
Sliding device, horizontal
XY-shifting device
Achromatic objective 20 x N.A.0.4
Adapter ring device
Pin hole 30 micron
Rule, plastic, 200 mm
Ultrasonic generator
Glass cell, 150 x 55 x 100 mm
Table with stem
Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 250 mm, d = 10 mm
Bosshead
Universal clamp

08700.00
08701.00
08702.93
08711.00
08711.01
08710.00
08719.00
08021.01
08723.00
09826.00
82140.00
08133.01
08532.00
08543.00
09815.00
08577.02
08713.00
08714.00
62174.20
08714.01
08743.00
09937.01
13920.99
03504.00
09824.00
02031.00
02043.00
37718.00

1
1
1
2
2
9
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1

Principle of the set-up for coherent optical filtration.

Tasks:
1. Optical filtration of diffraction
objects in 4f set-up.
2. Reconstruction of a filtered image.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Fourier optics 4 f Arrangement
Filtering and reconstruction
P2261200
120 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Optics

Handbooks

Advanced Optics and Laser Physics

For free
ADVANCED OPTICS
AND LASER PHYSICS

Advanced Optics
and Laser Physics

00117.02

Laser Physics I Experiments with

coherent light
01179.02

Laser Physics II
Holography

23 described Experiments
Please ask for a complete equipment
list Ref. No. 22614

16 described Experiments
Please ask for a complete equipment
list Ref. No. 22702

11 described Experiments
Please ask for a complete equipment
list Ref. No. 22703

18 described Experiments
Please ask for a complete equipment
list Ref. No. 22704

Laser Physics
LEP
Helium Neon Laser
LEP
CO2-laser
LEP
Nd-YAG-laser

1 Diffraction of light
LP 1.1
(12166)
Diffraction of light through a slit and at
an edge.
LP 1.2
(12167)
Diffraction through a slit and
Heisenbergs uncertainty principle.
LP 1.3
(12168)
Diffraction of light through a double slit
or by a grid.
LP 1.4
(12169)
Diffraction of light through a slit and
stripes, Babinets theorem

LH 1
Fresnel zone plate

(12900)

LH 2
White light hologram

(12901)

LH 3
White light hologram
with expansion system

(12902)

LH 4
Transmission hologram

(12903)

LH 5
Transmission hologram
with expansion system

(12904)

2 Interference of light
LP 2.1
Fresnel mirror and biprism
LP 2.2
Michelson interferometer
LP 2.3
Newtons rings

LH 6
Transfer hologram from a
master hologram.

(12905)

(12171)

LH 7
Double exposure procedure

(12906)

(12172)

LH 8
Time-averaging procedure I
(with tuning fork).

12907)

LH 9
Time-averaging procedure II
(with loudspeaker).

(12908)

LI 1
(13066)
Michelson interferometer
LI 2
(13067)
Michelson interferometer high resolution
LI 3
(13068)
Mach - Zehnder interferometer
LI 4
(13069)
Sagnac interferometer
LI 5
(13070)
Doppler-Effect with Michelson interferom.
LI 6
(13071)
Magnetostriction with Michelson
interferometer
LI 7
(13072)
Thermal expansion of solids
with Michelson interferometer
LI 8
(13073)
Refraction index of CO2-gas with
Michelson interferometer
LI 9
(13074)
Refraction index of air
with Michelson interferometer
LI 10
(13075)
Refraction index of air with
Mach-Zehnder interferometer
LI 11
(13076)
Refraction index of of CO2-gas with
Mach-Zehnder interferometer
LI 12
(13077)
Fabry - Perot interferometer determination of the wavelength of laserlight
LI 13
(13078)
Fabry - Perot interferometer
optical resonator modes
LI 14
(22611)
Fourier optics 2 f arrangement
LI 15
(22612)
Fourier optics 4 f arrangement, filtering
and reconstruction
LI 16
(13079)
Optical determination of the velocity of
ultrasound in liquids phasemodulation
of laserlight by ultrasonic waves
LI 17
(13080)
LDA Laser Doppler Anemometry
LI 18
(13081)
Twyman-Green interferometer

(P2260700)
(P2260400)
(P2260900)

Advanced Optics
LP 1.3
(P1216800)
Diffraction of light through
a double slit or by a grid
LP 1.4
(P1216900)
Diffraction of light through
a slit and stripes, Babinets theorem
LP 2.2
(P1217100)
Michelson interferometer
LP 2.3
(P1217200)
Newtons rings
LP 2.3
(P1217400)
Polarisation through /4 plates
LP 3.4
(P1217600)
Kerr effect
LP 3.5
(P1217700)
Faraday effect
LP 4.3
(P1218000)
Determination of the index of refraction
of CO2 with Michelsons interferometer
LH 3
(P1290200)
White light hologram with expansion
system
LH 5
(P1290400)
Transmission hologram with expansion
system
LH 6
(P1290500)
Transfer hologram from a
master hologram
LH 10
(P1290900)
Real time procedure I
(bending of a plate)
LI 3
(P1306700)
Michelson interferometer
High Resolution
LI 5
(P1307000)
Doppler effect with the Michelson
interferometer
LI 6
(P1307100)
Magnetostriction with the Michelson
interferometer
LI 10
(P1307500)
Determination of the refraction index of
air with the Mach-Zehnder interferometer

(12170)

3 Polarisation of light
LP 3.1
(12173)
Fresnels law, theory of reflection
LP 3.2
(12174)
Polarisation through /4 plates
LP 3.3
(12175)
Half shadow polarimeter, rotation of polarisation through an optically active medium
LP 3.3
(12176)
Kerr effect
LP 3.5
(12177)
Faraday effect

LH 10
Real time procedure I
(bending of a plate).

01400.02

12909)

LH 11
(12910)
Real time procedure II (oscillating plate).

4 Refraction of light
LP 4.1
(12178)
Index of refraction n of a flint glass prism
LP 4.2
(12179)
Determination of the index of refraction
of air with Michelsons interferometer
LP 4.3
(12180)
Determination of the index of refraction
of CO2 with Michelsons interferometer
5 Law of radiation
LP 5.1
Lamberts law of radiation

(12181)

LI 12
(P1307700)
Fabry-Perot interferometer Determination of the laser lights wavelength
LI 13
(P1307800)
Fabry-Perot interferometer
optical resonator modes

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laser Physics III

Interferometry

01401.02

LI 15
(P2261200)
Fourier optics optical filtration
4f Arrangement
LI 17
(P1308000)
LDA Laser Doppler Anemometry

Laboratory Experiments Physics 121

Optics

Handbooks

Physics Demonstration Experiments Magnet Board Optics

Geometrical optics and theory of colours on the magnetic board
The demonstration system presents the following advantages:
simple handling and minimum preparation time through components with magnets
DEMONSTRATION EXPERIMENTS
PHYSICS
Georg Schollmeyer

clear and dust proof storage of all components in the device shaped
wooden tray
detailed description of experiments with figures.
60 experiments covering light propagation (7), mirror (16), diffraction (10), lenses (13),
colours (6), eye (3), optical instruments (5)

01151.02

Magnet Board Optics

clear length of beams through 50 W halogen lamp with magnet and large model objects

Physics Demonstration Experiments Magnet Board Optics No. 01151.02 60 described Experiments
Please ask for a complete equipment list Ref. No. 22701
1 Propagation of light
OT 1.1
(11000)
Rectilinear propagation of light
OT 1.2
(11001)
Shadow formation by a point light source
OT 1.3
(11002)
Umbra and penumbra with two point
light sources
OT 1.4
(11003)
Umbra and penumbra with an extensive
light source
OT 1.5
(11004)
Length of shadows
OT 1.6
(11005)
Solar and lunar eclipses with a point
light source
OT 1.7
(11006)
Solar and lunar eclipses with an
extensive light source
2 Mirrors
OT 2.1
(11007)
Reflection of light
OT 2.2
(11008)
The law of reflection
OT 2.3
(11009)
Formation of an image point by a plane
mirror
OT 2.4
(11010)
Image formation by a plane mirror
OT 2.5
(11011)
Applications of reflection by plane mirrors
OT 2.6
(11012)
Reflection of light by a concave mirror
OT 2.7
(11013)
Properties of a concave mirror
OT 2.8
(11014)
Real images with a concave mirror
OT 2.9
(11015)
Law of imagery and magnification of a
concave mirror
OT 2.10
(11016)
Virtual images with a concave mirror
OT 2.11
(11017)
Aberrations with a concave mirror
OT 2.12
(11018)
Reflection of light by a convex mirror

122 Laboratory Experiments Physics

OT 2.13
(11019)
Properties of a convex mirror
OT 2.14
(11020)
Image formation by a convex mirror
OT 2.15
(11021)
Law of imagery and magnification of a
convex mirror
OT 2.16
(11022)
Reflection of light by a parabolic mirror
3 Refraction
OT 3.1
(11023)
Refraction at the air-glass boundary
OT 3.2
(11024)
Refraction at the air-water boundary
OT 3.3
(11025)
The law of refraction
OT 3.4
(11026)
Total reflection at the glass-air boundary
OT 3.5
(11027)
Total reflection at the water-air
boundary
OT 3.6
(11028)
Passage of light through a planoparallel
glass plate
OT 3.7
(11029)
Refraction by a prism
OT 3.8
(11030)
Light path through a reversing prism
OT 3.9
(11031)
Light path through a deflection prism
OT 3.10
(11032)
Light transmission by total reflection

OT 4.8
(11040)
Image formation by a divergent lens
OT 4.9
(11041)
Law of imagery and magnification of a
divergent lens
OT 4.10
(11042)
Lens combination consisting of
two convergent lenses
OT 4.11
(11043)
Lens combination consisting of a
convergent and a divergent lens
OT 4.12
(11044)
Spherical aberration
OT 4.13
(11045)
Chromatic aberration
5 Colours
OT 5.1
(11046)
Colour dispersion with a prism
OT 5.2
(11047)
Non-dispersivity of spectral colours
OT 5.3
(11048)
Reunification of spectral colours
OT 5.4
(11049)
Complementary colours

OT 5.5
Additive colour mixing
OT 5.6
Subtractive colour mixing

(11051)

6 The human eye

OT 6.1
(11052)
Structure and function of the human eye
OT 6.2
(11053)
Short-sightedness and its correction
OT 6.3
(11054)
Long-sightedness and its correction
7 Optical equipment
OT 7.1
(11055)
The magnifying glass
OT 7.1
(11056)
The camera
OT 7.3
(11057)
The astronomical telescope
OT 7.4
(11058)
The Newtonian reflecting telescope
OT 7.5
(11059)
Herschels reflecting telescope

4 Lenses
OT 4.1
(11033)
Refraction of light by a convergent lens
OT 4.2
(11034)
Properties of a convergent lens
OT 4.3
(11035)
Real images with a convergent lens
OT 4.4
(11036)
Law of imagery and magnification of a
convergent lens
OT 4.5
(11037)
Virtual images with a convergent lens
OT 4.6
(11038)
Refraction of light at a divergent lens
OT 4.7
(11039)
Properties of a divergent lens

(11050)

Light guide
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Thermodynamics

3
Thermodynamics
Contents
3.1
3.1.01-00
3.2

Thermal Expansion
Thermal expansion in solids and liquids
Ideal and Real Gases

3.4

Phase Transitions

3.4.01-00

Vapour pressure of water at high temperature

3.4.02-00

Vapour pressure of water below 100C /

Molar heat of vaporization

3.4.03-00

Boiling point elevation

3.4.04-00

Freezing point depression

3.2.01-01

Equation of state of ideal gases

3.2.01-15

Equation of state of ideal gases with Cobra3

3.2.02-01

Heat capacity of gases

3.2.02-11

Heat capacity of gases with Cobra3

3.2.03-00

Maxwellian velocity distribution

3.5.01-01/15

Stefan-Boltzmanns law of radiation

3.2.04-00

Thermal equation of state and critical point

3.5.02-00

Thermal and electrical conductivity of metals

3.2.05-00

Adiabatic coefficient of gases Flammersfeld oscillator

3.2.06.00

Joule-Thomson effect

3.6.01-00

Calorimetry, Friction Heat

3.6.02-00

Heat pump
Heat insulation / Heat conduction
Stirling engine

3.3

3.5

3.6

Heat capacity of metals

3.603-00

3.3.01-11

Heat capacity of metals with Cobra3

3.6.04-01/15

3.3.02-00

Mechanical equivalent of heat

3.3.01-01

3.7

Transport and Diffusion

Applied Thermodynamics
Solar ray Collector

Handbooks
Glas jacket system
Demonstration Experiments Physics Magnetic Board Heat

124 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Thermodynamics

Thermal Expansion

Thermal expansion in solids and liquids 3.1.01-00

What you can learn about

Linear expansion

Volume expansion of liquids

Thermal capacity

Lattice potential

Equilibrium spacing

Grneisen equation

Principle:
The volume expansion of liquids and
the linear expansion of various materials is determined as a function of
temperature.

What you need:

Dilatometer with clock gauge for practical class experiments 04233.00

Tube for dilatometer, copper

04231.05

Tube for dilatometer, aluminium

04231.06

Tube for dilatometer, quarz glass

04231.07

Immersion thermostat TC10

08492.93

Accessory set for TC10

08492.01

Bath for thermostat, Makrolon

08487.02

Laboratory thermometers, -10...+100C

38056.00

Rubber tubing, di = 6 mm, l = 1 m

39282.00

Syringe 1 ml, Luer, pack of 10

02593.03

Cannula, LUER, d = 0.60 mm, 20 pcs.

02599.04

Measuring tube, l = 300 mm, IGJ 19/26

03024.00

Wash bottle, plastic, 250 ml

33930.00

Flat bottom flasks, DURAN, 100 ml, IGJ 19/26

35811.01

Beaker, DURAN, tall form, 100 ml

36002.00

Ethyl acetate, 250 ml

30075.25

Glycerol, 250 ml

30084.25

Olive oil, pure, 100 ml

30177.10

Precision Balance, Sartorius CP323P

48800.93

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Thermal expansion in solids and liquids
P2310100

Relationship between length l and temperature
, for a) aluminium, b) brass,

c) copper, d) steel, e) duran glass, f) quartz glass (lo = 600 mm)

Tasks:
1. To determine the volume expansion of ethyl acetate (C4H8O2),
methylated spirit, olive oil, glycerol
and water as a function of temperature, using the pycnometer.
2. To determine the linear expansion
of brass, iron, copper, aluminium,
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

duran glass and quartz glass as a

function of temperature using a
dilatometer.
3. To investigate the relationship between change in length and overall length in the case of aluminium.
Laboratory Experiments Physics 125

Thermodynamics

Ideal and Real Gases

3.2.01-01 Equation of state of ideal gases

What you can learn about

Pressure and temperature

Volume

Coefficient of thermal
expansion

Coefficient of thermal
tension

Coefficient of cubic
compressibility

General equation of state for
ideal gases

Universal gas constant

Boyle and Mariottes law

Gay-Lussacs law

Charles (Amontons) law

Principle:
The state of a gas is determined by
its temperature, its pressure and the
amount of substance. For the limiting case of an ideal gas these state
variables are linked by the general
equation of state, from which special
correlations can be derived for specific changes of state.

What you need:

Gas law apparatus

04362.00

Immersion thermostat TC10

08492.93

Accessory set for TC10

08492.01

Bath for thermostat, Makrolon

08487.02

Weather monitor, 6 lines LCD

87997.10

Laboratory thermometers, -10...+100C

38056.00

Mercury tray

02085.00

Support base -PASS-

02005.55

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 1000 mm

02034.00

Right angle clamp

37697.00

Universal clamp

37718.00

Pinchcock, width 15 mm

43631.15

1
6

Hose clip, d = 8-12 mm

40996.01

Rubber tubing, di = 6 mm, l = 1 m

39282.00

Mercury, filtered, 1000 g

31776.70

Water, distilled 5 l

31246.81

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Equation of state of ideal gases
P2320101
Correlation between pressure p and volume V for a constant quantity of air
(n = 0.9536 mmol) during an isothermic change of state (T = 298.15 K).

Tasks:
For a constant amount of gas (air)
investigate the correlation of
1. Volume and pressure at constant
temperature (Boyle and Mariottes
law)
2. Volume and temperature at constant pressure (Gay-Lussacs law)

From the relationships obtained calculate the universal gas constant as

well as the coefficient of thermal expansion, the coefficient of thermal
tension, and the coefficient of cubic
compressibility.

3. Pressue and temperature at constant volume (Charles (Amontons

law))
126 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Thermodynamics

Ideal and Real Gases

Equation of state of ideal gases with Cobra3 3.2.01-15

What you can learn about

Thermal tension coefficient

General equation of state
for ideal gases

Universal gas constant

Amontons law

Principle:
The state of a gas is determined by
temperature, pressure and amount of
substance. For the limiting case of
ideal gases, these state variables are
linked via the general equation of
state. For a change of state under
isochoric conditions this equation
becomes Amontons law.
In this experiment it is investigated
whether Amontons law is valid for a
constant amount of gas (air).

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Measuring module pressure

12103.00

Cobra3 measuring module converter

12150.04

Temperature sensor, semiconductor type

12120.00

Software Cobra3 Gas Laws

14516.61

Glass jacket

02615.00

Gas syringes, without cock, 100 ml

02614.00

Heating apparatus

32246.93

Power regulator

32288.93

H-base -PASS-

02009.55

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 250 mm, d = 10 mm

02031.00

Right angle clamp

37697.00

Universal clamp

37718.00

Universal clamp with joint

37716.00

Magnet rod, l = 200 mm, d = 10 mm

06311.00

Tasks:

Magnetic stirring rod, cylindrical, l = 30 mm

46299.02

Beaker, DURAN, tall form, 250 ml

36004.00

For a constant amount of gas (air)

investigate the correlation of

Funnel, glass, d = 50 mm

34457.00

Hose connector, reducing, d = 3-5/6-10 mm

47517.01

Silicone tubing, d = 2 mm

39298.00

Silicone tubing, d = 7 mm

39296.00

Hose clip, d = 8-12 mm

40996.01

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Dependence of the pressure on the temperature under isochoric conditions.

1. Volume and pressure at constant

temperature (Boyle and Mariottes
law)
2. Volume and temperature at constant pressure (Gay-Lussacs law)

From the relationships obtained calculate the universal gas constant as

well as the coefficient of thermal expansion, the coefficient of thermal
tension, and the coefficient of cubic
compressibility.

3. Pressue and temperature at constant volume (Charles (Amontons

law))

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Equation of state of ideal gases
with Cobra3
P2320115

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 127

Thermodynamics

Ideal and Real Gases

3.2.02-01 Heat capacity of gases

What you can learn about

Equation of state for ideal
gases

1st law of thermodynamics

Universal gas constant

Degree of freedom

Mole volumes

Isobars

Isotherms

Isochors and adiabatic
changes of slate

Principle:
Heat is added to a gas in a glass vessel by an electric heater which is
switched on briefly. The temperature
increase results in a pressure
increase, which is measured with a
manometer. Under isobaric conditions a temperature increase results
in a volume dilatation, which can be
read from a gas syringe. The molar
heat capacities CV and Cp are calculated from the pressure or volume
change.

What you need:

Precision manometer

03091.00

Hand held measuring instrument Pressure, RS 232

07136.00

Digital counter, 4 decades

13600.93

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Mariotte flask, 10 l

02629.00

Gas syringes, without cock, 100 ml

02614.00

Glass stopcocks, 1 way, straight

36705.00

Three-way cock

36732.00

Rubber stopper, d = 32/2 6mm, 3 holes

39258.14

Rubber stopper, d = 59.5/50.5 mm, 1 hole

39268.01

Rubber tubing, di = 6 mm, l = 1 m

39282.00

Nickel electrode with socket, d = 3

45231.00

Nickel electrode

45218.00

Chrome-nickel wire, d = 0.1 mm, l = 100 m

06109.00

Scissors, stainless, l = 140 mm, round

64625.00

Push button switch, circuit closing

06039.00

Connection box

06030.23

Pressure change
p as a function of the heat-up time
t. U = 4.59 V,

I = 0.43 A

Carbon resistor 1 k, 1 W, G1

39104.19

Tasks:

Capacitor 2000 nF/ 250 V, G2

39105.29

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 50 cm

07361.02

Determine the molar heat capacities

of air at constant volume CV and at
constant pressure Cp.

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Retort stand, h = 750 mm

37694.00

Universal clamp

37718.00

Right angle clamp

37697.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Heat capacity of gases
P2320201
128 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Thermodynamics

Ideal and Real Gases

Heat capacity of gases with Cobra3 3.2.02-11

What you can learn about

Equation of state for ideal
gases

1st law of thermodynamics

Universal gas constant
Degree of freedom

Mole volumes

Isobars

Isotherms

Isochors and adiabatic
changes of slate

Principle:
Heat is added to a gas in a glass vessel by an electric heater which is
switched on briefly. The temperature
increase results in a pressure
increase, which is measured with a
manometer. Under isobaric conditions a temperature increase results
in a volume dilatation, which can be
read from a gas syringe. The molar
heat capacities CV and Cp are calculated from the pressure or volume
change.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Software Cobra3 Universal recorder

14504.61

Precision manometer

03091.00

Hand held measuring instrument Pressure, RS 232

07136.00

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Cobra3 current probe 6 A

12126.00

Mariotte flask, 10 l

02629.00

Gas syringes, without cock, 100 ml

02614.00

Glass stopcocks, 1 way, straight

36705.00

Three-way cock

36732.00

Rubber stopper, d = 32/26 mm, 3 holes

39258.14

Rubber stopper, d = 59.5/50.5 mm, 1 hole

39268.01

Rubber tubing, di = 6 mm, l = 1 m

39282.00

Nickel electrode with socket, d = 3

45231.00

Nickel electrode

45218.00

Chrome-nickel wire, d = 0.1 mm, l = 100 m

06109.00

Scissors, stainless, l = 140 mm, round

64625.00

Tasks:

Push button switch, circuit closing

06039.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Determine the molar heat capacities

of air at constant volume CV and at
constant pressure Cp.

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Retort stand, h = 750 mm

37694.00

Universal clamp

37718.00

Right angle clamp

37697.00

Volume change
V as a function of the heat-up time
t. U = 4.59 V,

I = 0.43 A.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Heat capacity of gases with Cobra3
P2320211

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 129

Thermodynamics

Ideal and Real Gases

3.2.03-00 Maxwellian velocity distribution

What you can learn about

Kinetic theory of gases

Temperature

Gas

Molecules

Model kinetic energy

Average velocity

Velocity distribution

Principle:
By means of the model apparatus for
kinetic theory of gases the motion of
gas molecules is simulated and the
velocity is determined by registration
of the throw distance of the glass
balls. This velocity distribution is
compared to the theoretical MAXWELL-BOLTZMANN equation.

What you need:

Kinetic gas theory apparatus

09060.00

Receiver with recording chamber

09061.00

Power supply 0-12 V DC/ 6 V, 12 V AC

13505.93

Digital stroboscopes

21809.93

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Test tube, AR-glass, d = 16 mm

37656.10

Test tube rack for 12 tubes, wood

37686.10

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Maxwellian velocity distribution
P2320300

Experimental and theoretical velocity distribution in the model experiment.

Tasks:
1. Measure the velocity distribution
of the model gas.
2. Compare the result to theoretical
behaviour as described by the
MAXWELL-BOLTZMANN distribution.
3. Discuss the results.

130 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Thermodynamics

Ideal and Real Gases

Thermal equation of state and critical point 3.2.04-00

What you can learn about

Ideal gas

Real gas

Equation of state

Van der WAALS equation

BOYLE temperature

Critical point

Interaction potential

Molecule radius

Principle:
A substance which is gaseous under
normal conditions is enclosed in a
variable volume and the variation of
pressure with the volume is recorded
at different temperatures. The critical point is determined graphically
from a plot of the isotherms.

What you need:

Critical point apparatus

04364.10

Immersion thermostat TC10

08492.93

Accessory set for TC10

08492.01

Bath for thermostat, Makrolon

08487.02

Gasket for GL18, hole d = 8 mm, 10 pcs

41240.03

Vacuum pump, rotary sliding-vane, one-stage

02750.93

Adapter

02657.00

Safety bottle, 500 ml, 2 x Gl18/8, 1 x 25/12

34170.88

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 500 mm

02032.00

Laboratory thermometers, -10...+100C

38056.00

Universal clamp

37718.00

Right angle clamp

37697.00

Rubber tubing, d = 8 mm

39283.00

Rubber tubing, vacuum, i.d. = 8 mm

39288.00

Rubber tubing/vacuum, d = 6 mm

39286.00

Pinchcock, width 15 mm

43631.15

Hose clip, d = 8-12 mm

40996.01

Hose clip for 12-20 diameter tube

40995.00

Mercury tray

02085.00

Compressed gas, ethane, 14 g

41772.09

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Thermal equation of state and critical point P2320400

p-V-isotherms of ethane.

Tasks:
1. Measure a number of p-V-isotherms of ethane.
2. Determine the critical point and
the critical quantities of ethane.
3. Calculate the constants of the
Van der WAALS equation, the
BOYLE-temperature, the radius of
the molecules and the parameters
of the interaction potential.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 131

Thermodynamics

Ideal and Real Gases

3.2.05-00 Adiabatic coefficient of gases Flammersfeld oscillator

What you can learn about

Equation of adiabatic change
of slate

Polytropic equation

Rchardts experiment

Thermal capacity of gases

Principle:
A mass oscillates on a volume of gas
in a precision glass tube. The oscillation is maintained by leading escaping gas back into the system. The
adiabatic coefficient of various gases
is determined from the periodic time
of the oscillation.

What you need:

Gas oscillator, Flammersfeld

04368.00

Graduated cylinder, BORO 3.3, 1000 ml

36632.00

Aspirator bottle, clear glass, 1000 ml

34175.00

Air control valve

37003.00

Light barrier with counter

11207.30

Power supply 5 V DC/2.4 A with 4 mm plugs

11076.99

Micrometer

03012.00

Glass tube, AR-glass, right-angled, l = 85 + 60 mm, 10 pcs. 36701.52

Rubber stopper, d = 22/17 mm, 1 hole

39255.01

Rubber stopper, d = 32/26 mm, 1 hole

39258.01

Rubber tubing, di = 6 mm, l = 1 m

39282.00

Sliding weight balance, 101 g

44012.01

Aquarium pump, 230 V AC

64565.93

Aneroid barometer

03097.00

Stopwatch, 15 minutes

03076.01

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 400 mm

02026.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Universal clamp

37718.00

Pressure-reducing valves, CO2 / He

33481.00

Pressure-reducing valves, nitrogen

33483.00

Steel cylinders, carbon dioxide, 10 l

41761.00

Steel cylinders, nitrogen, 10 l

41763.00

Ten measurements, each of about n = 300 oscillations, gave for the

adiabatic coefficients
Argon

 = 1.62 0.09

Nitrogen

 = 1.39 0.07

Carbon dioxide

 = 1.28 0.08

Air

 = 1.38 0.08

Tasks:
Determine the adiabatic coefficient
 of air nitrogen and carbon dioxide
(and also of argon, if available) from
the periodic time of the oscillation T
of the mass m on the volume V of
gas

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Adiabatic coefficient of gases
Flammersfeld oscillator
P2320500

132 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Thermodynamics

Ideal and Real Gases

Joule-Thomson effect

3.2.06.00

What you can learn about

Real gas

Intrinsic energy

Gay-Lussac theory

Throttling

Van der Waals equation

Van der Waals force

Inverse Joule-Thomson effect

Inversion temperature

Principle:
A stream of gas is fed to a throttling
point, where the gas (CO2 or N2) undergoes adiabatic expansion. The differences in temperature established
between the two sides of the throttle point are measured at various
pressures and the Joule-Thomson
coefficients of the gases in question
are calculated.

What you need:

Joule-Thomson apparatus

04361.00

Temperature meter digital, 4-2

13617.93

Temperature probe, Pt100

11759.01

Pressure-reducing valves, CO2 / He

33481.00

Pressure-reducing valves, nitrogen

33483.00

Wrench for steel cylinders

40322.00

Steel cylinders, nitrogen, 10 l

41763.00

Gas-cylinder Trolley for 2 Cylinder

41790.20

Hose clip for 12-20 diameter tube

40995.00

Rubber tubing, vacuum, i.d. = 8 mm

39288.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Joule-Thomson effect
P2320600

Temperature differences measured at various ram pressures.

Tasks:
1. Determination of the Joule-Thomson coefficient of CO2.
2. Determination of the Joule-Thomson coefficient of N2.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 133

Thermodynamics

Calorimetry, Friction Heat

3.3.01-01 Heat capacity of metals

What you can learn about

Mixture temperature

Boiling point

Dulong Petits law

Lattice vibration

Internal energy

Debye temperature

Principle:
Heated specimens are placed in a
calorimeter filled with water at low
temperature. The heat capacity of
the specimen is determined from the
rise in the temperature of the water.

What you need:

Calorimeter, 500 ml

04401.00

Metal bodies, set of 3

04406.00

Steel pot, 1 l

05933.00

Butane burner Labogaz 206

32178.00

Butane cartridge C 206 without valve

47535.00

Aneroid barometer

03097.00

Precision mercury thermometers, -10...+ 50C

38033.00

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Portable Balance, OHAUS JR300

48891.00

Fishing line on spool, d = 0,5 mm, l = 100 mm

02090.00

Wire triangle (clay triangle), l = 60 mm

33278.00

Tripod, ring d = 140 mm, h = 240 mm

33302.00

Beaker, DURAN, short form, 250 ml

36013.00

Beaker, DURAN, short form, 600 ml

36015.00

Glass beads, 850 pieces, d = 6 mm

36756.25

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Heat capacity of metals
P2330101

Temperature as a function of time in the method of mixtures experiment

a) steel, b) brass, c) aluminium.

Tasks:
1. To determine the heat capacity of
the calorimeter by filling it with
hot water and determining the
rise in temperature.

134 Laboratory Experiments Physics

2. To determine the specific heat

capacity of aluminium, iron and
brass.
3. To verify Dulong Petits law with
the results of these experiments.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Thermodynamics

Calorimetry, Friction Heat

Heat capacity of metals with Cobra3 3.3.01-11

What you can learn about

Mixture temperature

Boiling point

Dulong Petits law

Lattice vibration

Internal energy

Debye temperature

Principle:
Heated specimens are placed in a
calorimeter filled with water at low
temperature. The heat capacity of
the specimen is determined from the
rise in the temperature of the water.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3 Temperature

14503.61

Measuring module temperature NiCr-Ni, 330C

12104.00

Immersion probe NiCr-Ni,-50/1000C

13615.03

H-base -PASS-

02009.55

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 600 mm

02037.00

Bosshead

02043.00

Universal clamp

37718.00

Ring with Bosshead, i.d. = 10 cm

37701.01

Wire nets, 160 x 160 mm

33287.01

Metal bodies, set of 3

04406.00

Butane burner Labogaz 206

32178.00

Butane cartridge C 206 without valve

47535.00

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Tasks:

Portable Balance, OHAUS JR300

48891.00

Fishing line on spool, d = 0,5 mm, l = 100 mm

02090.00

Calorimeter vessel, 500 ml

04401.10

1. To determine the specific heat

capacity of aluminium, iron and
brass.

Beaker, DURAN, short form, 400 ml

36014.00

Beaker, DURAN, short form, 600 ml

36015.00

Stirring rod

04404.10

Pipette, with rubber bulb

64701.00

Beads, 200 g

36937.20

Course of temperature in the calorimeter.

For 180 g Iron (100 C) and 200 g water (room-temperature).

2. To verify Dulong Petits law with

the results of these experiments.

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Paper tissues

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Heat capacity of metals with Cobra3
P2330111

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 135

Thermodynamics

Calorimetry, Friction Heat

3.3.02-00 Mechanical equivalent of heat

What you can learn about

Mechanical equivalent of heat

Mechanical work

Thermal energy

Thermal capacity

First law of thermodynamics

Specific thermal capacity

Principle:
In this experiment, a metal test body
is rotated and heated by the friction
due to a tensed band of synthetic
material. The mechanical equivalent
of heat for problem 1 is determined
from the defined mechanical work
and from the thermal energy
increase deduced from the increase
of temperature. Assuming the equivalence of mechanical work and heat,
the specific thermal capacity of aluminum and brass is determined.

Tasks:
1. Determination of the mechanical
equivalent of heat.
2. Determination of the specific
thermal capacity of aluminum and
brass.

What you need:

Mechanical equivalence of heat apparatus

04440.00

Friction cylinder CuZn, 1.28 kg

04441.02

Friction cylinder Al, 0.39 kg

04441.03

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Precision spring balances, 10.0 N

03060.03

Precision spring balances, 100.0 N

03060.04

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Universal clamp with joint

37716.00

Commercial weight, 1000 g

44096.70

Commercial weight, 5000 g

44096.81

28

X X X

A2

X X
X X
X X
X X
X

27

T
26

A1

25

24

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Mechanical equivalent of heat
P2330200

T2

T
C

X X X X X X X
X

120

240

T1

360

480

600

Temperature-time diagram for a measurement example.

136 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

720

t
s

Thermodynamics

Phase Transitions

Vapour pressure of water at high temperature 3.4.01-00

What you can learn about

Boiling point

Heat of vaporisation

Clausius-Clapeyron equation

Vant Hoff law

Carnot cycle

Principle:
Water is heated in a closed pressure
chamber; as much water vaporises as
to make the pressure in the chamber
correspond to the vapour pressure at
the temperature at any time. The
heat of vaporisation is determined at
various temperatures from the measurement of vapour pressure as a
function of temperature.

Tasks:
1. To measure the vapour pressure of
water as a function of temperature.
2. To calculate the heat of vaporisation at various temperatures from
the values measured.
3. To determine boiling point at normal pressure by extrapolation.

What you need:

High pressure vapour unit

02622.10

Heat conductive paste, 50 g

03747.00

1
1

Heating apparatus

32246.93

Pipette, with rubber bulb, long

64821.00

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Bosshead

02043.00

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 250 mm, d = 10 mm

02031.00

Laboratory thermometer, -10...+250C

38065.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Vapour pressure of water at high
temperature
P2340100

Natural logarithm of vapour pressure p as a function of the reciprocal of the

temperature (1/T): Tb = boiling point at normal pressure.
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 137

Thermodynamics

Phase Transitions

3.4.02-00 Vapour pressure of water below 100C Molar heat of vaporization

What you can learn about

Pressure

Temperature

Volume

Vaporization

Vapour pressure

Clausius-Clapeyron equation

Principle:
The vapour pressure of water in the
range of 40C to 85C is investigated. It is shown that the ClausiusClapeyron equation describes the relation between temperature and
pressure in an adequate manner. An
average value for the heat of vaporization of water is determined.

What you need:

Manometer -1.0...0.6 bar

03105.00

Thermometer, -10...+110 C

38005.02

Round flask, 100 ml, 3 necks, GL25, 2 x GL18

35677.15

Glass stopcocks, 1 way, right-angled

36705.01

Vacuum pump, rotary sliding-vane, one-stage

02750.93

Magnetic stirrer, Heating, Temperature-connection, 10 l

35731.93

Magnetic stirring rod, cylindrical, l = 30 mm

46299.02

Glass tube 200 mm ext. d = 8 mm

64807.00

Gasket for GL 18, 8 mm hole, 10 pcs

41242.03

Rubber tubing, vacuum, i.d. = 8 mm

39288.00

Rubber tubing, d = 12 mm

39285.00

Support base -PASS-

02005.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 630 mm

02027.55

Support rod with hole, stainless steel, l = 50 cm, M10 thread 02022.20

Universal clamp with joint

37716.00

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Beaker, DURAN, short form, 400 ml

36014.00

Beaker, DURAN, short form, 600 ml

36015.00

Water, distilled 5 l

31246.81

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Vapour pressure of water below 100C
Molar heat of vaporization
P2340200

Semilogarithmic representation of vapour pressure p as a function of 1/T.

Tasks:
1. About 250 ml of de-mineralized
water are allowed to boil for
about 10 minutes to eliminate all
traces of dissolved gas. The water
is then cooled down to room temperature.
2. The 3-neck round flask is filled
about three-quarters full with

138 Laboratory Experiments Physics

gas-free water and heated. At 35C

the space above the water within the
round flask is evacuated. Further
heating causes an increase
in pressure p and temperature t of
water within the round flask. p and t
are read in steps of 5 C up to a maximum of t = 85C.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Thermodynamics

Phase Transitions

Boiling point elevation 3.4.03-00

What you can learn about

Raoults law

Henrys law

Ebullioscopic constants

Chemical potential

Gibbs-Helmholtz equation

Concentration ratio

Degree of dissociation

Principle:
The boiling point of a solution is
always higher than that of the pure
solvent. The dependence of the temperature difference (elevated boiling
point) on the concentration of the
solute can be determined using a
suitable apparatus.

What you need:

Appartus for elevation of boiling point
Heating mantle for roundbottom flask, 250 ml
Clamp for heating mantle
Power regulator
Precision Balance, Sartorius LE 623P
Weighing dishes, square shape, 84 x 84 x 24 mm, 25 pcs.
Temperature meter digital, 4-2
Temperature probe, Pt100
Protective sleeves for temperature probe, 2 pcs.
Retort stand, h = 750 mm
Right angle clamp
Universal clamp
Flask, round, 1 neck, 250 ml, GL25/14
Beaker, DURAN, tall form, 250 ml
Gasket for GL 18, 8 mm hole, 10 pcs
Silicone tubing, d = 7 mm
Mortar with pestle, 150 ml, porcelain
Pinchcock, width 15 mm
Spoon with spatula end, l = 150 mm, steel, micro
Wash bottle, plastic, 500 ml
Pellet press for calorimeter
Funnel, glass, d = 80 mm
Pasteur pipettes, l = 145 ml
Rubber caps, 10 pcs
Beads, 200 g
Sodium chloride, 500 g
Urea, 250 g
Hydroquinone, 250 g
Glycerol, 250 ml
Water, distilled 5 l

36820.00
49550.93
49557.01
32288.93
48852.93
45019.25
13617.93
11759.01
11762.05
37694.00
37697.00
37718.00
35812.15
36004.00
41242.03
39296.00
32604.00
43631.15
33393.00
33931.00
04403.04
34459.00
36590.00
39275.03
36937.20
30155.50
30086.25
30089.25
30084.25
31246.81

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Example of a measurement: boiling point increase as function of concentration of table salt in an aqueous solution.

Tasks:
1. Measure the increase in boiling
point of water as a function of the
concentration of table salt, urea
and hydroquinone.
2. Investigate the relationship
between the increase in boiling
point and the number of particles.
3. Determine the molar mass of the
solute from the relationship
between the increase in boiling
point and the concentration.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Boiling point elevation
P2340300
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 139

Thermodynamics

Phase Transitions

3.4.04-00 Freezing point depression

What you can learn about

Raoults law

Cryoscopic constants

Chemical potential

Gibbs-Helmholtz equation

Concentration ratio

Degree of dissociation

Vant Hoff factor

Cryoscopy

Principle:
The freezing point of a solution is
lower than that of the pure solvent.
The depression of the freezing point
can be determined experimentally
using a suitable apparatus (cryoscopy). If the cryoscopic constants of
the solvent are known, the molecular
mass of the dissolved substances can
be determined.

What you need:

Apparatus for freezing point depression

36821.00

Gaskets for connecting caps, GL 25

41243.03

Temperature meter digital, 4-2

13617.93

Temperature probe, Pt100

11759.01

Protective sleeves for temperature probe, 2 pcs.

11762.05

Pellet press for calorimeter

04403.04

Magnetic stirrer mini, plastic (ABS)

47334.93

Right angle clamp

37697.00

Universal clamp

37718.00

Beaker, DURAN, short form, 1000 ml

36017.00

Volumetric pipettes, 50 ml

36581.00

Safety pipettor Flip

36592.00

Retort stand, h = 1000 mm

37695.00

Wash bottle, plastic, 500 ml

33931.00

Magnetic stirring rod, cylindrical, l = 15 mm

46299.01

Precision Balance, Sartorius TE 153S

48832.93

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Mortar with pestle, 70 ml, porcelain

32603.00

Spoon with spatula end, l = 150 mm, steel, micro

33393.00

Spoon with spatula end, l = 150 mm, steel, wide

33398.00

Funnel, plastic, d = 50 mm

36890.00

Weighing dishes, square shape, 84 x 84 x 24 mm, 25 pcs.

45019.25

Pasteur pipettes, l = 145 ml

36590.00

Rubber caps, 10 pcs

39275.03

Stirring rods, BORO 3.3, l = 300 mm, d = 8 mm

40485.06

Sodium chloride, 500 g

30155.50

Hydroquinone, 250 g

30089.25

Denatured alcohol (Spirit forburning), 1000 ml

31150.70

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Freezing point depression
P2340400
140 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Cooling curve of water/table salt (NaCI) mixture.

Tasks:
1. Determine the size of freezing
point depression after dissolving a
strong electrolyte (NaCI) in water.
By comparing the experimental
value with the theoretical one
predicted for this concentration,
determine the number of ions into
which the electrolyte dissociates.
2. Determine the apparent molar
mass of a non-electrolyte (hydroquinone) from the value of freezing point depression.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Thermodynamics

Transport and Diffusion

Stefan-Boltzmanns law of radiation

3.5.01-01/15

What you can learn about

Black body radiation

Thermoelectric e. m. f.

Temperature dependence of
resistances

Principle:
According of Stefan-Boltzmanns
law, the energy emitted by a black
body per unit area and unit time is
proportional to the power four of
the absolute temperature of the
body. Stefan-Boltzmanns law is also
valid for a so-called grey body
whose surface shows a wavelengthindependent absorption-coefficient
of less than one. In the experiment,
the grey body is represented by the
filament of an incandescent lamp
whose energy emission is investigated as a function of the temperature.

Set-up of experiment P2350115 with Cobra3

What you need:

Experiment P2350115 with Cobra3
Experiment P2350101 with amplifier
Optical profile bench, l = 600 mm

08283.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Universal measuring amplifier

13626.93

Thermopile, Moll type

08479.00

Shielding tube for thermopile

08479.01

Variable transformer with rectifier 15 V~/12 V- , 5 A

13530.93

Lamp socket E 14, on stem

06175.00

Filament lamps, 6 V/5 A

06158.00

Connection box

06030.23

Resistor 100 2%, 1W, G1

06057.10

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Tasks:

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

1. To measure the resistance of the

filament of the incandescent lamp
at room temperature and to ascertain the filaments resistance R0
at zero degrees centrigrade.

Thermoelectric e. m. f. of thermopile as a function of the filaments absolute

temperature.

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3 Universal recorder

14504.61

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Stefan-Boltzmanns law of radiation
P23501 01/15

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

2. To measure the energy flux density

of the lamp at different heating
voltages. The corresponding heating currents read off for each
heating voltage and the corresponding filament resistance calculated. Anticipating a temperature-dependency of the second
order of the filament-resistance,
the temperature can be calculated
from the measured resistances.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 141

Thermodynamics

Transport and Diffusion

3.5.02-00 Thermal and electrical conductivity of metals

What you can learn about

Electrical conductivity

Wiedmann-Franz law

Lorenz number

Diffusion

Temperature gradient

Heat transport

Specific heat

Four-point measurement

Principle:
The thermal conductivity of copper
and aluminium is determined in a
constant temperature gradient from
the calorimetrically measured heat
flow.
The electrical conductivity of copper
and aluminium is determined, and
the Wiedmann-Franz law is tested.

Tasks:
1. Determine the heat capacity of
the calorimeter in a mixture
experiment as a preliminary test.
Measure the calefaction of water
at a temperature of 0 C in a calorimeter due to the action of the
ambient temperature as a function of time.
2. To begin with, establish a constant
temperature gradient in a metal
rod with the use of two heat reservoirs (boiling water and ice
water) After removing the pieces
of ice, measure the calefaction of
the cold water as a function of
time and determine the thermal
conductivity of the metal rod.
3. Determine the electrical conductivity of copper and aluminium by
recording a current-voltage characteristic line.

What you need:

Calorimeter vessel, 500 ml
Calorimeter vessel with heat conductivity connection
Heat conductivity rod, Cu
Heat conductivity rod, Al
Magnetic stirrer mini, plastic (ABS)
Heat conductive paste, 50 g
Gauze bag
Rheostats, 10 , 5.7 A
Immersion heater, 300 W, 220-250 VDC/AC
Temperature meter digital, 4-2
Temperature probe, Pt100
Temperature surface probe Pt 100
Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s
Tripod base -PASSBench clamp -PASSSupport rod -PASS-, square, l = 630 mm
Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 1000 mm
Universal clamp
Right angle clamp -PASSSupporting block 105 x 105 x 57 mm
Beaker, DURAN, short form, 400 ml
142 Laboratory Experiments Physics

04401.10
04518.10
04518.11
04518.12
47334.93
03747.00
04408.00
06110.02
05947.93
13617.93
11759.01
11759.02
03071.01
02002.55
02010.00
02027.55
02028.55
37718.00
02040.55
02073.00
36014.00

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
4
6
1
1

4. Test of the Wiedmann-Franz law.

Diagram: Heat of surroundings over

time.

For the electrical conductivity you need:

Multi-tap transformer with rectifier 14 VAC/12 VDC, 5 A
Digital multimeter 2010
Universal measuring amplifier
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

13533.93
07128.00
13626.93
07361.01
07361.04

1
2
1
4
4

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Thermal and electrical conductivity of metals P2350200
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Thermodynamics

Applied Thermodynamics

Solar ray Collector 3.6.01-00

What you can learn about

Absorption

Heat radiation

Greenhouse effect

Convection

Conduction of heat

Collector equations

Efficiency

Energy ceiling

Principle:
The solar ray collector is illuminated
with a halogen lamp of known light
intensity. The heat energy absorbed
by the collector can be calculated
from the volume flow and the difference in the water temperatures at
the inlet and outlet of the absorber,
if the inlet temperature stays almost
constant by releasing energy to a
reservoir. The efficiency of the collector is determined from this. The
measurement is made with various
collector arrangements and at various absorber temperatures.

What you need:

2.5

15

5.0

29

20

11.0

64

20

12.5

73

50

8.0

47

50

8.0

47

50

6.0

35

50

3.0

17

+*

1.2

2.1

06755.00

2.2

Stand for solar collector

06757.00

3.1

Immersion heater, 1000 W, 220-250 V

04020.93

3.2

Halogen lamp 1000 W

08125.93

3.3

3.4

Laboratory thermometers, -10...+100C

38056.00

Laboratory thermometer -10...+110 C

38060.00

Circulating pump w. flowmeter

06754.01

Power supply 0-12 V DC/ 6 V, 12 V AC

13505.93

Heat exchanger

Hot/cold air blower, 1700 W

04030.93

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Universal clamp

37718.00

Beaker, DURAN, tall form, 2000 ml

36010.00

Beaker, DURAN, short form, 5000 ml

36272.00

Safety gas tubing, DVGW, l = 1000 mm

39281.10

Cold
air

Water Temperatures and Collector Efficiency under Various

Experimental Conditions, m = 100 cm3/min, qi = 1 kW/m2, A = 0 12 m2.

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Tasks:

03071.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

To determine the efficiency of the

solar ray collector under various experimental conditions.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

* This series of measurements without rear insulation

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Solar ray Collector
P2360100

a
e


%

1.1

e

Light

06753.00

No.

Glass
plate

Solar collector

1. Absorption of energy from the environment (20C) without illumination by sun or halogen lamp,
water temperature at the absorber
inlet
e 5C.

2. Illumination with halogen lamp.

Water temperature qe 20C.
2.1 Complete collector
2.2 Collector without glass plate
3. Illumination with halogen lamp.
Water temperature qe 50C.
3.1 Complete collector

1.1 Absorber with insulation and

glass plate (complete collector)

3.2 Complete collector, cold jet of

air impinges

1.2 Absorber alone

(energy ceiling)

3.4 Collector without glass plate,

cold jet of air impinges.

3.3 Collector without glass plate

Laboratory Experiments, Physics 143

Thermodynamics

Applied Thermodynamics

3.6.02-00 Heat pump

What you can learn about

Refrigerator

Compressor

Restrictor valve

Cycle

Vaporization

Condensation

Vapour pressure

Vaporisation enthalpy

Principle:
Pressures and temperatures in the
circulation of the heat electrical
compression heat pump are measured as a function of time when it is
operated as a water-water heat
pump.
The energy taken up and released is
calculated from the heating and
cooling of the two water baths.
When it is operated as an air-water
heat pump, the coefficient of performance at different vaporiser temperatures is determined.

What you need:


C

Heat pump, compressor principle

04370.88

Laboratory thermometers, -10...+100C

38056.00

Laboratory thermometer -10...+110 C

38060.00

Heat conductive paste, 50 g

03747.00

Hot/cold air blower, 1700 W

04030.93

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Universal clamp with joint

37716.00

Beaker, DURAN, tall form, 2000 ml

36010.00

Stirring rods, BORO 3.3, l = 300 mm, d = 7 mm

40485.05

60

50

c0
1

40

30

20
V0

10

2

Option:
Work and power meter

ci

13715.93

10

20

t
30 
Vi min

-10

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Heat pump
P2360200

Temperatures at the inlet and outlet of the vaporiser Vi (
), Vo () and
condenser Ci (
), Co () as a function of the operating time; continuous
curves: temperature in water reservoirs.

Tasks:
1. Water heat pump:
To measure pressure and temperature in the circuit and in the water
reservoirs on the condenser side
and the vaporiser side alternately.
To calculate energy taken up and
released, also the volume concentration in the circuit and the volumetric efficiency of the compressor.
2. Air-water heat pump:
To measure vaporiser temperature
and water bath temperature on
144 Laboratory Experiments Physics

the condenser side under different

operating conditions on the vaporiser side,
2.1 with stream of cold air
2.2 with stream of hot air
2.3 without blower.
If a power meter is available, the
electric power consumed by the
compressor can be determined with
it and the coefficient of performance
calculated.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Thermodynamics

Applied Thermodynamics

Heat insulation / Heat conduction 3.6.03-00

What you can learn about

Heat transition

Heat transfer

Heat conductivity

Thermal radiation

Hothouse effect

Thermal capacity

Temperature amplitude
attenuation

Principle:
A model house with replaceable side
walls is used for determining the
heat transition coefficients (k values) of various walls and windows
and for establishing the heat conductivities of different materials. For
this purpose the temperatures on the
inside and outside of the walls are
measured at a constant interior and
outer air temperature (in the steady
state).
With a multilayer wall structure the
temperature difference over a layer
is proportional to the particular ther-

What you need:

High insulation house

04507.93

Thermal regulation for high insulation house

04506.93

Partitions, plastic foam, 5 off

44536.02

Ceramic lamp socket E27 with reflector, switch, safety plug 06751.01

Filament lamp with reflector, 230 V/120 W

06759.93

Hand held instrument 2 x NiCr-Ni, RS 232

07140.00

Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, max. 500C, simple

13615.02

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Heat insulation / Heat conduction
P2360300

Heat transition resistance 1/k as a function of the wall thickness d.

mal transmission resistance. The

thermal capacity of the wall material affects the wall temperatures during heating up and temporary exposure to solar radiation.

Tasks:
1. Measurement and interpretation
of water temperatures during the
heating up and during temporary
external illumination of the walls.
2. Determination of the heat conductivities of wood and Styropor.
3. Determination of the k values of
ordinary glass and insulating glass
windows and of wooden walls of
different thicknesses, and of walls
with wood, Styropor or cavity
layers.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 145

Thermodynamics
3.6.04-01/15

Applied Thermodynamics

Stirling engine

First and second law

of thermodynamics

Reversible cycles

Isochoric and isothermal
changes

Gas laws

Efficiency

Stirling engine

Conversion of heat

Thermal pump

Principle:
The Stirling engine is submitted to a
load by means of an adjustable
torque meter, or by a coupled generator. Rotation frequency and temperature changes of the Stirling
engine are observed. Effective
mechanical energy and power, as
well as effective electrical power, are
assessed as a function of rotation
frequency. The amount of energy
converted to work per cycle can be

Set-up of experiment P2360415 with Cobra3

What you need:

Experiment P2360415 with Cobra3
Experiment P2360401 with oscilloscope
Stirling motor, transparent
Motor/Generator unit
Torque meter
Chimney for Stirling engine
Meter for Stirling engine, pVnT
Sensor unit pVn for Stirling engine
Syringe 20 ml, Luer, 10 pcs
Rheostats, 330 , 1.0 A
Digital multimeter 2010
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm
Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels
Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm
Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, sheathed
Cylinder, PP, 50 ml
Denatured alcohol (Spirit forburning), 1000 ml
Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Power supply 12V/2A
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Software Cobra3 Universal recorder
PC, Windows 95 or higher
Optional accessories for solar motor work
Accessories f. solar motor work
Support base -PASSExtension coupling, hinged
Support rod, stainl. steel, l = 500 mm
Optional accessories for heat pump work
Power supply

04372.00
04372.01
04372.02
04372.04
04371.97
04371.00
02591.03
06116.02
07128.00
07361.01
07361.04
11459.95
07542.11
13615.01
36628.01
31150.70
07542.27
12150.00
12151.99
14602.00
14504.61

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
1
2
2
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1

determined with the assistance of

the pV diagram. The efficiency of the
Stirling engine can be estimated.

Tasks:
04372.03
02005.55
02045.00
02032.00

1
1
1
1

13505.93

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Stirling engine
P23604 01/15
146 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Pressure as a function of Volume for the Stirling process.

1. Determination of the burners

thermal efficiency
2. Calibration of the sensor unit
3. Calculation of the total energy
produced by the engine through
determination of the cycle area on
the oscilloscope screen, using
transparent paper and coordinate
paper.

4. Assessment of the mechanical

work per revolution, and calculation of the mechanical power output as a function of the rotation
frequency, with the assistance of
the torque meter.
5. Assessment of the electric power
output as a function of the rotation frequency.
6. Efficiency assessment.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Thermodynamics

Handbooks

Glass jacket system

HANDBOOK
CHEMISTRY
F. Lindenblatt / W. Jung

Glass jacket equipment system

This system consists of a glass jacket, special inserts and accessories. It was mainly
developed for experiments with gases and can be used at school for teaching physics,
chemistry and biology.
Demonstrative and transparent
Versatile and easily assembled
Water bath for accurate measurements

Glass jacket system

01196.12

Fields of application:
Working out the laws of gases
Determination of molar masses
Determination of combustion enthalpies.

Glass jacket system No. 01196.12 17 described Experiments

Please ask for a complete equipment list Ref. No. 23701
GL 1
Gay-Lussacs law

(12229)

GL 2
Amontons law

(12230)

GL 3
The Boyle-Mariotte law

(12231)

GL 4
(12232)
The gas laws of Boyle-Marriotte,
Gay-Lussac and Amontons
GL 5
(12233)
Determination of molar masses by
means of vapour density method

GL 14
(12242)
Determination of the heating value
(fuel value) of liquids in the vertical
calorimeter
GL 15
(12243)
Determination of the fuel value of
heating oil and diesel fuel and the
calorific value of olive oil
GL 16
(12244)
Chromatographic separation techniques: gas chromatography
GL 17
Distillation with steam

(12245)

GL6
(12234)
The law of integral volumes
GL 7
(12235)
Gay-Lussacs law of gaseous
combustion
GL 8
Avogadros law

(12236)

GL 9
(12237)
The chemical formula
for methane, ethane and propane
GL 10
(12238)
Determination of the heat of
formation of water
GL 11
(12239)
Determination of the heat of
formation of CO2 and CO and Hesss
law
GL 12
(12240)
Determination of heating value (fuel
value) of solid and gaseous fuels in
a horizontal calorimeter
GL 13
(12241)
Determination of the calorific value
of some foods

Amontons law (GL 2)

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 147

Thermodynamics

Handbooks

Demonstration Experiments Physics Magnetic Board Heat

DEMONSTRATION EXPERIMENTS
PHYSICS
Regina Butt

Magnetic Board Heat

The demonstration board with support stand finds application in all fields of physics. Experimentation on the board has the following advantages in the range of thermodynamics:
Quantity of liquids and convection currents in liquids can easily be seen in glass vessels
placed in front of the single-color background
Observations are supported by use of colored marking arrows and points
Description of the experiments and explanatory sketches and tables can be made directly
on the board
Individual positioning and simple movement of the holders
Secure positioning through strong magnets

01154.02

Special holders and equipment allow a secure, simple and clear method of experimentation on
the demonstration board.
The distance of the experimental equipment to the board are correlative and optimised for the
specified application.

Demonstration Experiments Physics Magnetic Board Heat No. 01154.02 15 described Experiments
Please ask for a complete equipment list Ref. No. 23703

1 Thermal expansion
1.1
(12913)
Volume expansion of water
1.2
(12914)
Preparing a thermometer scale
1.3
(12915)
Linear expansion of solid bodies
1.4
(12916)
Volume expansion of gases
at constant pressure
1.5
(12917)
Pressure elevation on heating gases
at constant volume

2 Heat transport
2.1
(12918)
Heat flux in liquids and gases
2.2
(12919)
Heat conduction in solid bodies

2.5
(12922)
Utilisation of radiated energy with a
solar collector
2.6
(12923)
Utilisation of radiated energy with a
solar cell

3 Refraction
3.1
Gay-Lussacs law

(12924)

3.1
Charles law

(12925)

3.3
Boyle and Mariottes law

(12926)

3.4
(12927)
Molar volume and universal gas
constant Determination of the
relative molar mass

2.3
(12920)
Heat conduction in water
2.4
(12921)
Absorption of thermal radiation

Volume expansion of gases at constant pressure (1.4)

Linear expansion of solid bodies (1.3)

148 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

4
Electricity
Contents
Stationary Currents

4.3.04-00

Magnetic moment in the magnetic field

Measurement of small resistance

4.3.05-00

Magnetic field outside a straight conductor

Ohms Law with FG-Module

4.3.06-00

Magnetic field inside a conductor

Wheatstone Bridge

4.3.07-11

Ferromagnetic hysteresis with PC interface system

4.1.03-00

Internal resistance and matching in voltage source

4.3.08-00

Magnetostriction with the Michelson interferometer

4.1.04-01/15

Temperature dependence of different resistors and diodes

4.1.06-01/15

Current balance / Force acting on a current-carrying conductor

4.4.01-00

Transformer

4.1.07-00

Semiconductor thermogenerator

4.4.02-01/15

Magnetic induction

4.1.08-00

Peltier heat pump

4.4.03-01/11

Inductance of solenoids

4.1.09-01

Characteristic curves of a solar cell

4.4.04-01/11

Coil in the AC circuit

4.1.09-15

Characteristic curves of semiconductors with FG-Module

4.4.05-01/15

Capacitor in the AC circuit

4.1.11-00

Characteristic and efficiency of PEM fuel cell and PEM electrolyser

4.4.06-01/11

RLC Circuit

4.1.12-00

Faradays law

4.4.07-00

Rectifier circuits

4.1.13-15

Second order conductors. Electrolysis with FG-Module

4.4.08-00

RC Filters

Electric Field

4.4.09-01/15

High-pass and low-pass filters

Electrical fields and potentials in the plate capacitor

4.4.10-00

RLC measuring bridge

Charging curve of a capacitor

4.4.11-00

Resistance, phase shift and power in AC circuits

4.2.02-15

Switch-on behaviour of a capacitor and an inductivity

with FG-Module

4.4.12-11

Induction impulse

4.2.03-00

Capacitance of metal spheres and of a spherical capacitor

4.5.02-00

Coupled oscillating circuits

4.2.04-01

Coulombs law / Image charge

4.5.04-00

Interference of microwaves

4.2.04-15

Coulombs law with Cobra3

4.5.05-00

Diffraction of microwaves

4.2.05-00

Coulomb potential and Coulomb field of metal spheres

4.5.06-00

Diffraction and polarization of microwaves

4.2.06-00

Dielectric constant of different materials

4.5.08-00

Radiation field of a horn antenna / Microwaves

Magnetic Field

4.5.09-00

Frustrated total reflection / Microwaves

4.1
4.1.01-01
4.1.01-15
4.1.02-00

4.2
4.2.01-00
4.2.02-01

4.3
4.3.01-00

Earths magnetic field

4.3.02-01/15

Magnetic field of single coils / Biot-Savarts law

4.3.03-01/15

Magnetic field of paired coils in Helmholtz arrangement

150 Laboratory Experiments Physics

4.4

4.5

4.6

Electrodynamics

Electromagnetic Oscilations and Waves

Handbooks
Demonstration Experiments Physics
Electricity/Electronics on the Magnetic Board 1 + 2

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Stationary currents

Measurement of small resistance 4.1.01-01

What you can learn about

Ohms law

Resistivity

Contact resistance

Conductivity

Four-wire method of
measurement

Principle:
The resistances of various DC conductors are determined by recording
the current/voltage characteristic.
The resistivity of metal rods and the
contact resistance of connecting
cords are calculated.

What you need:

Heat conductivity rod, Cu

04518.11

Heat conductivity rod, Al

04518.12

Universal measuring amplifier

13626.93

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Power supply 0-12 V DC/ 6 V, 12 V AC

13505.93

Connection box

06030.23

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 10 cm

07359.02

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm

07360.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm

07360.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 75 cm

07362.02

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 200 cm

07365.02

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Measurement of small resistance
P2410101

Current/voltage characteristics of a copper rod and an aluminium rod.

Tasks:
1. To plot the current/voltage characteristics of metal rods (copper
and aluminium) and to calculate
their resistivity.
2. To determine the resistance of
various connecting cords by plotting their current/voltage characteristics and calculating the contact resistances.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 151

Electricity

Stationary currents

4.1.01-15 Ohms Law with FG-Module

What you can learn about

Ohms law

Resistivity

Contact resistance

Conductivity

Power and Work

Principle:
The electrical resistance of pure metals increases with increasing temperature. The correlation between
voltage and current is to be measured using temperature-in- and dependent resistors. Determine the
work and power of an incandescent
bulb.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Measuring module Function Generator

12111.00

Connection box

06030.23

Carbon resistor 100 , 1W, G1

39104.63

Carbon resistor 220 , 1W, G1

39104.64

Carbon resistor 330 , 1W, G1

39104.13

Lamp socket E 10, G1

17049.00

Filament lamps, 12 V/0.1 A

07505.03

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Software Cobra3 PowerGraph

14525.61

Current, Power and Work of an incandescent bulb.

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Ohms Law with FG-Module
P2410115

You can find more

experiments in Handbook
Physics Experiments

Tasks:
1. To plot the current/voltage characteristics of Ohms resistors and
of pure metals and to calculate
their resistivity.
2. To determine the resistance of
various connecting cords by plotting their current/characteristics
and calculating the contact resistances.
3. To determine the work and power
of an incandescent bulb as a function of the applied voltage.

with Cobra3
Order No. 01310.02

152 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Stationary currents

Wheatstone Bridge 4.1.02-00

What you can learn about

Kirchhoffs laws

Conductor

Circuit

Voltage

Resistance

Parallel connection

Series connection

Principle:
The Wheatstone bridge circuit is
used to determine unknown resistances. The total resistance of resistors connected in parallel and in
series is measured.

What you need:

Resistance board, metal

06108.00

Simple slide wire measuring bridge

07182.00

Connection box

06030.23

Carbon resistor 10 , 1W, G1

39104.01

Carbon resistor 100 , 1W, G1

39104.63

Carbon resistor 150 , 1W, G1

39104.10

Carbon resistor 330 , 1W, G1

39104.13

Carbon resistor G1, 680 , 1 W

39104.17

Carbon resistor 1 k, 1W, G1

39104.19

Carbon resistor 4.7 k, 1W, G1

39104.27

Carbon resistor 10 k, 1W, G1

39104.30

Carbon resistor 15 k, 1W, G1

39104.32

Carbon resistor G1, 82 k, 1 W

39104.40

Carbon resistor 100 k, 1W, G1

39104.41

Power supply 5 V-/1 A, +/- 15 V

13502.93

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 50 cm

07361.02

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Wheatstone Bridge
P2410200
Resistance of a conductor wire as a function of its radius r.

Tasks:
1. Determination of unknown resistances.
Determination of the total resistance

3. of resistors in parallel.
4. Determination of the resistance of
a wire as a function of its crosssection.

2. of resistors in series,
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 153

Electricity

Stationary currents

4.1.03-00 Internal resistance and matching in voltage source

What you can learn about

Voltage source

Electromotive force (e.m.f.)

Terminal voltage

No-load operation

Short circuit

Ohms law

Kirchhoffs laws

Power matching

Principle:
Both the terminal voltage of a voltage source and the current depend
on the load, i. e. on the external resistance. The terminal voltage is
measured as a function of the current and from it the internal resistance and no-load voltage of the
voltage source are determined and
the power graph plotted.

What you need:

Battery box

06030.21

Flat cell battery, 9 V

07496.10

Flat cell battery, 4.5 V

07496.01

Power supply 5 V DC/2.4 A with 4 mm plugs

11076.99

Rheostats, 10 , 5.7 A

06110.02

Rheostats, 100 , 1.8 A

06114.02

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Double socket, pair red and black

07264.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Internal resistance and matching
in voltage source
P2410300

Power diagram of a voltage source.

Tasks:
1. To measure the terminal voltage
Ut of a number of voltage source
as a function of the current, varying the external resistance Re, and
to calculate the no-load voltage
U0 and the internal resistance Ri.
1.1

Slimline bat-

1.2
1.2.1

Power supply
Alternating

tery

154 Laboratory Experiments Physics

voltage output
1.2.2
output

Direct voltage

2. To measure directly the no-load

voltage of the slimline battery
(with no external resistance) and
its internal resistance (by power
matching, Ri = Re).
3. To determine the power diagram
from the relationship between
terminal voltage and current, as
illustrated by the slimline battery.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Stationary currents

Temperature dependence of different resistors and diodes

4.1.04-01/15

What you can learn about

Carbon film resistor

Metallic film resistor

PTC

NTC

Z diode

Avalanche effect

Zener effect

Charge carrier generation

Free path

Mathies rule

Principle:
The temperature dependence of an
electrical parameter (e.g. resistance,
conducting-state voltage, blocking
voltage) of different components is
determined. To do this, the immersion probe set is immersed in a water
bath and the resistance is measured
at regular temperature intervals.

Set-up of experiment P2410401 with multimeter

What you need:

Experiment P2410415 with FG-Module
Experiment P2410401 with multimeter
Immersion probes for determining ct

07163.00

Immersion thermostat TC10

08492.93

Accessory set for TC10

08492.01

Bath for thermostat, Makrolon

08487.02

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Power supply 0-12 V DC/6 V, 12 V AC

13505.93

Carbon resistor 4.7 k, 1W, G1

39104.27

Connection box

06030.23

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Software Cobra3 PowerGraph

14525.61

Measuring module Function Generator

12111.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Temperature dependence of different
resistors and diodes
P24104 01/15

Diagram of resistances.

Tasks:
1. Measurement of the temperature
dependence of the resistance of
different electrical components.
2. Measurement of the temperature
dependence of the conducting
state voltage of semiconducting
diodes.
3. Measurement of the temperature
dependence of the voltage in the
Zener and the avalanche effects.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 155

Electricity
4.1.06-01/15

Stationary currents

Current balance / Force acting on a current-carrying conductor

What you can learn about

Uniform magnetic field

Magnetic induction (formerly
magnetic-flux densitiy)

Lorentz force

Moving charges

Current

Principle:
The force acting on a current-carrying conductor loop in a uniform
magnetic field (Lorentz force) is
measured with a balance.

Set-up of experiment P2410615 with Cobra3

Conductor loops of various sizes are

suspended in turn from the balance,
and the Lorentz force is determined
as a function of the current and
magnetic induction. The uniform
magnetic field is generated by an
electromagnet. The magnetic induction can be varied with the coil current.

What you need:

Experiment P2410615 with Cobra3
Experiment P2410601 with amperemeter
Ammeter 1/5 A DC
Tripod base -PASSSupport rod -PASS-, square, l = 1000 mm
Right angle clamp -PASSBalance LGN 310, on rod
Pole pieces, rectangular, 1 pair
Wire Loop, l = 12,5 mm, n = 1
Wire Loop, l = 25 mm, n = 1
Wire loop, l = 50 mm, n = 2
Wire Loop, l = 50 mm, n = 1
Iron core, U-shaped, laminated
Base for iron cores
Coil, 900 turns
Metal strip with plugs
Distributor
Bridge rectifier, 30 VAC/1 ADC
On/Off switch
Power supply, universal
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 10 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm
Support base, variable
Bosshead
Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 1000 mm
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Newton measuring module
Newton Sensor
Cobra3 current probe 6 A
Software Cobra3 PowerGraph
Power supply 12V/2A
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
PC, Windows 95 or higher

07038.00
02002.55
02028.55
02040.55
11081.01
11081.02
11081.05
11081.06
11081.07
11081.08
06501.00
06508.00
06512.01
06410.00
06024.00
06031.10
06034.01
13500.93
07359.01
07360.01
07360.04
07361.01
07361.04
07363.01
07363.04
02001.00
02043.00
02034.00
12150.00
12110.00
12110.01
12126.00
14525.61
12151.99
14602.00

2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Current balance / Force acting on a currentcarrying conductor
P24106 01/15
156 Laboratory Experiments, Physics

Lorentz force F as a function of the current IL in the conductor loop.

Tasks:
1. The direction of the force is to be
determined as a function of the
current and the direction of the
magnetic field.
2. The force F is to be measured, as
a function of the current IL in the
conductor loop, with a constant
magnetic induction B and for
conductor loops of various sizes.
The magnetic induction is to be
calculated.
3. The force F is to be measured, as
a function of the coil current IM,
for a conductor loop. In the range
being considered, the magnetic
induction B is, with sufficient accuray, proportional to the coil current IM.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Stationary currents

Semiconductor thermogenerator 4.1.07-00

What you can learn about

Seebeck effect
(thermoelectric effect)

Thermoelectric e.m.f.

Efficiency

Peltier coefficient

Thomson coefficient

Seebeck coefficient

Direct energy conversion

Thomson equations

Principle:
In a semi-conductor thermogenerator, the no-load voltage and the
short-circuit current are measured as
a function of the temperature difference. The internal resistance, the
Seebeck coefficient and the efficiency are determined.

What you need:

Thermogenerator

04366.00

Flow-through heat exchanger

04366.01

Heat conductive paste, 50 g

03747.00

Connection box

06030.23

Rheostats, 33 , 3.1 A

06112.02

Voltmeter 0.3...300 V-, 10...300 V~

07035.00

Ammeter 1/5 A DC

07038.00

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Immersion thermostat TC10

08492.93

Accessory set for TC10

08492.01

Bath for thermostat, Makrolon

08487.02

Laboratory thermometers, -10...+100C

38056.00

Precision mercury thermometers, -10...+ 50C

38033.00

Resistor 2 2%, 2W, G1

06055.20

Rubber tubing, di = 6 mm, l = 1 m

39282.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Semiconductor thermogenerator
P2410700
Electrical power generated as a function of the temperature difference.

Tasks:
1. To measure no-load voltage Uo
and short-circuit current Is at different temperature differences
and to determine the Seebeck coefficient.
2. To measure current and voltage at
a constant temperature difference
but with different load resistors,
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

and to determine the internal resistance Ri from the measured

values.
3. To determine the efficiency of energy conversion, from the quantity
of heat consumed and the electrical energy produced per unit time.

Laboratory Experiments, Physics 157

Electricity

Stationary currents

4.1.08-00 Peltier heat pump

What you can learn about

Peltier effect

Heat pipe

Termoelectric e. m. f.

Peltier coefficient

Cooling capacity

Heating capacity

Efficiency rating

Thomson coefficient

Seebeck coefficient

Thomson equations

Heat conduction

Convection

Forced cooling

Joule effect

Principle:
The cooling capacity heating capacity and efficiency rating of a Peltier
heat pump are determined under different operating conditions.

What you need:

Thermogenerator

04366.00

Flow-through heat exchanger

04366.01

Air cooler

04366.02

Heating coil with sockets

04450.00

Distributor

06024.00

Rheostats, 33 , 3.1 A

06112.02

Connecting plug, pack of 2

07278.05

Power supply, universal

13500.93

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Hot/cold air blower, 1700 W

04030.93

Laboratory thermometers, -10...+100C

38056.00

Precision mercury thermometers, -10...+ 50C

38033.00

Rubber tubing, di = 6 mm, l = 1 m

39282.00

Universal clamp

37718.00

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm

07360.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Heat conductive paste, 50 g

03747.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Peltier heat pump
P2410800

158 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Pump cooling capacity as a function of the operating current.

Tasks:
1. To determine the cooling capacity
Pc the pump as a function of the
current and to calculate the efficiency rating hc at maximum output.
2. To determine the heating capacity
Pw of the pump and its efficiency
rating hw at constant current and
constant temperature on the cold
side.

3. To determine Pw ,
w and Pc ,
c
from the relationship between
temperature and time on the hot
and cold sides.
4. To investigate the temperature
behaviour when the pump is used
for cooling, with the hot side aircooled.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Stationary currents

Characteristic curves of a solar cell 4.1.09-01

What you can learn about

Semiconductor

p-n junction

Energy-band diagram

Fermi characteristic energy
level

Diffusion potential

Internal resistance

Efficiency

Photo-conductive effect

Acceptors

Donors

Valence band

Conduction band

Principle:
The current-voltage characteristics
of a solar cell are measured at different light intensities, the distance between the light source and the solar
cell being varied.
The depencence of no-load voltage
and short-circuit current on temperature is determined.

What you need:

Solar battery, 4 cells, 2.5 x 5 cm

06752.04

Thermopile, Moll type

08479.00

Universal measuring amplifier

13626.93

Rheostats, 330 , 1.0 A

06116.02

Ceramic lamp socket E27 with reflector, switch, safety plug 06751.01

Filament lamp with reflector, 230 V/120 W

06759.93

Hot/cold air blower, 1700 W

04030.93

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Plate holder, opening width 0...10 mm

02062.00

Universal clamp

37718.00

G-clamp

02014.00

Glass pane, 150 x 100 x 4 mm, 2 off

35010.10

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Laboratory thermometers, -10...+100C

38056.00

Tasks:

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

1. To determine the light intensity

with the thermopile at various
distances from the light source.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Characteristic curves of a solar cell
P2410901

Current-voltage characteristic at different light intensities J.

2. To measure the short-circuit current and no-load voltage at various distances from the light
source.
3. To estimate the dependence of
no-load voltage, and short-circuit
current on temperature.

5. To plot the current-votlage characteristic under different operating conditions: cooling the equipment with a blower, no cooling,
shining the light through a glass
plate.
6. To determine the characteristic
curve when illuminating by sunlight.

4. To plot the current-voltage characteristic at different light intensities.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 159

Electricity

Stationary currents

4.1.09-15 Characteristic curves of semiconductors with FG-Module

What you can learn about

Semiconductor

P-n junction

Energy-band diagram

Acceptors

Donors

Valence band

Conduction band

Transistor

Operating point

Principle:
Determine the current strength
flowing through a semi-conducting
diode.
Determine the collector current with
the collector voltage for various values of the base current intensity.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3 PowerGraph

14525.61

Measuring module Function Generator

12111.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Potentiometer 1 k, 0.4W, G2

39103.04

Plug-in board 4 mm plugs

06033.00

Transistors BC-337/40, in G3 casing

39127.20

Carbon resistor 47 k, 1W, G1

39104.38

Silicon diode 1 N 4007, G1

39106.02

Silicon diode 1 N 4148, G1

39106.03

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm

07360.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm

07360.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Characteristic curves of semiconductors
with FG-Module
P2410915

Collector current/voltage characteristic of BC337 transistor.

Tasks:
1. To investigate the dependence of
the current strength flowing
through a semi-conducting diode.
2. To determine the variations of the
collector current with the collector voltage for varios values of the
base current intensity.

160 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Stationary currents

Characteristic and efficiency of PEM fuel cell and PEM electrolyser 4.1.11-00
What you can learn about

Electrolysis

Electrode polarisation

Decomposition voltage

Galvanic elements

Faradays law

Principle:
In a PEM electrolyser, the electrolyte
consists of a proton-conducting
membrane and water (PEM = Proton-Exchange-Membrane). When an
electric voltage is applied, hydrogen
and oxygen are formed. The PEM fuel
cell generates electrical energy from
hydrogen and oxygen.
The electrical properties of the electrolyser and the fuel cell are investigated by recording a current-voltage
characteristic line. To determine the
efficiency, the gases are stored in
small gasometers in order to be able
to measure the quantities of the
gases generated or consumed.

What you need:

PEM fuel cell

06747.00

PEM electrolyser

06748.00

Connection box

06030.23

Resistor 10 2%, 2W, G1

06056.10

Resistor 5 2%, 2W, G1

06055.50

Resistor 2 2%, 2W, G1

06055.20

Resistor 1 2%, 2W, G1

06055.10

Short-circuit plug, black

06027.05

Gas bar

40466.00

Graduated cylinder, 100 ml, plastic

36629.01

Rubber tubing, d = 4 mm

39280.00

Rubber tubing, di = 6 mm, l = 1 m

39282.00

Pinchcock, width 10 mm

43631.10

Hose connector, reducing, d = 3-5/6-10 mm

47517.01

Wash bottle, plastic, 500 ml

33931.00

Beaker, 250 ml, low form, plastic

36013.01

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Hand held measuring instrument Pressure, RS 232

07136.00

Laboratory thermometers, -10...+100C

38056.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Power supply, universal

13500.93

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Water, distilled 5 l

31246.81

Volume of the hydrogen generated by the PEM electrolyser as a function of

time at different current I.

Tasks:
1. Recording the characteristic line
of the PEM electrolyser.
2. Recording the characteristic line
of the PEM fuel cell.
3. Determination of the efficiency of
the PEM electrolysis unit.
4. Determination of the efficiency of
the PEM fuel cell.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Characteristic and efficiency
of PEM fuel cell and PEM electrolyser
P2411100

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 161

Electricity

Stationary currents

4.1.12-00 Faradays law

What you can learn about

Electrolysis

Coulometry

Charge

Amount of substance

Faradays law

Faradays contant

Avogadros number

General equation of state for
ideal gases

Principle:
The correlation between the
amounts of substances transformed
in the electrode reaction and the applied charge (amount of electricity)
is described by Faradays law. Faradays constant, which appears as a
proportionality factor, can be determined experimentally from this dependence.

What you need:

Power supply, universal
Digital multimeter 2010
Electrolysis apparatus - Hofmann
Platinum electrode in protective tube, d = 8 mm
On/Off switch
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm
Retort stand, h = 750 mm
Right angle clamp
Universal clamp
Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s
Barometer/Manometer, hand-held
Digital thermometer, NiCr-Ni
Beaker, DURAN, short form, 600 ml
Precision Balance, Sartorius LE 623P
Pasteur pipettes, l = 145 ml
Rubber caps, 10 pcs
Funnel, glass, d = 80 mm
Wash bottle, plastic, 500 ml
Sulphuric acid, 95-98%, 500 ml
Water, distilled 5 l
Weather monitor, 6 lines LCD
Precision Balance, Sartorius LE 623P

13500.93
07128.00
44518.00
45206.00
06034.01
07362.04
07361.01
07360.01
37694.00
37697.00
37718.00
03071.01
07136.00
07050.00
36015.00
45023.93
36590.00
39275.03
34459.00
33931.00
30219.50
31246.81
87997.10
48852.93

1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
4
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Faradays law
P2411200
162 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Correlations between the transferred charge and the evolved volumes of hydrogen and oxygen in the electrolysis of diluted sulphuric acid (T = 296.05 K
and p = 100.4 kPa)

Tasks:
Determine Faradays constant from
the dependence of the volumes of
hydrogen and oxygen evolved on the
applied charge in the hydrolysis of
diluted sulphuric acid.
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Stationary currents

Second order conductors. Electrolysis with FG-Module 4.1.13-15

What you can learn about

Electrolysis

Electrode polarisation

Conductivity

Ohms law

Principle:
In this experiment a copper(II) sulphate solution is to be electrolysed
using two different materials graphite electrodes and copper
wires. During the electrolyses the
current/voltage curves are recorded.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3 PowerGraph

14525.61

Measuring module Function Generator

12111.00

Retort stand, 210 mm x 130 mm, h = 500 mm

37692.00

Right angle clamp

37697.00

Support for two electrodes

45284.01

Graphite electrodes, d = 5 mm, l = 150 mm, 6 pcs.

44510.00

Copper wire, d = 0.5 mm

06106.03

Beaker, DURAN, tall form, 150 ml

36003.00

Graduated cylinder, BORO 3.3, 100 ml

36629.00

Precision Balance, Sartorius TE 412

48835.93

Spoon with spatula end, l = 150 mm, steel, wide

33398.00

Stirring rods, BORO 3.3, l = 300 mm, d = 7 mm

40485.05

Wash bottle, plastic, 500 ml

33931.00

Copper-II sulphate, cryst., 250 g

30126.25

Water, distilled 5 l

31246.81

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Second order conductors.
Electrolysis with FG-Module
P2411315

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Current/voltage characteristics of an aqueous copper sulphate solution conducted with graphite electrodes and copper wires.

Tasks:
Measure the correlation between
voltage and current on second order
conductors (copper (II) sulphate solution using two different materials graphite electrodes and copper
wires.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 163

Electricity

Electric field

4.2.01-00 Electrical fields and potentials in the plate capacitor

What you can learn about

Capacitor

Electric field

Potential

Voltage

Equipotential lines

Principle:

A uniform electric field E is produced between the charged plates of

a plate capacitor. The strength of the
field is determined with the electric
field strength meter, as a function of
the plate spacing d and the voltage
U. The potential  within the field is
measured with a potential measuring probe.

What you need:

Capacitor plate 283 mm x 283 mm

06233.02

Capacitor plate with hole, d = 55 mm

11500.01

Spacer plates, 1 set

06228.01

Electric field meter

11500.10

Potential probe

11501.00

Power supply, regulated, 0...600 V-

13672.93

Blow lamp, butan cartridge, X2000

46930.00

Butane cartridge C 206 without valve

47535.00

Rubber tubing, di = 6 mm, l = 1 m

39282.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, green-yellow, l = 10 cm 07359.15

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Optical profile bench, l = 600 mm

08283.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 250 mm, d = 10 mm

02031.00

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Rule, plastic, 200 mm

09937.01

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

High value resistors, 10 M

07160.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Electrical fields and potentials
in the plate capacitor
P2420100

164 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Electric field strength as a function of the plate voltage.

Tasks:
1. The relationship between voltage
and electric field strength is investigated, with constant plate spacing.

3. In the plate capacitor, the potential is measured with a probe, as a

function of position.

2. The relationship between electric

field strength and plate spacing is
investigated, with constant voltage.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Electric field

Charging curve of a capacitor 4.2.02-01

What you can learn about

Charging

Discharging

Time constant

Exponential function

Half life

Principle:
A capacitor is charged by way of a
resistor. The current is measured as a
function of time and the effects of
capacitance, resistance and the voltage applied are determined.

What you need:

Connection box

06030.23

Two way switch, single pole

06030.00

Capacitor 2 x 30 F

06219.32

Carbon resistor 100 , 1W, G1

39104.63

Carbon resistor 1 M, 1W, G1

39104.52

Connecting plug white 19 mm pitch

39170.00

Capacitor 1 microF/ 250 V, G2

39113.01

Capacitor 4,7 microF/ 250 V, G2

39113.03

Power supply 0-12 V DC/ 6 V, 12 V AC

13505.93

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm

07360.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm

07360.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Charging curve of a capacitor
P2420201
Course of current with time at different capacitance values; voltage and
resistance are constant (U = 9 V, R = 2.2 M).

Tasks:
To measure the charging current
over time:

3. using different voltages (R and C

constant).

1. using different capacitance values

C, with constant voltage U and
constant resistance R

To determine the equation representing the current when a capacitor

is being charged, from the values
measured.

2 using different resistance values

(C and U constant)

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 165

Electricity

Electric field

4.2.02-15 Switch-on behaviour of a capacitor and an inductivity with FG-Module

What you can learn about

Charging

Discharging

Time constant

Exponential function

Half life

Principle:
To measure the course of current
strength and voltage ina capacitance/inductivity in the instant of
switching on. The capacitance/inductivity is determined from the
measurement curve.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3 PowerGraph

14525.61

Measuring module Function Generator

12111.00

Connection box

06030.23

On/Off switch

06034.01

Carbon resistor 220 , 1W, G1

39104.64

Carbon resistor 470 , 1W, G1

39104.15

Electrolyte capacitors non-polarised, G1, 47 F

39105.45

Coil, 900 turns

06512.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm

07360.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm

07360.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

The course of the voltage and the current intensity during a switching on
process in a coil.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Switch-on behaviour of a capacitor and
an inductivity with FG-Module
P2420215

Tasks:
1. To measure the course of current
strength and voltage in a capacitance in the instant of switching
on. The capacitance is determined
from the measurement curve.
2. To measure the course of current
strength and voltage in inductivity
in the instant of switching on. The
inductivity is determined from the
measurement curve.
166 Laboratory Experiments Physics

The course of the voltage and the current intensity during a switching on
process in a capacitance.
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Electric field

Capacitance of metal spheres and of a spherical capacitor 4.2.03-00

What you can learn about

Voltage

Potential

Charge

Electric field

Electrostatic induction

Electrostatic induction
constant

Capacitance

Capacitor

Dielectrics

Principle:
Metal spheres with different radii
and a spherical capacitor are
charged by means of a variable voltage. The induced charges are determined with a measuring amplifier.
The corresponding capacitances are
deduced from voltage and charge
values.

What you need:

Conducting ball, d = 20 mm
06236.00
Conducting ball, d = 40 mm
06237.00
Conducting ball, d = 120 mm
06238.00
Hemispheres, Cavendish type
06273.00
Hollow plastic ball with eyelet
06245.00
Capillary tube, AR-glass, straight, l = 250 mm
36709.00
Copper wire, d = 0.5 mm
06106.03
Insulating stem
06021.00
High value resistors, 10 M
07160.00
High voltage supply 0...10 kV
13670.93
Capacitor 10 nF/ 250 V, G1
39105.14
Universal measuring amplifier
13626.93
Multi range meter, analogue
07028.01
Digital multimeter 2010
07128.00
Connecting cable, 30 kV, l = 1000 mm
07367.00
Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm
07542.11
Adapter, BNC socket - 4 mm plug
07542.20
T type connector, BNC, socket, socket, plug
07542.21
Adapter, BNC plug/4 mm socket
07542.26
Vernier caliper, plastic
03011.00
Barrel base -PASS02006.55
Support base -PASS02005.55
Right angle clamp -PASS02040.55
Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 630 mm
02027.55
Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 400 mm
02026.55
Universal clamp with joint
37716.00
Crocodile clips, black, strong version, pack of 10
29426.03
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, green-yellow, l = 10 cm 07359.15
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, green-yellow, l = 75 cm 07362.15
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm
07361.04
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm
07361.01

2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Capacitance of metal spheres
and of spherical capacitor
P2420300
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

U1 (measured voltage) as a function of U2 (charging voltage) measured on

conducting spheres with three different diameters.

Tasks:
1. Determination of the capacitance
of three metal spheres with different diameters.

3. Determination of the diameters of

each test body and calculation of
their capacitance values.

2. Determination of the capacitance

of a spherical capacitor.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 167

Electricity

Electric field

4.2.04-01 Coulombs law / Image charge

What you can learn about

Electric field

Electric field strenght

Electric flux

Electrostatic induction

Electric constant

Surface charge density

Dielectric displacement

Electrostatic potential

Principle:
A small electrically charged ball is
positioned at a certain distance in
front of a metal plate lying at earth
potential. The surface charge on the
plate due to electrostatic induction
together with the charged ball forms
an electric field analogous to that
which exists between two oppositely
charged point garges.
The electrostatic force acting on the
ball can be measured with a sensitive
torsion dynamometer.

What you need:

Capacitor plate 283 mm x 283 mm

06233.02

Insulating stem

06021.00

Conducting ball, d = 40 mm

06237.00

Conducting spheres with suspension

02416.01

Torsion dynamometer, 0.01 N

02416.00

Weight holder for slotted weights

02204.00

Slotted weights, 1 g, polished

03916.00

Direct current measuring amplifier

13620.93

Power supply, high voltage, 0-25 kV

13671.93

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Connecting cable, 30 kV, l = 1000 mm

07367.00

Screened cable, BNC, l = 1500 mm

07542.12

Adapter, BNC socket - 4 mm plug

07542.20

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, green-yellow, l = 100 cm 07363.15

Support base -PASS-

02005.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 1000 mm

02028.55

Holder for U-magnet

06509.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Coulombs law / Image charge
P2420401

Relationship between electrostatic force F and the square of the charge Q

for various distances (a) between ball and plate.

Tasks:
1. Establishment of the relation
between the active force and the
charge on the ball.

3. Determination of the electric constant.

2. Establishment of the relation

between force and distance, ball
to metal plate.

168 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Electric field

Coulombs law with Cobra3 4.2.04-15

What you can learn about

Electric field strength

Electrostatic induction

Surface charge density

Dielectric displacement

Electrostatic potential

Law of distance

Principle:
A small electrically charged ball is
positioned at a certain distance in
front of a second charged ball. The
force between these balls is measured as a function of their charge
and distance (Coulombs law). For
the measurements a sensitive force
sensor and an electrometer amplifier
are used.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Software Cobra3 Force/Tesla

14515.61

Newton measuring module

12110.00

Newton Sensor

12110.01

Insulating bar for Force Sensor

12110.02

Plug with socket and crosshole, 2 pcs.

07206.01

Conducting ball, d = 40 mm

06237.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

High voltage supply 0...10 kV

13670.93

Connecting cable, 30 kV, l = 1000 mm

07367.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, green-yellow, l = 10 cm 07359.15

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm

07360.04

Optical profile bench, l = 600 mm

08283.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm

08286.01

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Sliding device, horizontal

08713.00

Electrometer Amplifier

13621.00

Data cable for Cobra probes

12150.07

Connecting plug white 19 mm pitch

39170.00

Capacitor 10 nF/ 250 V, G1

39105.14

Power supply 12V AC/500 mA

11074.93

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Coulombs law with Cobra3
P2420415

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

The force as a function of 1/r2, where r is the distance between the balls.

Tasks:
1. Measure the force between two
small electrically charged balls as
a function of their charge if both
balls are positively charged (+ +),
both negatively (- -) or one positive one negative (+ -).
2. Measure the force between the
charged balls as a function of the
distance.
3. Compare the measured results
with theoretical values.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 169

Electricity

Electric field

4.2.05-00 Coulomb potential and Coulomb field of metal spheres

What you can learn about

Electric field

Field intensity

Electric flow

Electric charge

Gaussian rule

Surface charge density

Induction

Induction constant

Capacitance

Gradient

Image charge

Electrostatic potential

Potential difference

Principle:
Conducting spheres with different
diameters are charged electrically.
The static potentials and the accompanying electric field intensities are
determined by means of an electric
field meter with a potential measuring probe, as a function of position
and voltage.

What you need:

Electric field meter

11500.10

Potential probe

11501.00

Tasks:

Capacitor plate with hole, d = 55 mm

11500.01

High voltage supply 0...10 kV

13670.93

Conducting ball, d = 20 mm

06236.00

Conducting ball, d = 40 mm

06237.00

1. For a conducting sphere of diameter 2R = 12 cm, electrostatic potential is determined as a function

of voltage at a constant distance
from the surface of the sphere.

Conducting ball, d = 120 mm

06238.00

High value resistors, 10 M

07160.00

Insulating stem

06021.00

Power supply 0-12 V DC/ 6 V, 12 V AC

13505.93

Multi range meter, analogue

07028.01

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Stand tube

02060.00

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

1
1

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Rubber tubing, di = 6 mm, l = 1 m

39282.00

Butane burner Labogaz 206

32178.00

Butane cartridge C 206 without valve

47535.00

Connecting cable, 30 kV, l = 500 mm

07366.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, green-yellow, l = 75 cm 07362.15

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, green-yellow, l = 25 cm 07360.15

2. For the conducting spheres of diameters 2R = 12 cm and 2R = 4 cm,

electrostatic potential at constant
voltage is determined as a function of the distance from the surface of the sphere.
3. For both conducting spheres, electric field strenght is determined as
a function of charging voltage at
three different distances from the
surface of the sphere.

Field strenght as a function of

voltage.

4. For the conducting sphere of diameter 2R = 12 cm, electric field

strenght is determined as a function of the distance from the surface of the sphere at constant
charging voltage.

Graphs 1-3: sphere with 2R = 12 cm;

r1 = 25 cm, r2 = 50 cm, r3 = 75 cm;
graph 4: sphere with 2R = 4 cm;
r1 = 25 cm.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Coulomb potential and Coulomb field
of metal spheres
P2420500

170 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Electric field

Dielectric constant of different materials 4.2.06-00

What you can learn about

Maxwells equations

Electric constant

Capacitance of a plate
capacitor

Real charges

Free charges

Dielectric displacement

Dielectric polarisation

Dielectric constant

Principle:
The electric constant
0 is determined by measuring the charge of a
plate capacitor to which a voltage is
applied. The dielectric constant
is
determined in the same way, with
plastic or glass filling the space
between the plates.

What you need:

Plate capacitor, d = 260 mm

06220.00

Plastic plate 283 x 283 mm

06233.01

Glass plate for current conductors

06406.00

High value resistors, 10 M

07160.00

Universal measuring amplifier

13626.93

High voltage supply 0...10 kV

13670.93

Capacitor 220 nF/250 V, G2

39105.19

Voltmeter 0.3...300 V-, 10...300 V~

07035.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, green-yellow, l = 10 cm 07359.15

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Connecting cable, 30 kV, l = 500 mm

07366.00

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Adapter, BNC socket - 4 mm plug

07542.20

T type connector, BNC, socket, socket, plug

07542.21

Adapter, BNC plug/4 mm socket

07542.26

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Dielectric constant of different materials
P2420600

1000

Q
nAs

800

plastic
X
X

600
1,0

2,0

400

3,0

4,0

X
X

X
X

air

200

X
X
X

X
X

Uc
kV

Electrostatic charge Q of a plate capacitor as a function of the applied voltage Uc, with and without dielectric (plastic) between the plates (d = 0.98 cm)

Tasks:
1. The relation between charge Q
and voltage U is to be measured
using a plate capacitor.
2. The electric constant
0 is to be
determined from the relation
measured under point 1.
3. The charge of a plate capacitor is
to be measured as a function of
the inverse of the distance
between the plates, under constant voltage.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

4. The relation between charge Q

and voltage U is to be measured
by means of a plate capacitor,
between the plates of which different solid dielectric media are
introduced. The corresponding
dielectric constants are determined by comparison with measurements performed with air
between the capacitor plates.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 171

Electricity

Magnetic field

4.3.01-00 Earths magnetic field

What you can learn about

Magnetic inclination and
declination

Isoclinic lines

Isogenic lines

Inclinometer

Magnetic flow density

Helmholtz coils

Principle:
A constant magnetic field, its magnitude and direction known, is superimposed on the unknown earthmagnetic field. The earth-magnetic
field can then be calculated from the
magnitude and direction of the resulting flux density.

What you need:

Helmholtz coils, one pair

06960.00

Power supply, universal

13500.93

Rheostats, 100 , 1.8 A

06114.02

Teslameter, digital

13610.93

Hall probe, axial

13610.01

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Magnetometer

06355.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Stand tube

02060.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm

07363.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm

07363.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Earths magnetic field
P2430100

Linear function to determine the horizontal component hBE of the magnetic

flux density of the earth-magnetic field.

Tasks:
1. The magnetic flux of a pair of
Helmholtz coils is to be determined and plotted graphically as
a function of the coil current. The
Helmholtz system calibration factor is calculated from the slope of
the line.
2. The horizontal component of the
earth-magnetic field is determined through superimposition of
the Helmholtz field.
3. The angle of inclination must be
determined in order to calculate
the vertical component of the
earth-magnetic field.
172 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Magnetic field

Magnetic field of single coils / Biot-Savarts law

4.3.02-01/15

What you can learn about

Wire loop

Biot-Savarts law

Hall effect

Magnetic field

Induction

Magnetic flux density

Principle:
The magnetic field along the axis of
wire loops and coils of different dimensions is measured with a teslameter (Hall probe). The relationship
between the maximum field strength
and the dimensions is investigated
and a comparison is made between
the measured and the theoretical effects of position.

Set-up of experiment P2430215 with Cobra3

What you need:

Experiment P2430215 with Cobra3
Experiment P2430201 with teslameter
Teslameter, digital
Digital multimeter 2010
Induction coil, 300 turns, d = 40 mm
Induction coil, 300 turns, d = 32 mm
Induction coil, 300 turns, d = 25 mm
Induction coil, 200 turns, d = 40 mm
Induction coil, 100 turns, d = 40 mm
Induction coil, 150 turns, d = 25 mm
Induction coil, 75 turns, d = 25 mm
Conductors, circular, set
Hall probe, axial
Power supply, universal
Distributor
Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm
Barrel base -PASSSupport rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm
Right angle clamp -PASSG-clamp
Lab jack, 200 x 230 mm
Reducing plug 4 mm/2 mm socket, 1 pair
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm
Bench clamp -PASSPlate holder, opening width 0...10 mm
Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm
Weight holder, 1g, silver bronzing
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Software Cobra3 Force/Tesla
Cobra3 measuring module Tesla
Cobra3 current probe 6 A
Movement sensor with cable
Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair
Adapter, BNC socket - 4 mm plug

13610.93
07128.00
11006.01
11006.02
11006.03
11006.04
11006.05
11006.06
11006.07
06404.00
13610.01
13500.93
06024.00
03001.00
02006.55
02025.55
02040.55
02014.00
02074.01
11620.27
07361.04
07361.01
02010.00
02062.00
02412.00
02407.00
12150.00
14515.61
12109.00
12126.00
12004.10
07542.27
07542.20

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Curve of magnetic flux density (measured values) for coils with a constant
density of turns n/l, coils radius R = 20 mm, lengths l1 = 53 mm, l2 = 105 mm
and l3 = 160 mm.

Tasks:
1. To measure the magnetic flux
density in the middle of various
wire loops with the Hall probe and
to investigate its dependence on
the radius and number of turns.

2. To determine the magnetic field

constant 0.
3. To measure the magnetic flux
density along the axis of long coils
and compare it with theoretical
values.

Power supply 12V/2A

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
PC, Windows 95 or higher

12151.99
14602.00

1
1

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Magnetic field of a single coils /
Biot-Savarts law
P24302 01/15
Laboratory Experiments Physics 173

Electricity
4.3.03-01/15

Magnetic field

Magnetic field of paired coils in Helmholtz arrangement

What you can learn about

Maxwells equations

Wire loop

Flat coils

Biot-Savarts law

Hall effect

Principle:
The spatial distribution of the field
strength between a pair of coils in
the Helmholtz arrangement is measured. The spacing at which a uniform magnetic field is produced is
investigated and the superposition of
the two individual fields to form the
combined field of the pair of coils is
demonstrated.

Set-up of experiment P2430315 with Cobra3

What you need:

Experiment P2430315 with Cobra3
Experiment P2430301 with teslameter
Teslameter, digital
Digital multimeter 2010
Helmholtz coils, one pair
Power supply, universal
Hall probe, axial
Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm
Barrel base -PASSSupport rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm
Right angle clamp -PASSG-clamp
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm
Bench clamp -PASSPlate holder, opening width 0...10 mm
Silk thread on spool, l = 200 mm
Weight holder, 1g, silver bronzing
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Software Cobra3 Force/Tesla
Cobra3 measuring module Tesla
Cobra3 current probe 6 A
Movement sensor with cable
Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair
Adapter, BNC socket - 4 mm plug
Power supply 12V/2A
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
PC, Windows 95 or higher

13610.93
07128.00
06960.00
13500.93
13610.01
03001.00
02006.55
02025.55
02040.55
02014.00
07361.04
07361.01
02010.00
02062.00
02412.00
02407.00
12150.00
14515.61
12109.00
12126.00
12004.10
07542.27
07542.20
12151.99
14602.00

1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
3
2
2

1
1
1
2
1
1
2
3
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Magnetic field of paired coils
in Helmholtz arrangement
P24303 01/15
174 Laboratory Experiments Physics

B (r = 0; r is the distance perpendicular to the axis of the coils) as a function

of z (z is the distance from the center of the coils in the direction of the axis
of the coils) with the parameter .

Tasks:
1. To measure the magnetic flux
density along the z-axis of the flat
coils when the distance between
them a = R (R = radius of the
coils) and when it is larger and
smaller than this.
2. To measure the spatial distribution
of the magnetic flux density when
the distance between coils a = R,
using the rotational symmetry of
the set-up:

b) measurement of radial component Br.

3. To measure the radial components
B
r and Br of the two individual
coils in the plane midway between
them and to demonstrate the
overlapping of the two fields at
Br = 0.

a) measurement of the axial component Bz

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Magnetic field

Magnetic moment in the magnetic field 4.3.04-00

What you can learn about

Torque

Magnetic flux

Uniform magnetic field

Helmholtz coils

Principle:
A conductor loop carrying a current
in a uniform magnetic field experiences a torque. This is determined as
a function of the radius, of the number of turns and the current in the
conductor loop and of the strength
of the external field.

What you need:

Helmholtz coils, one pair

06960.00

Conductors, circular, set

06404.00

Torsion dynamometer, 0.01 N

02416.00

Coil carrier for torsion dynamometer

02416.02

Distributor

06024.00

Power supply, universal

13500.93

Variable transformer with rectifier 15 V~/12 V- , 5 A

13530.93

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Support base -PASS-

02005.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 630 mm

02027.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Magnetic moment in the magnetic field
P2430400

Torque due to a magnetic moment in a uniform magnetic field as a function

of the angle between the magnetic field and magnetic moment.

Tasks:

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Determination of the torque due to a

magnetic moment in a uniform magnetic field, as a function

2. of the angle between the magnetic field in the magnetic moment,

1. of the strength of the magnetic

field,

3. of the strength of the magnetic

moment.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 175

Electricity

Magnetic field

4.3.05-00 Magnetic field outside a straight conductor

What you can learn about

Maxwells equations

Magnetic flux

Induction

Superimposition of magnetic
fields

Principle:
A current which flows through one
or two neighbouring straight conductors produces a magnetic field
around them. The dependences of
these magnetic fields on the distance from the conductor and on the
current are determined.

What you need:

Electric conductors, set of 4

06400.00

Coil, 6 turns

06510.00

Coil, 140 turns, 6 tappings

06526.01

Clamping device

06506.00

Iron core, rod shaped, laminated

06500.00

Iron core, U-shaped, laminated

06501.00

Variable transformer with rectifier 15 V~/12 V- , 5 A

13530.93

Teslameter, digital

13610.93

Hall probe, axial

13610.01

Current transformer/Clamp Ampermeter adaptor

07091.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 400 mm

02026.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

G-clamp

02014.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 50 cm

07361.02

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Magnetic field outside a straight conductor P2430500

Magnetic field component By of two parallel conductors on the x-axis as a

function of the distance from one conductor, if the current in both conductors is in the same direction.

Tasks:
Determination of the magnetic field
1. of a straight conductor as a function of the current,
2. of a straight conductor as a function of the distance from the conductor,
3. of two parallel conductors, in
which the current is flowing in
the same direction, as a function
176 Laboratory Experiments Physics

of the distance from one conductor on the line joining the two
conductors,
4. of two parallel conductors, in
which the current is flowing in
opposite directions, as a function
of the distance from one conductor on the line joining the two
conductors.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Magnetic field

Magnetic field inside a conductor 4.3.06-00

What you can learn about

Maxwells equations

Magnetic flux

Induction

Current density

Field strength

Principle:
A current which produces a magnetic field is passed through an electrolyte. This magnetic field inside the
conductor is determined as a function of position and current.

What you need:

Hollow cylinder, PLEXIGLAS

11003.10

Search coil, plane

11004.00

Power frequency generator, 1 MHz

13650.93

LF amplifier, 220 V

13625.93

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Distributor

06024.00

1
1

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Cursor for scale, 2 pieces, plastic, red

02201.00

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 400 mm

02026.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Screened cable, BNC, l = 1500 mm

07542.12

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 50 cm

07361.02

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Hydrochloric acid 37 %, 1000 ml

30214.70

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Magnetic field inside a conductor
P2430600

Magnetic field inside a conductor as a function of the position x (x = height

of the probe perpendicular to the axis of the cylinder).

Tasks:
Determination of the magnetic field
inside a conductor as a function
1. of the current in the conductor,
2. of the distance from the axis of
the conductor.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 177

Electricity

Magnetic field

4.3.07-11 Ferromagnetic hysteresis with PC interface system

What you can learn about

Induction

Magnetic flux, coil

Magnetic field strength

Magnetic field of coils

Remanence

Coercive field strength

Principle:
A magnetic field is generated in a
ring-shaped iron core by a continuous adjustable direct current applied
to two coils. The field strength H
and the flux density B are measured
and the hysteresis recorded.
The remanence and the coercive field
strength of two different iron cores
can be compared.

What you need:

Coil, 600 turns

06514.01

Iron core, U-shaped, solid

06491.00

Iron core, rod shaped, solid

06490.00

Iron core, U-shaped, laminated

06501.00

Iron core, rod shaped, laminated

06500.00

Commutator switch

06034.03

Power supply, universal, with analog display

13501.93

Rheostats, 10 , 5.7 A

06110.02

Hall probe, tangential, with protective cap

13610.02

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Support rod with hole, stainless steel, l = 150 mm

02030.15

1
4

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Hysteresis for a massive iron core.

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Cobra3 measuring module Tesla

12109.00

Tasks:

Software Cobra3 Force/Tesla

14515.61

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Record the hysteresis curve for a

massive iron core and for a laminated one.

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Ferromagnetic hysteresis
with PC interface system
P2430711

178 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Magnetic field

Magnetostriction with the Michelson interferometer 4.3.08-00

What you can learn about

Interference

Wavelength

Diffraction index

Speed of light

Phase

Virtual light source

Ferromagnetic material

Weiss molecular magnetic
fields

Spin-orbit coupling

Principle:
With the aid of two mirrors in a
Michelson arrangement, light is
brought to interference. Due to the
magnetostrictive effect, one of the
mirrors is shifted by variation in the
magnetic field applied to a sample,
and the change in the interference
pattern is observed.

What you need:

Optical base plate with rubberfeet

08700.00

Laser, He-Ne 0.2/1.0 mW, 220 V AC*

08180.93

Adjusting support 35 x 35 mm

08711.00

Surface mirror 30 x 30 mm

08711.01

Magnetic foot for optical base plate

08710.00

Holder for diaphragm/ beam plitter

08719.00

Beam plitter 1/1, non polarizing

08741.00

Lens, mounted, f = +20 mm

08018.01

Lens holder for optical base plate

08723.00

Screen, white, 150 x 150 mm

09826.00

Faraday modulator for optical base plate

08733.00

Rods for magnetotriction, set of 3

08733.01

Power supply, universal

13500.93

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Flat cell battery, 9 V

07496.10

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Measuring results of the magnetostriction of nickel with the relative change

in length l/l plotted against applied field strength H.

*Alternative:
He/Ne Laser, 5mW with holder

08701.00

Tasks:

Power supply for laser head 5 mW

08702.93

1. Construction of a Michelson interferometer using separate optical

components.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Magnetostriction with the Michelson
interferometer
P2430800

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

2. Testing various ferromagnetic materials (iron and nickel) as well as

a non-ferromagnetic material
(copper), with regard to their
magnetostrictive properties.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 179

Electricity

Electrodynamics

4.4.01-00 Transformer
What you can learn about

Induction

Magnetic flux

Loaded transformer

Unloaded transformer

Coil

Principle:
An alternating voltage is applied to
one of two coils (primary coil) which
are located on a common iron core.
The voltage induced in the second
coil (secondary coil) and the current
flowing in it are investigated as
functions of the number of turns in
the coils and of the current flowing
in the primary coil.

What you need:

Coil, 140 turns, 6 tappings

06526.01

Clamping device

06506.00

Iron core, U-shaped, laminated

06501.00

Iron core, rod shaped, laminated

06500.00

Multi-tap transformer with rectifier 14 VAC/12 VDC, 5 A

13533.93

Two-way switch, double pole

06032.00

Rheostats, 10 , 5.7 A

06110.02

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Transformer
P2440100

Secondary short-circuit current of the transformer as a function

1. of the number of turns in the secondary coil,
2. of the number of turns in the primary coil.

Tasks:
The secondary voltage on the open
circuited transformer is determined
as a function
1. of the number of turns in the
primary coil,
2. of the number of turns in the
secondary coil,
3. of the primary voltage.
The short-circuit current on the secondary side is determined as a function
4. of the number of turns in the primary coil,
180 Laboratory Experiments Physics

5. of the number of turns in the

secondary coil,
6. of the primary current.
With the transformer loaded, the
primary current is determined as a
function
7. of the secondary current,
8. of the number of turns in the
secondary coil,
9. of the number of turns in the
primary coil.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Electrodynamics

Magnetic Induction

4.4.02-01/15

What you can learn about

Maxwells equations

Electrical eddy field

Magnetic field of coils

Coil

Magnetic flux

Induced voltage

Principle:
A magnetic field of variable frequency and varying strength is produced
in a long coil. The voltages induced
across thin coils which are pushed
into the long coil are determined as
a function of frequency, number of
turns, diameter and field strength.

Set-up of experiment P2440215 with FG-Module

What you need:

Experiment P2440215 with FG-Module
Experiment P2440201 with counter
Function generator

13652.93

Digital counter, 4 decades

13600.93

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Field coil 750 mm, 485 turns/m

11001.00

Induction coil, 300 turns, d = 40 mm

11006.01

Induction coil, 300 turns, d = 32 mm

11006.02

Induction coil, 300 turns, d = 25 mm

11006.03

Induction coil, 200 turns, d = 40 mm

11006.04

Induction coil, 100 turns, d = 40 mm

11006.05

Induction coil, 150 turns, d = 25 mm

11006.06

Induction coil, 75 turns, d = 25 mm

11006.07

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 200 cm

07365.04

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3 PowerGraph

14525.61

Software Cobra3 Universal recorder

14504.61

Measuring module Function Generator

12111.00

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Magnetic Induction
P24402 01/15

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Induced voltage as a function of current for different coils.

Tasks:
Determination of the induction voltage as a function
1. of the strength of the magnetic
field,
2. of the frequency of the magnetic
field,
3. of the number of turns of the induction coil,
4. of the cross-section of the induction coil.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 181

Electricity
4.4.03-01/11

Electrodynamics

Inductance of solenoids
What you can learn about

Lenzs law

Self-inductance

Solenoids

Transformer

Oscillatory circuit

Resonance

Damped oscillation

Logarithmic decrement

Q factor

Principle:
A square wave voltage of low frequency is applied to oscillatory circuits comprising coils and capacitors
to produce free, damped oscillations.
The values of inductance are calculated from the natural frequencies
measured, the capacitance being
known.

Set-up of experiment P2440311 with FG-Module

What you need:

Experiment P2440311 with FG-Module
Experiment P2440301 with oscilloscope
Function generator
Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels
Adapter, BNC plug/4 mm socket
Induction coil, 300 turns, d = 40 mm
Induction coil, 300 turns, d = 32 mm
Induction coil, 300 turns, d = 25 mm
Induction coil, 200 turns, d = 40 mm
Induction coil, 100 turns, d = 40 mm
Induction coil, 150 turns, d = 25 mm
Induction coil, 75 turns, d = 25 mm
Coil, 1200 turns
Capacitor 470 nF/250 V, G1
Connection box
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Power supply 12V/2A
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Software Cobra3 Universal recorder
Software Cobra3 PowerGraph
Measuring module Function Generator
PC, Windows 95 or higher

13652.93
11459.95
07542.26
11006.01
11006.02
11006.03
11006.04
11006.05
11006.06
11006.07
06515.01
39105.20
06030.23
07360.01
07360.04
07361.01
07361.04
12150.00
12151.99
14602.00
14504.61
14525.61
12111.00

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1

Inductance per turn as a function of the length of the coil at constant radius.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Inductance of solenoids with Cobra3
P24403 01/11
Tasks:
To connect coils of different dimensions (length, radius, number of
turns) with a known capacitance C
to form an oscillatory circuit. From
the measurements of the natural frequencies, to calculate the induc182 Laboratory Experiments Physics

tances of the coils and determine the

relationships between:
1. inductance and number of turns
2. inductance and length

Measurement of the oscillation period with the Survey Function.

3. inductance and radius.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Electrodynamics

Coil in the AC circuit

4.4.04-01/11

What you can learn about

Inductance

Kirchhoffs laws

Maxwells equations

AC impedance

Phase displacement

Principle:
The coil is connected in a circuit with
a voltage source of variable frequency. The impedance and phase displacements are determined as functions of frequency. Parallel and series
impedances are measured.

Set-up of experiment P2440411 with FG-Module

What you need:

Experiment P2440411 with FG-Module
Experiment P2440401 with oscilloscope
Function generator

13652.93

Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels

11459.95

Difference amplifier

11444.93

Digital counter, 4 decades

13600.93

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 10 cm

07359.01

Coil, 300 turns

06513.01

Coil, 600 turns

06514.01

Connection box

06030.23

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3 PowerGraph

14525.61

Software Cobra3 Universal recorder

14504.61

Tasks:

Measuring module Function Generator

12111.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm

07360.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm

1. Determination of the impedance

of a coil as a function of frequency.

07360.04

Carbon resistor 47 , 1W, G1

39104.62

Carbon resistor 100 , 1W, G1

39104.63

Carbon resistor 220 , 1W, G1

39104.64

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Coil in the AC circuit
P24404 01/11

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Tangent of the current-voltage phase displacement as a function of the

frequency used for calculation of the total inductance of coils connected in
parallel and in series.

2. Determination of the inductance

of the coil.
3. Determination of the phase displacement between the terminal
voltage and total current as a
function of the frequency in the
circuit.
4. Determination of the total
impedance of coils connected in
parallel and in series.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 183

Electricity
4.4.05-01/15

Electrodynamics

Capacitor in the AC circuit

What you can learn about

Capacitance

Kirchhoffs laws

Maxwells equations

AC impedance

Phase displacement

Principle:
A capacitor is connected in a circuit
with a variable-frequency voltage
source. The impedance and phase
displacement are determined as a
function of frequency and of capacitance. Parallel and series impedances
are measured.

Set-up of experiment P2440515 with FG-Module

What you need:

Experiment P2440515 with FG-Module
Experiment P2440501 with oscilloscope
Function generator

13652.93

Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels

11459.95

Difference amplifier

11444.93

Digital counter, 4 decades

13600.93

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 10 cm

07359.01

Carbon resistor 47 , 1W, G1

39104.62

Carbon resistor 100 , 1W, G1

39104.63

Carbon resistor 220 , 1W, G1

39104.64

Capacitor 1 microF/ 250 V, G2

39113.01

Capacitor 4,7microF/ 250 V, G2

39113.02

Capacitor 4,7microF/ 250 V, G2

39113.03

Connection box

06030.23

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3 PowerGraph

14525.61

Software Cobra3 Universal recorder

14504.61

Measuring module Function Generator

12111.00

Impedance of various capacitors as a function of the frequency.

Tasks:
1. Determination of the impedance
of a capacitor as a function of
frequency.

PC, Windows 95 or higher

2. Determination of the phase displacement between the terminal

voltage and total current as a
function of the frequency in the
circuit.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Capacitor in the AC circuit
P24405 01/15

3. Determination of the total

impedance of capacitors connected in parallel and in series.

184 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Electrodynamics

RLC Circuit

4.4.06-01/11

What you can learn about

Series-tuned circuit

Parallel-tuned circuit

Resistance

Capacitance

Inductance

Capacitor

Coil

Phase displacement

Q factor

Band-width

Loss resistance

Damping

Principle:
The current and voltage of parallel
and series-tuned circuits are investigated as a function of frequency.
Q-factor and bandwidth are determined.

Set-up of experiment P2440611 with FG-Module

What you need:

Experiment P2440611 with FG-Module
Experiment P2440601 with multimeter
Function generator

13652.93

Digital counter, 4 decades

13600.93

Multi-range meter with amplifier

07034.00

Coil, 300 turns

06513.01

Connecting plug white 19 mm pitch

39170.00

Carbon resistor 10 , 1W, G1

39104.01

Carbon resistor 47 , 1W, G1

39104.62

Carbon resistor 470 , 1W, G1

39104.15

Carbon resistor 1k, 1W, G1

39104.19

Capacitor 1 microF/ 250 V, G2

39113.01

Capacitor 100 nF/250 V, G1

39105.18

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm

07360.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm

07360.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Connection box

06030.23

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Determination of the frequency performance of a

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

1. Series-tuned circuit for

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

14525.61

a) voltage resonance
damping resistor,

without

Software Cobra3 PowerGraph

b) voltage resonance without parallel resistor

Software Cobra3 Universal recorder

14504.61

without

Measuring module Function Generator

12111.00

b) current resonance
damping resistor,

c) voltage resonance with parallel

resistor.

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Total voltage as a function of frequency in the parallel tuned circuit. Curves

recorded for different resistors(top down): R = , 1000 , 470 .

Tasks:
2. Parallel-tuned circuit for
a) current resonance without parallel resistor,

c) current resonance with damping resistor.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

RLC Circuit
P24406 01/11

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 185

Electricity

Electrodynamics

4.4.07-00 Rectifier circuits

What you can learn about

Half-wave rectifier

Full-wave rectifier

Graetz rectifier

Diode and Zener diode

Avalanche effect

Charging capacitor

Ripple

r.m.s. value

Internal resistance

Smoothing factor

Ripple voltage

Voltage stabilisation

Voltage doubling

Principle:
The ripple of the output voltage of
various rectifier circuits is measured
as a function of the load current
strength and the charging capacitance. The characteristics of a voltage stabilizer and of a multiplier are
investigated.

What you need:

Plug-in board 4 mm plugs

06033.00

Silicon diode 1 N 4007, G1

39106.02

Electrolyte capacitors, G1, 470 F

39105.26

Electrolyte capacitors G1, 10 F

39105.28

Electrolyte capacitors, G2, 2200 F

39113.08

Electrolyte capacitors G1, 1000 F

06049.09

Carbon resistor 470 , 1W, G1

39104.15

Carbon resistor 47 , 1W, G1

39104.62

Siliziumdiode ZF 4.7, G1

39132.01

Multi-tap transformer with rectifier 14 VAC/12 VDC, 5 A

13533.93

Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels

11459.95

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Rheostats, 330 , 1.0 A

06116.02

Adapter, BNC plug/4 mm socket

07542.26

Tasks:

Connecting plug white 19 mm pitch

39170.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm

07360.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm

07360.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

1. Using the half-wave rectifier:

a) to display the output voltage
(without charging capacitor) on
the oscilloscope
b) to measure the diode current ID as
a function of the output current
strength Io (with the charging
capacitor)
c) to measure the ripple component
UACpp of the output voltage as a
function of the output current
(C = constant)
d) to measure the ripple as a function
of the capacitance (Io = constant)
e) to measure the output voltage Uo
as a function of the input voltage
Ui (Io = 0).
2. Using the bridge rectifier:
a) to display the output voltage
(without charging capacitor) on
the oscilloscope

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Rectifier circuits
P2440700

186 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Ripple of the output voltage as a function of the charging current:

a) half-wave rectifier, b) bridge rectifier.

b) to measure the current through

one diode, ID, as a function of the
output current Io (with the charging capacitor)
c) to measure the ripple of the output voltage as a function of the
output current (C = constant)
d) to measure the ripple as a function
of the capacitance (Io = constant)
e) to measure the output voltage as
a function of the input voltage.
3. To measure the voltage at the
charging capacitor, Uc, and the
output voltage of a stabilized
voltage source as a function of
the input voltage Ui.
4. To measure the output voltage of
a voltage multiplier circuit as a
function of the input voltage.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Electrodynamics

RC Filters 4.4.08-00
What you can learn about

High-pass

Low-pass

Wien-Robinson bridge

Parallel-T filters

Differentiating network

Integrating network

Step response

Square wave

Transfer function

Principle:
The frequency response of simple RC
filters is recorded by point-by-point
measurements and the sweep displayed on the oscilloscope.

What you need:

Plug-in board 4 mm plugs

06033.00

Resistor 500 2%, 1W, G1

06057.50

Capacitor 10 nF/ 250 V, G1

39105.14

Carbon resistor 1k, 1W, G1

39104.19

Connecting plug white 19 mm pitch

39170.00

Difference amplifier

11444.93

Wobble-functiongenerator 1 Hz-10 MHz

11766.95

Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels

11459.95

Adapter, BNC plug/4 mm socket

07542.26

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 10 cm

07359.02

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Screened cable, BNC, l = 30 cm

07542.10

Screened cable, BNC, l = 1500 mm

07542.12

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

RC Filters
P2440800

Frequency response of high-pass and low pass filter.

Tasks:
To record the frequency response of
the output voltage of

To investigate the step response of

1. a high-pass filter

7. an integrating network

6. a differentiating network

2. a low-pass filter
3. a band-pass filter
4. a Wien-Robinson bridge
5. a parallel-T filter,
point by point and to display the
sweep on the oscilloscope.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 187

Electricity
4.4.09-01/15

Electrodynamics

High-pass and low-pass filters

What you can learn about

Circuit

Resistance

Capacitance

Inductance

Capacitor

Coil

Phase displacement

Filter

Kirchhoffs laws

Bode diagram

Principle:
A coil, a capacitor, an ohmic resistance and combinations of these
components are investigated for
their filter characteristics as a function of frequency. The phase displacement of the filters is determined also as a function of frequency.

Set-up of experiment P2440915 with FG-Module

What you need:

Experiment P2440915 with FG-Module
Experiment P2440901 with oscilloscope
Function generator

13652.93

Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels

11459.95

Digital counter, 4 decades

13600.93

Difference amplifier

11444.93

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 10 cm

07359.04

Coil, 300 turns

06513.01

Carbon resistor 47 , 1W, G1

39104.62

Carbon resistor 1 k, 1W, G1

39104.19

Capacitor 1 microF/ 250 V, G2

39113.01

Capacitor 4,7microF/ 250 V, G2

39113.02

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Connection box

06030.23

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Tasks:

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3 PowerGraph

14525.61

Determination of the ratio of output

voltage to input voltage with the

Software Cobra3 Universal recorder

14504.61

1. RC/CR network,

Measuring module Function Generator

12111.00

2. RL/LR network,

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm

07360.01

3. CL/LC network,

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm

07360.04

4. Two CR networks connected in

series.

PC, Windows 95 or higher

U/U1 as a function of the frequency with the LC and CL network.

5. Determination of the phase displacement with the RC/CR network.

6. Determination of the phase displacement with two CR networks
connected in series.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

High-pass and low-pass filters
P24409 01/15

188 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Electrodynamics

RLC measuring bridge 4.4.10-00

What you can learn about

Wheatstone bridge

Inductive and capacitive
reactance

Ohmic resistance

Impedance

Kirchhoffs laws

Principle:
Ohmic resistances, inductances and
capacitances are determined in a
Wheatstone bridge circuit operated
on AC. Balancing is done aurally
through headphones, using the high
sensitivity of the human ear.

What you need:

Simple slide wire measuring bridge
Head phones, stereo
Function generator
Coil, 6 turns
Coil, 300 turns
Coil, 600 turns
Coil, 1200 turns
Coil, 600 turns, short
Induction coil, 300 turns, d = 40 mm
Carbon resistor 330 , 1W, G1
Carbon resistor 470 , 1W, G1
Carbon resistor G1, 680 , 1 W
Carbon resistor 1 k, 1W, G1
Carbon resistor 1,5 k, 1W, G1
Carbon resistor 2.2 k, 1W, G1
Carbon resistor 3.3 k, 1W, G1
Potentiometer 100 , 0.4W, G2
Carbon resistor 1 k, 1W, G1
Capacitor 100 pF/100 V, G2
Capacitor 470 pF/100 V, G1
Capacitor 1 nF/ 100 V, G2
Capacitor 10 nF/ 250 V, G1
Capacitor 47 nF/ 250 V, G2
Capacitor 100 nF/250 V, G1
Connection box
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm
Headphone Adapter jack plug/2 x 4 mm plug

07182.00
65974.00
13652.93
06510.00
06513.01
06514.01
06515.01
06522.01
11006.01
39104.13
39104.15
39104.17
39104.19
39104.21
39104.23
39104.25
39103.01
39104.19
39105.04
39105.07
39105.10
39105.14
39105.17
39105.18
06030.23
07360.04
07361.04
07362.04
65974.01

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
1

Wheatstone bridge.

Tasks:
To determine
1. ohmic resistances
2. inductances
3. capacitances
with the Wheatstone bridge, using
bridge balancing.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

RLC measuring bridge
P2441000
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 189

Electricity

Electrodynamics

4.4.11-00 Resistance, phase shift and power in AC circuits

What you can learn about

Impedance

Phase shift

Phasor diagram

Capacitance

Self-inductance

Principle:
Series circuits containing self-inductances or capacitances and ohmic
resistances are investigated as a
function of frequency. Measuring the
electrical magnitudes with a work or
power measurement instrument, real
power or apparent power can be displayed directly.

What you need:

Work and power meter

13715.93

Power frequency generator, 1 MHz

13650.93

Coil, 300 turns

06513.01

Connection box

06030.23

Electrolyte capacitors non-polarised, G1, 47 F

39105.45

Carbon resistor 10 Ohm, 1W, G1

39104.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, black, l = 50 cm

07361.05

Z2
2

X
1100

1000

900

800

700
X
600

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Resistance, phase shift and power
in AC circuits
P2441100

500
X
400
X

300
X
200
X
X
X
100

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

1/f 2
10-6 Hz2

Capacitor and resistor in series, Z2 as a function of 1/f2.

Tasks:

190 Laboratory Experiments Physics

1. Series circuit of self-inductance

and resistor (real coil)

Determination of self-inductance
and ohmic resistance

Investigation of impedance and

phase shift as a function of frequency

2. Series circuit of capacitor and resistor

Investigation of the relation between real power and current intensity

phase shift as a function of frequency

Investigation of impedance and

Investigation of the relation between real power and current intensity

Determination of capacitance and
ohmic resistance

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Electrodynamics

Induction impulse 4.4.12-11

What you can learn about

Law of induction

Magnetic flux

Maxwells equations

Principle:
A permanent magnet falls with different velocities through a coil. The
change in the magnetic flux  generates an induced voltage impulse.
The induced voltage impulse USS is
recorded with a computer interface
system. Depending on the polarity of
the permanent magnet the induced
voltage impulse is negative or positive.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3 Universal recorder

14504.61

Software Cobra3 PowerGraph

14525.61

Light barrier, compact

11207.20

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 600 mm

02037.00

Bosshead

02043.00

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Universal clamp

37718.00

Glass tubes, AR-glass, d = 12 mm, l = 300 mm

45126.01

Coil holder

06528.00

Coil, 600 turns, short

06522.01

Measured induction voltage USS versus time. Additionally the evaluation of

the peak-to-peak voltage USS = 2.766 V is shown.

Magnet, d = 8 mm, l = 60 mm

06317.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Tasks:

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 50 cm

07361.02

PC, Windows 95 or higher

1. Measurement of the induced voltage impulse USS and the falling

magnets velocity.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Induction impulse
P2441211

2. Evaluation of the induced voltage

impulse USS as a function of the
magnets velocity.
3. Calculation of the magnetic flux
induced by the falling magnet as a
function of the magnets velocity.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 191

Electricity

Electromagnetic Oscillations and Waves

4.5.02-00 Coupled oscillating circuits

What you can learn about

Resonance

Q factor

Dissipation factor

Bandwidth

Critical or optimum coupling

Characteristic impedance

Pauli method

Parallel conductance

Band-pass filter

Sweep

Principle:
The Q factor of oscillating circuits is
determined from the bandwidth and
by the Pauli method. In inductively
coupled circuits (band-pass filters)
the coupling factor is determined as
a function of the coil spacing.

What you need:

Wobble-functiongenerator 1 Hz-10 MHz

11766.95

Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels

11459.95

HF coils, 35 turns; 75 H

06915.00

HF coils, 50 turns, 150 H

06916.00

HF coils, 75 turns, 350 H

06917.00

Coil, 150 turns, short

06520.01

Variable capacitor, Casing G3

06049.10

Carbon resistor 22 k, 1W, G1

39104.34

Carbon resistor 47 k, 1W, G1

39104.38

1
1

Carbon resistor 100 k, 1W, G1

39104.41

Carbon resistor 1 M, 1W, G1

39104.52

Carbon resistor G1, 82 k, 1 W

39104.40

Capacitor 470 pF/100 V, G2

39105.07

Connecting plug white 19 mm pitch

39170.00

Connection box

06030.23

G-clamp

02014.00

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 25 cm

07360.02

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Screened cable, BNC, l = 1500 mm

07542.12

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Coupled oscillating circuits
P2450200

Coupling constant k as a function of the distance s between the coils when

the coupling is supercritical.

Tasks:
1. To determine the dissipation factor tan k and the quality factor
Q from the bandwidth of oscillating circuits.
2. To determine the dissipation factor and Q factor of oscillating circuits from the resonant frequency
192 Laboratory Experiments Physics

(0), the capacitance Ctot. and the

parallel conductance Gp determined
by the Pauli method.
3. To determine the coupling factor
k and the bandwidth f of a
band-pass filter as a function of
the coil spacing s.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Electromagnetic Oscillations and Waves

Interference of microwaves 4.5.04-00

What you can learn about

Wavelength

Standing wave

Reflection

Transmission

Michelson interferometer

Principle:
A microwave beam, after reflection
from a metal screen or glass plate,
interferes with the primary waves.
The wavelength is determined from
the resultant standing waves.

What you need:

Microwave transmitter with clystron

11740.01

Microwave receiver

11740.02

Microwave receiving dipole

11740.03

Microwave power supply, 220 VAC

11740.93

Protractor scale with pointer

08218.00

Glass plate, clear glass, 200 x 300 x 4 mm

08204.00

Screen, metal, 300 mm x 300 mm

08062.00

Plate holder, opening width 0...10 mm

02062.00

G-clamp

02014.00

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Multi-range meter with amplifier

07034.00

Adapter, BNC plug/4 mm socket

07542.26

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Interference of microwaves
P2450400

Intensity distribution during interference of microwaves in the Michelson

arrangement, as a function of the position of the reflection screens.

Tasks:
Measurement of the wavelength of
microwaves through the production
of standing waves with
1. reflection at the metal screen,
2. plane-parallel plate,
3. the Michelson interferometer.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 193

Electricity

Electromagnetic Oscillations and Waves

4.5.05-00 Diffraction of microwaves

What you can learn about

Fresnel zones

Huygens principle

Fraunhofer diffraction

Diffraction at the slit

Principle:
Microwaves impinge on a slit and
the edge of a screen. The diffraction
pattern is determined on the basis of
diffraction at these obstacles.

What you need:

Microwave transmitter with clystron

11740.01

Microwave receiving dipole

11740.03

Microwave power supply, 220 VAC

11740.93

Screen, metal, 300 mm x 300 mm

08062.00

Multi-range meter with amplifier

07034.00

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

G-clamp

02014.00

Adapter, BNC plug/4 mm socket

07542.26

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Diffraction of microwaves
P2450500

Intensity distribution in the diffraction of the microwaves at the edge of a

screen, parallel to the plane of the screen.

Tasks:
Determination of the diffraction pattern of the microwave intensity
1. behind the edge of a screen,
2. after passing through a slit,
3. behind a slit of variable width,
with a fixed receiving point.

194 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Electromagnetic Oscillations and Waves

Diffraction and polarization of microwaves 4.5.06-00

What you can learn about

Diffraction

Focal point

Linearity

Circularly and elliptically
polarized waves

Transverse waves

Polarizer and Analyzer

Constructive and destructive
interference

Principle:
The equivalence between visible light
and microwaves as special cases of
the total spectrum of electromagnetic waves can be demonstrated
using diffraction and polarization of
microwaves as an example. The
focusing of microwaves through a
plane convex convergent lens is
observed and the focal distance of
the lens is determined. After that,
polarizability of microwaves is demonstrated by means of a metallic
grating.

What you need:

U in mV

Microwave transmitter with clystron

11740.01

Microwave receiving dipole

11740.03

Microwave power supply, 220 VAC

11740.93

Universal measuring amplifier

13626.93

Polarisation grid

06866.00

Convergent lens, synthetic resin

06872.00

Protractor scale with pointer

08218.00

Voltmeter 0.3...300 V-, 10...300 V~

07035.00

Screened cable, BNC, l = 1500 mm

07542.12

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 200 cm

07365.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 200 cm

07365.04

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

l = 30 cm

150
X

X
X

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

H-base -PASS-

02009.55

Bench clamp -PASS-

02010.00

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 630 mm

02027.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Stand tube

02060.00

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Diffraction and polarization of microwaves P2450600

X
X

l = 40 cm

l = 20 cm

without lens

X
X

50

X
X

X
X
X

-8

-7

-6

-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

l = W-So
in cm

Profile of the intensity of radiation.

Tasks:
1. Measuring the irradiance of the
microwave field behind a converging lens
along the optical axis
transversally to the optical axis.
Determination of the focal length of
a synthetic resin converging lens and
comparison of the results with the

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

with lens
100

distribution of irradiance when no

lens is used.
2. Measurement of the irradiance
transmitted through a metal grating as a function of the angle
between the direction of polarization and the grating bars.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 195

Electricity

Electromagnetic Oscillations and Waves

4.5.08-00 Radiation field of a horn antenna / Microwaves

What you can learn about

Horn antenna

Directional characteristic
pattern

Directivity

Law of distance

Phase center

Principle:
The directional characteristic of a
horn antenna is received in two perpendicular planes by means of a
receiving dipole. The law of distance
for the antenna is verified.

What you need:

Microwave transmitter with clystron

11740.01

Microwave receiver

11740.02

Microwave power supply, 220 VAC

11740.93

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 400 mm

02026.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 1000 mm

02028.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Articulated radial holder

02053.01

Graduated disk, for demonstration

02053.02

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Screened cable, BNC, l = 1500 mm

07542.12

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Radiation field of a horn antenna /
Microwaves
P2450800

Umax

1x
x

x
x

r = 20 cm

0,5

r = 60 cm

1 = 45
--4
x

x
x x

60

x x x

30

x x xx x

30

60

 = 0
in

Directional characteristic Cu(, = 0) of the horn antenna in the polarization plane for different distances.

Tasks:
1. Measurement of the directional
characteristic of the horn antenna
in two perpendicular planes and
evaluation of the corresponding
directivity from the directional
characteristic.
2. Determination of the microwave
irradiance I as a function of the
distance r between the receiving
dipole and the horn antenna,
which verifies the validity of the
law.
196 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Electricity

Electromagnetic Oscillations and Waves

Frustrated total reflection / Microwaves 4.5.09-00

What you can learn about

Transmission

Reflection

Absorption

Refraction

Phase velocity

Total reflection

Surface waves

Frustrated total reflection

Tunnel effect

Principle:
In the first part, the transmission and
reflection characteristics of glass,
acrylic glass and metal are studied
with a microwave transmitterreceiver pair and are compared to
each other.
In the second part, total reflection of
microwaves on a prismatic surface is
suppressed by bringing a second
prism with the same refractive index
close to the first one.

What you need:

Microwave transmitter with clystron

11740.01

Microwave receiver

11740.02

Microwave power supply, 220 VAC

11740.93

Screen, metal, 300 mm x 300 mm

08062.00

Glass plate, clear glass, 200 x 300 x 4 mm

08204.00

Plexiglas plate 200 x 200 x 4 mm

11613.00

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Plate holder, opening width 0...10 mm

02062.00

Supporting block 105 x 10 5x 57 mm

02073.00

Prism, synthetic resin

06873.00

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Vernier caliper, plastic

03011.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Frustrated total reflection / Microwaves
P2450900

n1

k1

k2

n2
x
n1

k1

kr

Frustrated total internal reflection.

Tasks:
1. Determination of the reflecting
and transmitting characteristics of
glass, acrylic glass and metal.
2. Observation of the effect of frustrated total reflection and determination of the transmitted irradiance as a function of distance d
to the prismatic surface. The
refractive index of the prism
material can be calculated by
determining the attenuation coefficient
.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 197

Electricity

Handbooks

Demonstration Experiments Physics Electricity / Electronics on the Magnetic Board 1 + 2

Electricity/Electronics on the Magnetic Board 2 No. 01003.02
61 described Experiments
Please ask for a complete equipment
list Ref. No. 24511
7 Transformation of energy
7.1
(13967)
The transformation of electrical energy
into heat energy
7.2
(13968)
The transform. of electrical energy into
mechanical energy

Electricity/Electronics on the Magnetic Board 1 No. 01001.02

36 described Experiments

3 Electric Power and Work

Please ask for a complete equipment

list Ref. No. 24510

3.1
(13819)
The Power and work of electric current
4 Capacitors

1 Electric Circuits
1.1
The simple circuit

(13801)

1.2
Measurement of voltage

(13802)

1.3
Measurement of current

(13803)

1.4
(13804)
Conductors and non-conductors
1.5
(13805)
Changeover switches and alternate
switches
1.6
(13806)
Parallel and series connection of voltage
sources

4.1
(13820)
Capacitors in direct current circuits
4.2
The charging and discharging
of a capacitor

(13821)

4.3
(13822)
Capacitors in alternating current circuits
5 Diodes, Part 1
5.1
The diode as electrical valve

(13823)

5.2
The diode as rectifier

(13824)

5.3
(13825)
The characteristic curve of a silicon
diode

1.7
The safety fuse

(13807)

1.8
The bimetallic switch

(13808)

1.9
AND and OR Circuits

(13809)

5.5
(13827)
The characteristic current-voltage curves
of a solar cell

(13810)

5.6
(13828)
Solar cells connected in series and in
parallel characteristic current-voltage
curves and performance

2 Electrical Resistance
2.1
Ohms Law

2.2
(13811)
The resistance of wires dependence on
length and cross-section
2.3
(13812)
The resistance of wires dependence on
material and temperature
2.4
The resistivity of wires

(13813)

5.4
(13826)
Properties of solar cells the dependence on the illuminating intensity

5.7
(13829)
Series and parallel connections of solar
cells characteristic current-voltage
curves and power
5.8

(13830)

The characteristic curve of a germanium

diode

2.5
(13814)
Current strength and resistance
with resist. connec. in parallel

6 Transistors, Part 1

2.6
(13815)
Current strength and resistance
with resist. connec. in series

6.2
(13832)
The transistor as direct current amplifier

2.7
Voltage in a series connection

(13816)

2.8
The potentiometer

(13817)

2.9
(13818)
The internal resistance of a voltage
source

198 Laboratory Experiments Physics

6.1
The npn transistor

(13831)

6.3
(13833)
The characteristic current-voltage curves
of a transistor
6.4
The transistor as a switch

(13834)

6.5
(13835)
The transistor as a time-delay switch
6.6
The p-n-p transistor

(13836)

8 Electrochemistry
8.1
(13969)
The conductivity of electrolytes
8.2
(13970)
Voltage and current strength in
conductive processes in liquids
8.3
(13971)
Electrolysis
8.4
(13972)
Galvanization
8.5
(13973)
Galvanic cells
8.6
(13974)
The lead accumulator
8.7
(13975)
The PEM Electrolyser and PEM Fuel cell
8.8
(13976)
The PEM Solar-hydrogen model
9 Electromagnetism
9.1
(13977)
The magnetic effect of a
current-carrying conductor
9.2
(13978)
Lorentz force: A current-carrying
conductor in a mag. field
9.3
(13979)
The electric bell
9.4
(13980)
A model of an electromagnetic relay
9.5
(13981)
Controlling with a relay
9.6
(13982)
The twilight switch
9.7
(13983)
The galvanometer
9.8
(13984)
The reed switch
10 Electric motors
10.1
The permanent magnet motor
10.2
The main circuit motor
10.3
The shunt motor
10.4
The synchronous motor

(13985)
(13986)
(13987)
(13988)

11 Induction
11.1
(13989)
Induction voltage with a permanent
magnet
11.2
(13990)
Induction voltage with an electromagnet
11.3
(13991)
The alternating current generator
11.4
(13992)
The direct current generator
11.5
(13993)
Lenzsches rule
11.6
(13994)
The behaviour of a direct current
generator under load
12 Transformers
12.1
Voltage transformation

12.2
(13996)
Current transformation
12.3
(13997)
Forces between primary and secondary
coils
12.4
(13998)
The heavy current transformer
13 Self-induction
13.1
(13999)
Self-induction on switching on
13.2
(14000)
Self-induction on switching off
13.3
(14001)
Coils in alternating current circuits
13.4
(14002)
Current strength on switching coils on
and off
14 Safe working with electrical energy
14.1
(14003)
Earthing of the power supply line
14.2
(14004)
The protective conductor system
14.3
(14005)
The protective break transformer
15 Sensors
15.1
(14006)
The NTC resistor
15.2.
(14007)
The PTC resistor
15.3
(14008)
The light dependent resistor (LDR)
16 Diodes, Part 2
16.1
(14009)
The characteristic curve of a Z-diode
16.2
(14010)
The Z-diode as voltage stabilizer
16.3
(14011)
The light emitting diode
16.4
(14012)
The photo diode
16.5
(14013)
The bridge rectifier
16.6
(14014)
The filter network
17 Transistors, Part 2
17.1
(14015)
Voltage amplification of a transistor
17.2
(14016)
Stabilization of the operating point
17.3
(14017)
Transistor control with light
17.4
(14018)
Temperature control of a transistor
17.5
(14019)
Undamped electromagnetic oscillations
17.6
(14020)
Transistors in a digital circuit
17.7
(14021)
The Darlington circuit
17.8
(14022)
How phototransistors function
17.9
(14023)
Information transfer through
a photoconductor
18 The operational amplifier
and applications
18.1
(14024)
The differential amplifier
18.2
(14025)
The digital circuit
18.3
(14026)
The generation of oscillations

(13995)

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Physical Structure
of Matter

5
Physical Structure of Matter
Contents
5.1
5.1.01-00
5.1.02-00
5.1.03-11
5.1.03-15
5.1.04-01/05
5.1.05-01/05
5.1.06-00
5.1.07-00
5.1.08-00
5.1.10-05
5.1.11-01/11
5.1.12-00
5.1.13-00
5.2
5.2.01-01
5.2.01-11
5.2.03-11

Physics of the Electron

Elementary charge and Millikan experiment
Specific charge of the electron e/m
Franck-Hertz experiment with Hg-tube
Franck-Hertz experiment with Ne-tube
Plancks quantum of action from photoelectric effect
(line separation by interference filters)
Plancks quantum of action from the photoelectric effect
(line separation by defraction grating)
Fine structure, one-electron and two-electron spectra
Balmer series / Determination of Rydbergs constant
Atomic spectra of two-electron systems: He, Hg
Zeeman effect
Stern-Gerlach experiment
Electron spin resonance
Electron diffraction

5.2.04-00
5.2.20-15
5.2.21-01/11/15
5.2.22-01/11/15
5.2.23-01/11/15
5.2.24-01/11/15
5.2.31-00
5.2.32-00
5.2.41-01/11
5.2.42-01/11/15
5.2.44-01/11/15
5.4.45-01/11/15
5.2.46-01/11/15
5.2.47-01/11/15

Radioactivity
Half-life and radioactive equilibrium
Half-life and radioactive equilibrium with Cobra3
Poissons distribution and Gaussian distribution
of radioactive decay with Cobra3
Influence of the dead time of the counter tube
Visualisation of radioactive particles / Diffusion cloud chamber
Alpha-Energies of different sources with Multi Channel Analyzer
Rutherford experiment
Fine structure of the
-spectrum of 241Am
Study of the
-energies of 226Ra
Energy loss of
-particles in gases
Electron absorption
-spectroscopy
Law of distance and absorption of gamma or beta rays
Energy dependence of the -absorption Coefficient
Compton effect
Internal conversion in 137mBa
Photonuclear cross-section / Compton scattering cross-section
X-ray fluorescence and Moseleys law

5.3
5.3.01-01
5.3.01-11
5.3.02-01/11
5.3.03-00
5.3.04-01
5.3.04-11

Solid-state physics
Hall effect in p-germanium
Hall effect in p-germanium with Cobra3
Hall effect in n-germanium
Hall effect in metals
Band gap of germanium
Band gap of germanium with Cobra3

200 Laboratory Experiments Physics

5.4
5.4.01-00
5.4.02-00
5.4.03-00
5.4.04-00
5.4.05-00
5.4.06-00
5.4.07-00
5.4.08-00
5.4.09-00
5.4.10-00
5.4.11-00
5.4.12-00
5.4.13-00
5.4.14/15-00
5.4.16-00
5.4.17-00
5.4.18-00
5.4.19-00
5.4.20-00
5.4.21-00
5.4.22-00
5.4.23-00
5.4.24-00
5.4.25-00
5.4.26-00
5.4.27-00
6.4

X-ray Physics
Characteristic X-rays of copper
Characteristic X-rays of molybdenum
Characteristic X-rays of iron
The intensity of characteristic X-rays as a function of anode
current and anode voltage
Monochromatization of molybdenum X-rays
Monochromatization of copper X-rays
K
doublet splitting of molybdenum X-rays / fine structure
K
doublet splitting of iron X-rays / fine structure
Duane-Hunt displacement law and Planck's quantum of action
Characteristic X-ray lines of different anode materials /
Moseley's Law; Rydberg frequency and screening constant
Absorption of X-rays
K- and L-absorption edges of X-rays /
Moseley's Law and the Rydberg constant
Examination of the structure of NaCl monocrystals with different orientations
X-ray investigation of different crystal structures /
Debye-Scherrer powder method
X-ray investigation of crystal structures / Laue method
Compton scattering of X-rays
X-ray dosimetry
Contrast medium experiment with a blood vessel model
Determination of the length and position of an object which
cannot be seen
Diffractometric Debye-Scherrer patterns of powder samples
with the three cubic Bravais lattices
Diffractometric Debye-Scherrer patterns of powder samples
with diamond structure (germanium and silicon)
Diffractometric Debye-Scherrer patterns of powder samples
with a hexagonal lattice structure
Diffractometric Debye-Scherrer patterns of powder samples
with a tetragonal lattice structure
Diffractometric Debye-Scherrer patterns of powder samples
with a cubic powder sample
Diffractometric measurements to determine the intensity of
Debye-Scherrer reflexes using a cubic lattice powder sample
Diffractometric Debye-Scherrer measurements
for the examination of the texture of rolled sheets
Handbooks
X-Ray Experiments
Interface-System Cobra3 Physics, Chemistry/Biology

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Physical Structure of Matter

Physics of the Electron

Elementary charge and Millikan experiment 5.1.01-00

What you can learn about

Electric field

Viscosity

Stokes law

Droplet method

Electron charge

Principle:
Charged oil droplets subjected to an
electric field and to gravity between
the plates of a capacitor are accelerated by application of a voltage. The
elementary charge is determined
from the velocities in the direction of
gravity and in the opposite direction.

What you need:

1,20E-18

09070.00

Multi-range meter, 0.24...600 VCD

07021.01

Power supply, regulated, 0...600 V-

13672.93

Object micrometer 1mm i.100 parts

62171.19

Stopwatch, 15 minutes

03076.01

Cover glasses, 18 x 18 mm, pack of 50 pcs.

64685.00

Commutator switch

06034.03

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Stand tube

02060.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, black, l = 25 cm

07360.05

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, black, l = 75 cm

07362.05

Radioactive source, Am-241, 74 kBq

09047.5 1

Circular level

02 122.00

FlexCam Scientific Pro II

88030.93

Optional accessories:

TV set

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Elementary charge and Millikan experiment P2510100

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

1,00E-18

8,00E-19

Q/As

Millikan apparatus

6,00E-19

4,00E-19

2,00E-19

0,00E+00
0,00E+00

2,00E-07

4,00E-07

6,00E-07
r/m

8,00E-07

1,00E-07

1,20E-07

Measurements on various droplets for determining the elementary charge by

the Millikan method.

Tasks:
1. Measurement of the rise and fall
times of oil droplets with various
charges at different voltages.
2. Determination of the radii and the
charge of the droplets.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 201

Physical Structure of Matter

Physics of the Electron

5.1.02-00 Specific charge of the electron e/m

What you can learn about

Cathode rays

Lorentz force

Electron in crossed fields

Electron mass

Electron charge

Principle:
Electrons are accelerated in an
electric field and enter a magnetic
field at right angles to the direction
of motion. The specific charge of the
electron is determined from the
accelerating voltage, the magnetic
field strength and the radius of the
electron orbit.

What you need:

Narrow beam tube with socket

06959.00

Helmholtz coils, one pair

06960.00

Power supply, regulated, 0...600 V-

13672.93

Power supply, universal

13500.93

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 10 cm

07359.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 10 cm

07359.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 75 cm

07362.02

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Specific charge of the electron e/m
P2510200

Tasks:
Determination of the specific charge
of the electron (e/m0) from the path
of an electron beam in crossed
electric and magnetic fields of variable strength.

202 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Physical Structure of Matter

Physics of the Electron

Franck-Hertz experiment with Hg-tube 5.1.03-11

What you can learn about

Energy quantum

Electron collision

Excitation energy

Principle:
Electrons are accelerated in a tube
filled with mercury vapour.
The excitation energy of mercury is
determined from the distance between the equidistant minima of the
electron current in a variable opposing electric field.

What you need:

Franck-Hertz control unit

09105.99

Franck-Hertz Hg-tube on plate

09105.10

Franck-Hertz oven for Hg-tube

09105.93

Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, sheathed

13615.01

Connecting cable for Franck-Hertz Hg-tube

09105.30

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Measure Franck-Hertz experiment

14522.61

Oscilloscope, 30 MHz, 2 channels

11459.95

Adapter, BNC-socket/4mm plug pair

07542.27

Screened cable, BNC, l = 75 cm

07542.11

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Optional equipment:

Example of a Franck-Hertz curve for Hg-gas recorded with T = 180C.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Franck-Hertz experiment with Hg-tube
P2510311
Tasks:
1. Record the counter current
strength Is in a Franck-Hertz tube
as a function of the anode voltage
Ua.
2. To determine the excitation energy Ea from the positions of the
current strength minima or maxima by difference formation.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 203

Physical Structure of Matter

Physics of the Electron

5.1.03-15 Franck-Hertz experiment with Ne-tube

What you can learn about

Energy quantum

Quantum leap

Electron collision

Excitation energy

Principle:
Electrons are accelerated in a tube
filled with neon vapour.
The excitation energy of neon is determined from the distance between
the equidistant minima of the electron current in a variable opposing
electric field.

What you need:

Franck-Hertz control unit

09105.99

Franck-Hertz Ne-tube with housing

09105.40

Connecting cable for Franck-Hertz Ne-tube

09105.50

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Measure Franck-Hertz experiment

14522.61

Oscilloscope, 30 MHz, 2 channels

11459.95

Adapter, BNC-socket/4mm plug pair

07542.27

Screened cable, BNC, l = 75 cm

07542.11

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Optional equipment:

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Franck-Hertz experiment with Ne-tube
P2510315

Example of a Franck-Hertz curve for Ne-gas.

Tasks:
1. Record the counter current
strength Is in a Franck-Hertz tube
as a function of the anode voltage
Ua.
2. To determine the excitation energy Ea from the positions of the
current strength minima or maxima by difference formation.

204 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Physical Structure of Matter

Physics of the Electron

Plancks quantum of action from the photoelectric effect

5.1.04-01/05

(line separation by interference filters)

What you can learn about

External photoelectric effect

Work function

Absorption

Photon energy

Anode

Cathode

Principle:
A photo-cell is illuminated with light
of different wavelengths. Plancks
quantum of action, or Plancks constant (h), is determined from the
photoelectric voltages measured.

Set-up of experiment P2510405 with electrometer

What you need:

Experiment P2510405 with electrometer
Experiment P2510401 with amplifier
Photocell, for h detection, with housing

06778.00

Interference filters, set of 3

08461.00

Interference filters, set of 2

08463.00

Experiment lamp 6

11615.05

Spectral lamp Hg 100, pico 9 base

08120.14

Power supply for spectral lamps

13662.97

Universal measuring amplifier

13626.93

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Screened cable, BNC, l = 30 cm

07542.10

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm

07360.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm

07360.04

Electrometer Amplifier

13621.00

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

1
1

Power supply 12V AC/500 mA

11074.93

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Plancks quantum of action from the photoelectric
P25104 01/05
effect (line separation by interference filters)

Voltage of the photo-cell as a function of the frequency of the irradiated

light.

Tasks:
To determine Plancks quantum of
action from the photoelectric voltages measured at different wavelengths.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 205

Physical Structure of Matter

5.1.05-01/05

Physics of the Electron

Plancks quantum of action from the photoelectric effect

(line separation by defraction grating)
What you can learn about

External photoelectric effect

Work function

Adsorption

Photon energy

Principle:
A photocell is illuminated with
monochromatic light of different
wavelengths. Plancks quantum of
action, or Plancks constant h, is
determined from the photoelectric
voltages measured.

Set-up of experiment P2510501 with amplifier

What you need:

Experiment P2510505 with electrometer
Experiment P2510501 with amplifier
Photocell, for h detection, with housing

06778.00

Diffraction grating, 600 lines/mm

08546.00

Colour filter, 580 nm

08415.00

Colour filter, 525 nm

08414.00

Diaphragm holder, attachable

11604.09

Slit, adjustable

08049.00

Lens holder

08012.00

Lens, mounted, f = +100 mm

08021.01

Mercury vapour high pressure lamp, 80 W

08147.00

Screened cable, BNC, l = 30 cm

07542.10

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm

07360.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm

07360.04

Lamp socket E 27 on stem

06176.00

Power supply for spectral lamps

13662.97

Universal measuring amplifier

13626.93

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

1
2

Optical profile bench, l = 600 mm

08283.00

Base for optical profile bench, adjustable

08284.00

Turning knuckle for optical profile bench

08285.00

Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm

08286.02

Electrometer Amplifier

13621.00

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Power supply 12V AC/500 mA

11074.93

Voltage of the photo-cell as a function of the frequency of the irradiated

light.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Plancks quantum of action from the photoelectric
effect (line separation by defraction grating)
P25105 01/05

206 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Physical Structure of Matter

Physics of the Electron

Fine structure, one-electron and two-electron spectra 5.1.06-00

What you can learn about

Diffraction spectrometer

Spin

Angular momentum

Spin-orbital angular
momentum interaction

Multiplicity

Energy level

Excitation energy

Selection rules

Doublets

Parahelium

Orthohelium

Exchange energy

Angular momentum

Singlet and triplet series

Selection rules

Forbidden transition

Principle:
The well-known spectral lines of He
are used for calibrating the diffraction spectrometer. The wave-lengths
of the spectral lines of Na, Hg, Cd
and Zn are determined using the
spectrometer.

What you need:

Spectrometer/goniometer with verniers

35635.02

Diffraction grating, 600 lines/mm

08546.00

Spectral lamp He, pico 9 base

08120.03

Spectral lamp Na, pico 9 base

08120.07

Spectral lamp Hg 100, pico 9 base

08120.14

Spectral lamp Cd, pico 9 base

08120.01

Spectral lamp Zn, pico 9 base

08120.11

Power supply for spectral lamps

13662.97

Lamp holder, pico 9, for spectral lamps

08119.00

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Fine structure, one-electron
and two-electron spectra
P2510600

Tasks:
1. Calibration of the spectrometer
using the He spectrum, and the
determination of the constant of
the grating;
2. Determination of the spectrum of
Na;
3. Determination of the fine structure splitting.

Spectrum of sodium.

4. Determination of the most intense

spectral lines of Hg, Cd and Zn.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 207

Physical Structure of Matter

Physics of the Electron

5.1.07-00 Balmer series / Determination of Rydbergs constant

What you can learn about

Diffraction image of a
diffraction grating

Visible spectral range

Single electron atom

Atomic model according
to Bohr

Lyman-, Paschen-, Brackettand Pfund-Series

Energy level

Plancks constant

Binding energy

Principle:
The spectral lines of hydrogen and
mercury are examined by means of a
diffraction grating. The known spectral lines of Hg are used to determine
the grating constant. The wave
lengths of the visible lines of the
Balmer series of H are measured.

What you need:

eV

Spectral tube, Hg

06664.00

Holders for spectral tubes, 1 pair

06674.00

Cover tube for spectral tubes

06675.00

Connecting cable, 30 kV, l = 1000 mm

07367.00

Object holder 50 mm x 50 mm

08041.00

Diffraction grating, 600 lines/mm

08546.00

High voltage supply 0...10 kV

13670.93

Insulating support

06020.00

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 400 mm

02026.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Stand tube

02060.00

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Cursor for scale, 2 pieces, plastic, red

02201.00

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Balmer series /
Determination of Rydbergs constant
P2510700

n=

0.9

BrackettSeries

1.5

H
PaschenSeries
H

n=4
n=3

H
H
H
3.4

13.6

n=2

BalmerSeries

ionization energy 13.6 eV

06665.00

energy level

Spectral tube, H2

n=1

LymanSeries

Energy level diagram of the H atom.

Tasks:
1. Determination of the diffraction
grating constant by means of the
Hg spectrum.
2. Determination of the visible lines
of the Balmer series in the H spectrum, of Rydbergs constant and of
the energy levels.

208 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Physical Structure of Matter

Physics of the Electron

Atomic spectra of two-electron systems: He, Hg 5.1.08-00

What you can learn about

Parahelium

Orthohelium

Exchange energy

Spin

Angular momentum

Spinorbit interaction

Singlet and triplet series

Multiplicity

Rydberg series

Selection rules

Forbidden transition

Metastable state

Energy level

Excitation energy

Principle:
The spectral lines of He and Hg are
examined by means of a diffraction
grating. The wavelengths of the lines
are determined from the geometrical
arrangement and the diffraction
grating constants.

What you need:

Spectral tube, Hg

06664.00

Spectral tube, He

06668.00

Holders for spectral tubes, 1 pair

06674.00

Cover tube for spectral tubes

06675.00

Connecting cable, 30 kV, l = 1000 mm

07367.00

Object holder 50 mm x 50 mm

08041.00

Diffraction grating, 600 lines/mm

08546.00

Colour

/nm

Transition

red

665 2

3 1D R 2 1P

yellow-orange

586 2

3 3D R 2 3P

green

501 2

3 1D R 2 1P

blue-green

490 2

4 1D R 2 1P

blue

470 3

4 3S R 2 3P

violet

445 1

4 3D R 2 3P

Transition

High voltage supply 0...10 kV

13670.93

Insulating support

06020.00

Colour

/nm

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

yellow

581 1

Barrel base -PASS-

02006.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 400 mm

02026.55

green

550 1

7 S1 R 6 3P1

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

green

494 2

8 1S1 R 6 1P1

Stand tube

02060.00

blue

437 2

7 1S R 6 1P1

Meter Scale, l = 1000 x 27 mm

03001.00

Cursor for scale, 2 pieces, plastic, red

02201.00

Measuring tape, l = 2 m

09936.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Atomic spectra of two-electron
systems: He, Hg
P2510800

R 6 P1
{ 66 D1
D1 R 6 P1
3

Measured spectral lines of He/Hg and the corresponding energy-level transitions.

Tasks:
1. Determination of the wavelengths
of the most intense spectral lines
of He.
2. Determination of the wavelengths
of the most intense spectral lines
of Hg.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 209

Physical Structure of Matter

Physics of the Electron

5.1.10-05 Zeeman effect / normal and anomalous version

What you can learn about

Bohrs atomic model

Quantisation of energy levels

Electron spin

Bohrs magneton

Interference of
electromagnetic waves

Fabry-Perot interferometer

Principle:
The Zeeman effect is the splitting
of the spectral lines of atoms within
a magnetic field. The simplest is the
splitting up of one spectral line into
three components called normal
Zeeman effect. Usualy the phenomenon is more complex and the
central line splits into many more
components. This is the anomalous
Zeeman effect. Both effects can be
studied using a cadmium lamp as a
specimen. The cadmium lamp is submitted to different magnetic flux
densities and the splitting of the red
cadmium line (normal Zeeman effect)
and that of a green cadmium line

What you need:

Fabry-Perot interferometer
Cadmium lamp for Zeeman effect
Electromagnet without pole shoes
Pole pieces, drilled, conical, 1 pair
Rotating table for heavy loads
Power supply for spectral lamps
Variable transformer 25 V~/20 V- , 12 A
Electrolyte capacitor, 22000 F
Digital multimeter 2010
Optical profile bench, l = 1000 mm
Base for optical profile bench, adjustable
Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 30 mm
Slide mount for optical profil bench, h = 80 mm
Lens holder
Lens, mounted, f = +50 mm
Lens, mounted, f = +300 mm
Iris diaphragm
Polarisation filter on stem
Polarisation specimen, mica
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 100 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 100 cm
CCD-camera for PC-use, USB*

09050.02
09050.01
06480.01
06480.03
02077.00
13662.97
13531.93
06211.00
07128.00
08282.00
08284.00
08286.01
08286.02
08012.00
08020.01
08023.01
08045.00
08610.00
08664.00
07360.01
07360.04
07361.01
07361.04
07362.01
07363.01
07363.04
88037.00

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
5
2
4
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Interference rings with the anomalous Zeeman effect.

(anomalous Zeeman effect) is investigated using a Fabry-Perot interferometer. The evaluation of the results
leads to a fairly precise value for
Bohrs magneton.

Tasks:
1. Using the Fabry-Perot interferometer and a self made telescope
the splitting up of the central lines
into different lines is measured in
wave numbers as a function of the
magnetic flux density.
2. From the results of point 1. a value
for Bohrs magneton is evaluated.
3. The light emitted within the
direction of the magnetic field is
qualitatively investigated.

PC with USB interface, Windows 98SE/Windows Me/

Windows 2000/Windows XP
*Alternative to CCD-Camera incl. measurement software, two slide mounts,
h = 80 mm for classical version of the Zeeman Effect:
Slide mount for optical profile-bench,
08286.00 1
Sliding device, horizontal
08713.00 1
Swinging arm
08256.00 1
210 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Plate holder with tension spring

Screen, with aperture and scale
Slide mount for opt. profile-bench, h = 80 mm

08288.00
08340.00
08286.02

1
1
1

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Zeeman effect / normal and anomalous version P2511005
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Physical Structure of Matter

Physics of the Electron

Stern-Gerlach experiment

5.1.11-01/11

What you can learn about

Magnetic moment

Bohr magneton

Directional quantization

g-factor

Electron spin

Atomic beam

Maxwellian velocity
distribution

Two-wire field

Principle:
A beam of potassium atoms generated in a hot furnace travels along a
specific path in a magnetic two-wire
field. Because of the magnetic moment of the potassium atoms, the
nonhomogeneity of the field applies
a force at right angles to the direction of their motion. The potassium
atoms are thereby deflected from
their path.

Set-up of experiment P2511111 with PC interface

By measuring the density of the

beam of particles in a plane of detection lying behind the magnetic

What you need:

Experiment P2511111 with PC interface
Experiment P2511101 classical
Stern-Gerlach apparatus
Matching transformer
Potassium ampoules, set of 6
High vacuum pump assembly, compact
Electromagnet without pole shoes
Pole piece, plane
Commutator switch
Voltmeter 0.3...300 V-, 10...300 V~
Ammeter, 1 mA...3 A DC/AC
Meter 10/30 mV, 200C
Storage tray, 413 x 240 x 100 mm
Crystallizing dishes, BORO 3.3., 2300 ml
Isopropyl alcohol, 1000 ml
Direct current measuring amplifier
Variable transformer with rectifier 15 V~/12 V- , 5 A
Power supply 0-12 V DC/ 6 V, 12 V AC
Two tier platform support
Rubber tubing/vacuum, d = 6 mm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 25 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm
Connect. cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, green-yellow, l = 50 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 75 cm
Steel cylinders, nitrogen, 10 l
Pressure-reducing valves, nitrogen
Gas-cylinder Trolley for 10 l
Step motor Stern-Gerlach appartus
Step motor unit
Data cable USB, plug type A/B, l = 1.8 m
Software for stepping motor
Adapter, BNC-socket/4 mm plug pair
Screened cable, BNC, l = 1500 mm
PC, Windows 95 or higher

09054.88
09054.04
09054.05
09059.99
06480.01
06480.02
06034.03
07035.00
07036.00
07019.00
47325.02
46246.00
30092.70
13620.93
13530.93
13505.93
02076.03
39286.00
07360.02
07360.04
07361.01
07361.04
07361.15
07362.01
07362.02
41763.00
33483.00
41790.10
09054.06
08087.99
14608.00
14451.61
07542.27
07542.12

1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
2
2
3
2
1
1
3
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Stern-Gerlach experiment
P25111 01/11
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Ionization current as a function of position (u) of detector with large excitation currents in the magnetic analyser.

field, it is possible to draw conclusions as to the magnitude and direction of the magnetic moment of the
potassium atoms.

Tasks:
1. Recording the distribution of the
particle beam density in the detection plane in the absence of the
effective magnetic field.

mentally determined special distribution of the particle beam density.

3. Determining the dependence of
the particle beam density in the
detection plane with different values of the non-homogeneity of
the effective magnetic field.
4. Investigating the positions of the
maxima of the particle beam density as a function of the non-homogeneity of the magnetic field.

2. Fitting a curve consisting of a

straight line, a parabola, and another straight line, to the experiLaboratory Experiments Physics 211

Physical Structure of Matter

Physics of the Electron

5.1.12-00 Electron spin resonance

What you can learn about

Zeeman effect

Energy quantum

Quantum number

Resonance

g-factor

Land factor

Principle:
The g-factor of a DPPH (Diphenylpikrylhydrazyl) and the half-width of
the absorption line are determined,
using the ESR apparatus.

What you need:

ESR resonator with field coils

09050.00

ESR power supply

09050.93

Power supply, universal

13500.93

Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels

11459.95

Digital Mulitmeter 2010

07128.00

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 50 cm

07361.02

Teslameter, digital

13610.93

Hall probe, tangential, protective cap

13610.02

Options:

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Electron spin resonance
P2511200

Electron spin resonance (ESR), model experiment.

Tasks:
With ESR on a DPPH specimen determination of
1. the g-factor of the free electron,
and
2. the half-width of the absorption
line.

212 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Physical Structure of Matter

Physics of the Electron

Electron diffraction 5.1.13-00

What you can learn about

Bragg reflection

Debye-Scherrer method

Lattice planes

Graphite structure

Material waves

De Broglie equation

Principle:
Fast electrons are diffracted from a
polycrystalline layer of graphite: interference rings appear on a fluorescent screen. The interplanar spacing
in graphite is determined from the
diameter of the rings and the accelerating voltage.

What you need:

Electron diffraction tube on mounting

06721.00

High voltage supply 0...10 kV

13670.93

High value resistors, 10 M

07160.00

Connecting cable, 30 kV, l = 500 mm

07366.00

Power supply, regulated, 0...600 V-

13672.93

Vernier caliper, plastic

03011.00

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 25 cm

07360.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 25 cm

07360.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm

07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, yellow, l = 75 cm

07362.02

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm

07362.04

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, black, l = 75 cm

07362.05

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Electron diffraction
P2511300

Tasks:
1. To measure the diameter of the
two smallest diffraction rings at
different anode voltages.
2. To calculate the wavelength of the
electrons from the anode voltages.
3. To determine the interplanar spacing of graphite from the relationship between the radius of the
diffraction rings and the wavelength.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 213

Physical Structure of Matter

Radioactivity

5.2.01-01 Half-life and radioactive equilibrium

What you can learn about

Parent substance

Daughter substance

Rate of decay

Disintegration or decay
constant

Counting rate

Half life

Disintegration product

Principle:
The half-life of a Ba-137 m daughter
substance eluted (washed) out of a
Ca-137 isotope generator is measured directly and is also determined
from the increase in activity after
elution.

What you need:

Isotope generator Cs-137/ Ba, 370 kBq

09047.60

Pulse rate meter

13622.93

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Counter tube, type A, BNC

09025.11

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Aluminium, sheet, 1 x 20 x 200 mm, 5 pcs.

31074.00

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 250 mm

02025.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Universal clamp

37718.00

Beaker, DURAN, short form, 250 ml

36013.00

Test tube, AR-glass, d = 16 mm

37656.10

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Half-line and radioactive equilibrium
P2520101

Logarithmic plot of the counting rate of the eluted daughter substance as a

function of time.

Tasks:
1. To record the counting rate as a
function of the counter tube voltage (counter tube characteristic)
when the isotope generator activity is constant (radioactive equilibrium).

214 Laboratory Experiments Physics

2. To measure the activity of the isotope generator as a function of

time immediately after elution.
3. To measure the activity of a freshly eluted solution of Ba-137 m as
a function of time.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Physical Structure of Matter

Radioactivity

Half-life and radioactive equilibrium with Cobra3 5.2.01-11

What you can learn about

Parent substance

Daughter substance

Rate of decay

Disintegration or decay
constant

Counting rate

Half life

Disintegration product

Principle:
The half-life of a Ba-137 m daughter
substance eluted (washed) out of a
Ca-137 isotope generator is measured directly and is also determined
from the increase in activity after
elution.

What you need:

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3 Radioactivity

14506.61

Cobra3 measuring Module GM counting tube

12106.00

Base plate for radioactivity

09200.00

Counter tube holder on fixing magnet

09201.00

Plate holder on fixing magnet

09203.00

Source holder on fixing magnet

09202.00

Counter tube, type A, BNC

09025.11

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Test tube, FIOLAX, d = 12 mm

36307.10

Rubber stopper, d = 14.5/10.5 mm, without hole

39253.00

Isotope generator Cs-137/ Ba, 370 kBq

09047.60

Logarithmic plot of the counting rate of Ba-137ms decay; counting rate as a

function of time, with the regression line.

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Half-life and radioactive equilibrium
with Cobra3
P2520111

Tasks:
1. To record the counting rate as a
function of the counter tube voltage (counter tube characteristic)
when the isotope generator activity is constant (radioactive equilibrium).
2. To measure the activity of the isotope generator as a function of
time immediately after elution.
3. To measure the activity of a freshly eluted solution of Ba-137 m as
a function of time.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 215

Physical Structure of Matter

Radioactivity

5.2.03-11 Poissons distribution and Gaussian distribution of radioactive decay with Cobra3
Influence of the dead time of the counter tube
What you can learn about

Poissons distribution

Gaussian distribution

Standard deviation

Expected value of pulse rate

Different symmetries of
distributions

Dead time

Recovering time and
resolution time of a counter
tube

Principle:
1) The aim of this experiment is to
show that the number of pulses
counted during identical time intervals by a counter tube which bears a
fixed distance to a long-lived radiation emitter correspond to a Poissons distribution. A special characteristic of the Poissons distribution
can be observed in the case of a
small number of counts n < 20: The
distribution is unsymmetrical, i. e.
the maximum can be found among

What you need:

Counter tube, type A, BNC

09025.11

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Software Cobra3 Radioactivity

14506.61

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Cobra3 measuring Module GM counting tube

12106.00

Base plate for radioactivity

09200.00

Counter tube holder on fixing magnet

09201.00

Source holder on fixing magnet

09202.00

Plate holder on fixing magnet

09203.00

Americium-241 source, 370 kBq

09090.11

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Pulse rate distribution for high pulse rate (248 pulses/s) with an adapted
Gaussian curve (left window) and a Poissons curve (right window).

Poissons distribution and Gaussian distribution

of radioactive decay with Cobra3
Influence of the dead time of the counter tube P2520311

smaller numbers of pulses than the

mean value. In order to show this
unsymmetry the experiment is carried out with a short counting period
and a sufficiently large gap between
the emitter and the counter tube so
that the average number of pulses
counted becomes sufficiently small.
2) Not only the Poissons distribution,
but also the Guassian distribution
which is always symmetrical is very
suitable to approximate the pulse
distribution measured by means of a
long-lived radiation emitter and a
216 Laboratory Experiments Physics

counter tube arranged with a constant gap between each other. A

premise for this is a sufficiently high
number of pulses and a large sampling size.
The purpose of the following experiment is to confirm these facts and to
show that the statistical pulse distribution can even be be approximated
by a Guassian distribution, when
(due to the dead time of the counter
tube) counting errors occur leading
to a distribution which deviates from
the Poissons distribution.

3) If the dead time of the counter

tube is no longer small with regard
to the average time interval between
the counter tube pulses, the fluctuation of the pulses is smaller than in
the case of a Poissons distribution.
In order to demonstrate these facts
the limiting value of the mean value
(expected value) is compared to the
limiting value of the variance by
means of a sufficiently large sampling size.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Physical Structure of Matter

Radioactivity

Visualisation of radioactive particles / Diffusion cloud chamber 5.2.04-00

What you can learn about

, , -particles

 deflection

Ionising particles

Mesons

Cosmic radiation

Radioactive decay

Decay series

Particle velocity

Lorentz force

Principle:
Radioactivity is a subject in our society which has been playing an
important role throughout politics,
economy and media for many years
now. The fact that this radiation cannot be seen or felt by the human
being and that the effects of this
radiation are still not fully explored
yet, causes emotions like no other
scientific subject before.
The high-performance diffusion
cloud chamber serves for making the

What you need:

Diffusion cloud chamber PJ45, 230 V

09046.93

Isopropyl alcohol, 1000 ml

30092.70

Thorium-source

09043.41

Radioactive source, Sr-90, 74kBq

09047.53

Support base -PASS-

02005.55

Swinging arm

08256.00

Support rod, stainless steel 18/8, l = 250 mm, d = 10 mm

02031.00

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Object holder 50 mm x 50 mm

08041.00

Holder for dynamometer

03068.04

Scale for demonstration board

02153.00

Accessory set for Beta deflection

09043.52

Stand tube

02060.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Visualisation of radioactive particles /
Diffusion cloud chamber
P2520400

Experimental set-up: deflection of -particles.

tracks of cosmic and terrestrial radiation visible so that a wide range of

natural radiation types can be identified. Furthermore, the diffusion
cloud chamber offers the opportunity to carry out physical experiments with the aid of artificial radiation sources.

Tasks:
1. Determination of the amount of
background radiation
2. Visualisation of
, , -particles
and mesons
3. Visualisation of the Thorium
(Radon) decay
4. Deflection of --particles in a
magnetic field

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 217

Physical Structure of Matter

Radioactivity

5.2.20-15 Alpha-Energies of different sources with Multi Channel Analyzer

What you can learn about

Decay series

Radioactive equilibrium

Isotopic properties

Decay energy

Particle energy

Potential well model of the
atomic nucleus

Tunnel effect

Geiger-Nuttal law

Semiconductor

Barrier layer

Principle:
An Alpha-spectrometer, consisting of
a photodetector, a preamplifier, a
pulse height analyser and a recording device for registration of the
spectra is calibrated by means of an
open Alpha-emitter of known Alphaenergy (241Am). The energy spectrum
of a radium source which is in equilibrium with its decay products, is
recorded and evaluated. The AlphaEnergies found in this way are allocated to the corresponding nuclides
of the radium decay series.

What you need:

Multi-Channel-Analyzer

13726.99

Software Multi-Channel-Analyzer

14452.61

Americium-241 source, 3.7 kBq

09090.03

Radioactive Source Ra-226, 4 kBq

09041.00

Alpha- and Photodetector

09099.00

Pre-amplifier for alpha detector

09100.10

Base plate for radioactivity

09200.00

Source holder on fixing magnet

09202.00

Cable connector BNC, 75

07542.09

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Alpha-Energies of different sources
with Multi Channel Analyzer
P2522015

Alpha-spectrum of the 226Ra.

Tasks:
1. The Alpha-spectrum of the 226Ra
is recorded with Multi Channal
Analyzer
2. The calibration spectrum of the
open 241Am Alpha-emitter is
recorded at the same settings.
3. The Alpha-energies corresponding
to the individual peaks of the
Alpha-spectrum of the radium are
calculated and compared to the
values in the literature.

218 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Physical Structure of Matter

Radioactivity

Rutherford experiment

5.2.21-01/11/15

What you can learn about

Scattering

Angle of scattering

Impact parameter

Central force

Coulomb field

Coulomb forces

Rutherford atomic model

Identity of atomic number
and charge on the nucleus

Principle:
The relationship between the angle
of scattering and the rate of scattering of
-particles by gold foil is
examined with a semiconductor
detector. This detector has a detection probability of 1 for
-particles
and virtually no zero effect, so that
the number of pulses agrees exactly
with the number of
-particles striking the detector.

Set-up of experiment P2522115 with MCA

In order to obtain maximum possible

counting rates, a measurement
geometry is used which dates back

What you need:

Experiment P2522115 with MCA
Experiment P2522111 with Cobra3
Experiment P2522101 with digital counter
Multi-Channel-Analyzer
Software Multi-Channel-Analyzer
Alpha- and Photodetector*
Annular diaphragm with gold foil
Annular diaphragm with aluminium foil
U-magnet, large
Americium-241 source, 370 kBq
Container for nuclear physics experiments
Pre-amplifier for alpha detector
Pulse height analyser
Digital counter, 4 decades
Hand held measuring instrument Pressure, RS 232
Pressure sensor, 1.0...1300 hPa
Diaphragm pump, two stage, 220V
Rubber tubing/vacuum, d = 6 mm
Tubing connect.,Y-shape, d = 8-9 mm
Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels
Pinchcock, width 20 mm
Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm
Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Software Cobra3 Radioactivity
Power supply 12V/2A
PC, Windows 95 or higher
* Alternatively:
Alpha detector
Cable connector BNC, 50

13726.99
14452.61
09099.00
09103.02
09103.03
06320.00
09090.11
09103.00
09100.10
13725.93
13600.93
07136.00
07136.01
08163.93
39286.00
47518.03
11459.95
43631.20
07542.11
07542.27
07362.01
07362.04
14602.00
12150.00
14506.61
12151.99

09100.00
07542.09

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
4
1
2
2

1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
3
1

1
4
1
2
2
1
1
1
1

1
3

1
1

1
1

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Rutherford experiment
P25221 01/11/15
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Counting rate for gold as a function of

to Chadwick. It is also possible in this

case to shift the foil and source in an
axial direction (thus deviating from
Chadwicks original apparatus), so
that the angle of scattering can be
varied over a wide range.
In addition to the annular diaphragm
with gold foil, a second diaphragm
with aluminium foil is provided in
order to study the influence of the
scattering material on the scattering
rate.

(2r )2 sin4(2)

Tasks:
1. The particle rates are measured at
different angles of scattering
between about 20 and 90 . The
measurements are compared with
the particle rates calculated by
means of the Rutherford theory
for the measurement geometry
used.
2. The particle rates are measured in
the case of scattering by aluminium and gold with identical angles
of scattering in each case. The
ratio of the two particle rates is
compared with the particle rate
calculated from Rutherfords scattering equation.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 219

Physical Structure of Matter

5.2.22-01/11/15

Radioactivity

Fine structure of the -spectrum of

241

Am
What you can learn about

Energy level diagram (decay
diagram)

Transition probability

Excited nuclear states

-emission

Connection between the fine
structure of the -spectrum
and the accompanying
-spectrum

Principle:
The
-spectrum of an open 241Amemitter is measured with a semiconductor
-detector, maximum use
being made in this case of the resolution capacity of the pulse height
analyzer. Use is made for this purpose of the Zoom function, which
is an additional amplification stage
having in the effect that only that
proportion of the pulses exceeding
the threshold voltage of 5 V undergoes further processing. The pulse
peaks above this threshold are
amplified 5 times and restricted to a
maximum of 10 V.

Set-up of experiment P2522215 with MCA

What you need:

Experiment P2522215 with MCA
Experiment P2522211 with Cobra3
Experiment P2522201 with xyt recorder
Multi-Channel-Analyzer
Software Multi-Channel-Analyzer
Alpha- and Photodetector*
Americium-241 source, 3.7 kBq
Container for nuclear physics experiments
Pre-amplifier for alpha detector
Pulse height analyser
XYt recorder
Hand held measuring instrument Pressure, RS 232
Pressure sensor, 1.0...1300 hPa
Diaphragm pump, two stage, 220V
Rubber tubing/vacuum, d = 6 mm
Tubing connect.,Y-shape, d = 8-9 mm
Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels
Pinchcock, width 20 mm
Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Software Cobra3 Universal recorder
Power supply 12V/2A
PC, Windows 95 or higher
* Alternatively:
Alpha detector
Cable connector BNC, 75

13726.99
14452.61
09099.00
09090.03
09103.00
09100.10
13725.93
11416.97
07136.00
07136.01
08163.93
39286.00
47518.03
11459.95
43631.20
07542.11
07362.01
07362.04
14602.00
12150.00
14504.61
12151.99

09100.00
07542.09

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
4
2
2

1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
4
2
2
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
3
1
1
3

1
1

Measured Alpha-spectrum of Am-241.

Tasks:
1. The spectrum of an open 241Amemitter is recorded with the xytrecorder at the maximum resolution capacity of the measurement
layout, using automatic window
movement. The energy of the two
peaks preceding the principal peak
is calculated. The principal peak,
corresponding to a particle energy
of 5.486 MeV, is used for calibration purposes.

2. The resolution capacity of the

measurement layout is measured
from the half-life width of the
principal peak.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Fine structure of the -spectrum
P25222 01/11/15
of 241Am
220 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Physical Structure of Matter

Radioactivity

Study of the -energies of

226

Set-up of experiment P2522311 with Cobra3

Ra

5.2.23-01/11/15

What you can learn about

Decay series

Radioactive equilibrium

Isotopic properties

Decay energy

Particle energy

Potential well model of the
atomic nucleus

Tunnel effect

Geiger-Nuttal law

Semiconductor

Barrier layer

Principle:
An
-spectrometer, consisting of a
silicon surface barrier layer detector,
a preamplifier, a pulse height analyzer and a recording device for registration of the spectra is calibrated by
means of an open
-emitter of
known
-energy (241Am).
The energy spectrum of a radium
source which is in equilibrium with
its decay products, is recorded and

What you need:

Experiment P2522315 with MCA
Experiment P2522311 with Cobra3
Experiment P2522301 with xyt recorder
Multi-Channel-Analyzer
Software Multi-Channel-Analyzer
Alpha- and Photodetector*
Americium-241 source, 3.7 kBq
Adaptor for radioactive sources
Radioactive Source Ra-226, 4 kBq
Container for nuclear physics experiments
Pre-amplifier for alpha detector
Pulse height analyser
XYt recorder
Hand held measuring instrument Pressure, RS 232
Pressure sensor, 1.0...1300 hPa
Diaphragm pump, two stage, 220V
Rubber tubing/vacuum, d = 6 mm
Tubing connect.,Y-shape, d = 8-9 mm
Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels
Pinchcock, width 20 mm
Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Software Cobra3 Universal recorder
Power supply 12V/2A
PC, Windows 95 or higher

13726.99
14452.61
09099.00
09090.03
09043.29
09041.00
09103.00
09100.10
13725.93
11416.97
07136.00
07136.01
08163.93
39286.00
47518.03
11459.95
43631.20
07542.11
07362.01
07362.04
14602.00
12150.00
14504.61
12151.99

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
4
2
2

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
3
1
1
1
4
2
2
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
3
1

226

1
4

evaluated. The
-energies found in

this way are allocated to the corresponding nuclides of the radium
decay series.

1
1

1
1

1. The
-spectrum of the 226Ra is

recorded, the settings of the pulse
analyzer (amplification) and
recorder (x and y input sensitivity)
being selected so as to make best
possible use of the recording
width.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Study of the -energies of 226Ra
P25223 01/11/15

2. The calibration spectrum of the

open 241Am-emitter is recorded at
the same settings.

* Alternatively:
Alpha detector
Cable connector BNC, 50

09100.00
07542.09

1
1

Ra pulse rate dependence of pulse height.

Tasks:

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

3. The
-energies corresponding to

the individual peaks of the
spectrum of the radium are calculated and, on the assumption of a
constant energy loss in the source
covering, the
-active nuclides of
the radium decay series corresponding to the individual peaks
are determined on the basis of the
values in the literature.
Laboratory Experiments Physics 221

LEP_5_1

12.09.2006

22:19 Uhr

Seite 222

Physical Structure of Matter

5.2.24-01/11/15

Radioactivity

Energy loss of -particles in gases

Set-up of experiment P2522401 with xyt recorder

What you can learn about

Range

Range dispersion

Mean free path length

Mean ionization energy of
gas atoms

Mean energy loss of
-particles per collision

Differencial energy loss

Bethe formula

Electron concentration in
gases

Principle:
A study is made of the connection
between the energy E of
-particles
and the path x travelled by them in
air at standard pressure. The measurements recorded enable the differencial energy loss dE/dx to be calculated as a function of x.

What you need:

Experiment P2522415 with MCA
Experiment P2522411 with Cobra3
Experiment P2522401 with xyt recorder
Multi-Channel-Analyzer
Software Multi-Channel-Analyzer
Alpha- and Photodetector*
Americium-241 source, 3.7 kBq
Americium-241 source, 370 kBq
Container for nuclear physics experiments
Pre-amplifier for alpha detector
Pulse height analyser
XYt recorder
Hand held measuring instrument Pressure, RS 232
Pressure sensor, 1.0...1300 hPa
Diaphragm pump, two stage, 220V
Rubber tubing/vacuum, d = 6 mm
Tubing connect.,Y-shape, d = 8-9 mm
Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels
Pinchcock, width 20 mm
Glass stopcocks, 3 way, T-shaped
Fine control valve for pressure bottles
Compressed gas, helium, 12 l
Compressed gas, nitrogen, 12 l
Compressed gas, CO2, 21 g
Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Software Cobra3 Universal recorder
Power supply 12V/2A

13726.99
14452.61
09099.00
09090.03
09090.11
09103.00
09100.10
13725.93
11416.97
07136.00
07136.01
08163.93
39286.00
47518.03
11459.95
43631.20
36731.00
33499.00
41772.03
41772.04
41772.06
07542.11
07362.01
07362.04
14602.00
12150.00
14504.61
12151.99

* Alternatively:
Alpha detector
Cable connector BNC, 75

09100.00
07542.09

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
2
2

1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
2
2
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3

1
1

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Energy loss of -particles in gases
P25224 01/11/15
222 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Influence of the type of gas on the energy loss of
-particles.

Tasks:
1. The spectrum of a covered 241Am
source is measured at a fixed distance s as a function of the pressure p. The distance s is selected
in such a way as to correspond to
the maximum range at the highest
pressure measurable with the
manometer used. The energy corresponding to the central points of
the individual spectra are determined (after calibration of the
measurement layout with an open
241
Am-emitter, see 3.) and plotted
as a function of the distance x
converted to a 1013 hPa basis.
Using this function, the differential energy loss ( dE/dx) is then
calculated as a function of x and
again plotted on the graph.

2. The spectrum of the source used

in 1. is measured initially under
the same geometric conditions
under vacuum and subsequently
with the vessel filled with helium,
nitrogen or carbon dioxide, in
each case under identical pressures. The different energy loss
values are compared with the
electron concentration in the particluar gas.
3. The mean energy with which the

-particles leave the covered
americium source is determined
by calibration against the open
americium emitter (E = 5.485
MeV). (This value is required for
the evaluation in 1.)

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Physical Structure of Matter

Radioactivity

Electron absorption 5.2.31-00

What you can learn about

Density

Counter tube

Radioactive decay

Attenuation coefficient

Mass coverage

Principle:
The attenuation of an electron particle stream passing through a material layer depends both on the thickness of the layer and on the mass
coverage, resp. the mass per unit
area. It will be shown that the particle flux consisting of electrons of a
particular energy distribution decreases with the mass per unit area.
As electron source, a radioactive
sample of Sr90 is used.

What you need:

Radioactive source, Sr-90, 74kBq

09047.53

Geiger-Mller Counter

13606.99

Counter tube, type A, BNC

09025.11

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Stopwatch, digital, 1/100 s

03071.01

Base plate for radioactivity

09200.00

Supports for base 09200.00, 2 pcs.

09200.01

Counter tube holder on fixing magnet

09201.00

Plate holder on fixing magnet

09203.00

Source holder on fixing magnet

09202.00

Vernier calipers, stainless steel

03010.00

Absorption plates for beta-rays

09024.00

Cover glasses, 40 x 22 mm, 50 pcs.

64688.00

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Electron absorption
P2523100

Counting rate I as a function of absorber thickness.

Tasks:
1. The
-counting rates are measured as a function of the absorber
thickness using different absorbing materials such as aluminium
(AL), glass (GL), hard paper (HP),
and typing paper (TP).
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

2. The attenuation coefficients are

evaluated for the four absorbing
materials and plotted as a function of the density.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 223

Physical Structure of Matter

Radioactivity

5.2.32-00
-spectroscopy
What you can learn about


-decay


+-decay

Electron capture

Neutrino

Positron

Decay diagram

Decay energy

Resting energy

Relativistic Lorentz equation

Principle:
The radiation of
-unstable atomic
nuclei is selected on the basis of its
pulses in a magnetic transverse field,
using a diaphragm system. The relationship between coil current and
particle energy is determined for calibration of the spectrometer and the
decay energy of the
-transition is
obtained in each case from the

-spectra.

What you need:

Beta-spectroscope

09104.00

Iron core, solid, 25 mm long

06490.01

Iron core, rod shaped, laminated

06500.00

Iron core, U-shaped, laminated

06501.00

Clamping device

06506.00

Coil, 600 turns

06514.01

Radioactive source, Na-22, 74kBq

09047.52

Radioactive source, Sr-90, 74kBq

09047.53

Counter tube, type A, BNC

09025.11

Geiger-Mller Counter

13606.99

Power supply, universal

13500.93

Digital multimeter 2010

07128.00

Teslameter, digital

13610.93

Hall probe, tangential, with protective cap

13610.02

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 50 cm

07361.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 50 cm

07361.04

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

-spectroscopy
P2523200

-spectrum of 90Sr.

Tasks:
1. Energy calibration of the magnetic spectrometer.
2. Measurement of the
-spectra of
90
Sr and 22Na.
3. Determination of the decay energy
of the two isotopes.

224 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Physical Structure of Matter

Radioactivity

Law of distance and absorption of gamma or beta rays

5.2.41-01/11

What you can learn about

Radioactive radiation

Beta-decay

Conservation of parity

Antineutrino

Gamma quanta

Half-value thickness

Absorption coefficient

Term diagram

Pair formation

Compton effect

Photoelectric effect

Conservation of angular
momentum

Forbidden transition

Weak interaction

Dead time

Principle:
The inverse square law of distance is
demonstrated with the gamma radiation from a 60Co preparation, the
half-value thickness and absorption

Set-up of experiment P2524111 with Cobra3

What you need:

cm

Experiment P2524111 with Cobra3

Experiment P2524101 with GM Counter
Radioactive sources, set

09047.50

Absorption plates for beta-rays

09024.00

Base plate for radioactivity

09200.00

Counter tube holder on fixing magnet

09201.00

Source holder on fixing magnet

09202.00

Plate holder on fixing magnet

09204.00

Counter tube, type A, BNC

09025.11

Screened cable, BNC, l = 300 mm

07542.10

Vernier caliper, plastic

03011.00

Geiger-Mueller-Counter

13606.99

Absorption material, lead

09029.01

Absorption material, iron

09029.02

Absorption material, aluminium

09029.03

Absorption material, Plexiglas

09029.04

Absorption material, concrete

09029.05

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Data cable, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Software Cobra3 Radioactivity

14506.61

Counter tube module

1210 6.00

PC, Windows 95 or higher

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Law of distance and absorption of gamma
or beta rays
P25241 01/11

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen


g cm

Attenuation coefficient  of different materials as a function of the material density  (from left to right: Plexiglas, concrete, aluminium, iron, lead).

coefficient of various materials

determined with the narrow beam
system and the corresponding mass
attenuation coefficient calculated.

Tasks:
1. To measure the impulse counting
rate as a function of the distance
between the source and the counter tube.
2. To determine the half-value thickness d1/2 and the absorption coefficient  of a number of materials
by measuring the impulse count-

ing rate as a function of the thickness of the irradiated material.

Lead, iron, aluminium, concrete
and Plexiglas are used as absorbers.
3. To calculate the mass attenuation
coefficient from the measured
values.

Laboratory Experiments Physics 225

Physical Structure of Matter

5.2.42-01/11/15

Radioactivity

Energy Dependence of the -absorption Coefficient

Set-up of experiment P2524215 with MCA

What you can learn about

Compton scattering

Photo effect

Pair production

Absorption coefficient

Radioactive decay

-spectroscopy

Principle:
The intensity of -radiation decreases when it passes through solid matter. The attenuation can be the result
of Compton scattering, the photo
effect or the pair production. An
absorption coefficient can be attributed to each of the three phenomena. These absorption coefficients, as
well as the total absorption, are
highly energy-dependent. The energy
dependence of the total absorption
coefficient for aluminium in the
range below 1.3 MeV is verified.

What you need:

Experiment P2524215 with MCA
Experiment P2524211 with Cobra3
Experiment P2524201 with xyt recorder
Multi-Channel-Analyzer
Software for Multi-Channel-Analyzer
Americium-241 source, 370 kBq
Radioactive Source Cs-137, 37kBq
Gamma detector
Operating unit for gamma detector
High voltage connecting cable
Pulse height analyser
Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels
xyt recorder
Base plate for radioactivity
Plate holder on fixing magnet
Lab jack, 160 x 130 mm
Vernier calipers, stainless steel
Source holder on fixing magnet
Absorption material, aluminium
Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair
Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Power supply 12V/2A
Software Cobra3 Universal recorder
Software Cobra3 Radioactivity
PC, Windows 95 or higher

13726.99
14452.61
09090.11
09096.01
09101.00
09101.93
09101.10
13725.93
11459.95
11416.97
09200.00
09203.00
02074.00
03010.00
09202.00
09029.03
07542.27
07542.11
07362.01
07362.04
14602.00
12150.00
12151.99
14504.61
14506.61

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
2
2

1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Energy Dependence of the -absorption
Coefficient
25242 01/11/15
226 Laboratory Experiments Physics

Total gamma-absorption coefficient as a function of the energy.

Tasks:
1. For each of the emitting isotopes
Na22, Cs137 and Am241 the -spectrum is traced and a treshold
energy, Ethres, just below the
photo-peak in the high energy
range determined.
2. Using the scintillation counter in
conjunction with the pulse height
analyser as a monochromator, the
-intensity is measured as a function of the thickness of different
aluminium layers. The three emitting isotopes are used successively as the source, assuming that
the energy of the emitted -radiation is known.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Physical Structure of Matter

Radioactivity

Compton effect
Set-up of experiment P2524411 with Cobra3

5.2.44-01/11/15

What you can learn about

Corpuscle

Scattering

Compton wavelength

-quanta

De Broglie wavelength

Klein-Nishina formula

Principle:
The energy of scattered -radiation
is measured as a function of the
angle of scatter. The Compton wavelength is determined from the measured values.

What you need:

Experiment P2524415 with MCA
Experiment P2524411 with Cobra3
Experiment P2524401 with xyt recorder
Multi-Channel-Analyzer
Software for Multi-Channel-Analyzer
Radioactive source, Na-22, 74kBq
Americium-241 source, 370 kBq
Radioactive Source Cs-137, 37kBq
Radioactive source Cs-137,18.5 MBq
Gamma detector
Operating unit for gamma detector
High voltage connecting cable
Pulse height analyser
Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels
xyt recorder
Shielding cylinder for gamma-detector
Rod, iron, d = 25 mm, l = 200 mm
Lead block, 200 x 100 x 50 mm
Lead brick with hole
Source holder on fixing magnet
Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair
Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm
Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm
Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole
Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT
Power supply 12V/2A
Software Cobra3 Universal recorder
PC, Windows 95 or higher

13726.99
14452.61
09047.52
09090.11
09096.01
09096.20
09101.00
09101.93
09101.10
13725.93
11459.95
11416.97
09101.11
09101.13
09029.11
09021.00
09202.00
07542.27
07542.11
07362.01
07362.04
14602.00
12150.00
12151.99
14504.61

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Energy of known peaks as a function of the pulse height.

1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

Tasks:
1. Calibrate the measuring set-up
with the aid of a Cs-137 calibrating source (37 kBq), an Am-241
source (370 kBq) and a Na-22
source (74 kBq).
2. Measure the energy of the Cs-137
661.6 keV peaks scattered at different angles and calculate the
Compton wavelength from the
readings taken.

Complete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Compton effect
P25244 01/11/15
PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Laboratory Experiments Physics 227

Physical Structure of Matter

5.2.45-01/11/15

Radioactivity

Internal conversion in

137m

Ba

Set-up of experiment P2524501 with xyt recorder

What you can learn about

-radiation

Nuclear transitions

Transition probability

Duration

Metastable states

Isotopic spin quantum
numbers

Rules governing selection

Multipole radiation

Isomeric nuclei

Photonuclear reaction

Conversion electron

Characteristic X-ray radiation

Scintillation detectors

Principle:
The radiation emitted during the
decay of the 137Cs isotope is measured with a scintillation detector
and the energy spectrum determined
with a pulse height analyzer. The
spectrum contains fractions due to a

What you need:

Experiment P2524515 with MCA
Experiment P2524511 with Cobra3
Experiment P2524501 with xyt recorder
Multi-Channel-Analyzer

13726.99

Software Multi-Channel-Analyzer

14452.61

Radioactive Source Cs-137, 37kBq

09096.01

Gamma detector

09101.00

Operating unit for gamma detector

09101.93

High voltage connecting cable

09101.10

Pulse height analyser

13725.93

Oscilloscope 30 MHz, 2 channels

11459.95

XYt recorder

11416.97

Support rod -PASS-, square, l = 400 mm

02026.55

Right angle clamp -PASS-

02040.55

Tripod base -PASS-

02002.55

Adapter BNC socket/4 mm plug pair

07542.27

Screened cable, BNC, l = 750 mm

07542.11

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, red, l = 75 cm 07362.01

Connecting cable, 4 mm plug, 32 A, blue, l = 75 cm 07362.04

Data cable 2 x SUB-D, plug/socket, 9 pole

14602.00

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT

12150.00

Power supply 12V/2A

12151.99

Software Cobra3 Universal recorder

14504.61

-spectrum of 137Cs. F_x corresponds to characteristic X-ray radiation caused

by internal conversion in Ba-137. F_y1 and F_y2 corresponds to the transition radiation.

PC, Windows 95 or higher

-transition and fractions originating from a characteristic X-ray radiation. The areas of the fractions in
question are determined and the
conversion factor obtained from
them.

Tasks:
1. Measurement of the g-spectrum
of 137Cs using a scintillation detector.
2. Determination of the conversion
factor of the 137mBa excited nucleus.

PComplete Equipment Set, Manual on CD-ROM included

Internal conversion in 137mBa
P25245 01/11/15

228 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Vorspann

13.09.2006

7:32 Uhr

Seite 261

Index

Vorspann

13.09.2006

7:32 Uhr

Seite 262

Index

-, -, -particles

217

-energies of 226Ra

221

Anode

205

Bohr magneton

Anomalous Hall effect

234

Bohrs atomic model 210, 246, 248

Antineutrino

225

Boiling point

Aperiodic case

43, 44

Apparent force

31, 32

210, 211

134, 135, 137

Boiling point elevation

139

Bounding surface

56

-particles in gases

222

Atomic beam

211

Boyle and Mariottes law 126, 147

-spectrum of 241Am

220

Atomic energy level scheme

248

Boyle temperature

Absorption

143, 197, 205, 237

238, 239, 241, 242, 252

Absorption coefficient of
ultrasonic waves

71

Absorption coefficient
Absorption edges

249, 250, 251

Atomic model according

to Bohr

237, 238, 239

241, 242, 247

Absorption factor

248
257, 258

Absorption inverse
square law

253

Absorption of gamma
or beta rays

225

Absorption of X-rays

247

Atomic scattering factor

256, 257
258

Atomic spectra

209

Attenuation coefficient

223

183, 184, 190

183, 184

Acceleration

19, 20

Acceleration due to gravity

19, 24

Acceptors

159, 160

Acoustic Doppler effect

61

Acoustic resonant circuit

65

Acoustic waves

66

Adhesion

55

Adiabatic coefficient of gases

132

Adsorption

206

Advanced Optics

121

Aerofoil

58

Air track

19, 20, 21, 22

Airy disk, Airy ring

99

Amontons law

126, 147

Amplitude holograms

112

Amplitude

36, 64

Analyzer

106, 109

Angle of incidence

58

Angle of scattering

219

Angular acceleration

28, 29, 30
33, 40, 41

Angular frequency
Angular momentum

43, 44
27, 30, 34
35, 207, 209

Angular restoring force

45, 46

Angular restoring moment

48

Angular restoring torque

47

Angular velocity 28, 29, 30, 31, 32

33, 40, 41, 47, 52

262 Laboratory Experiments Physics

237, 238, 239

240, 243, 244
245, 248, 251, 252

Bragg reflection

213

Bragg scattering

241, 242, 246

247, 249, 250
256, 257, 258

Bravais lattice

251, 256, 257, 258

155, 186

Average velocity

130

Avogadros law

147

Brewster angle

113, 115

162

Brewsters law

108, 109

Axis of rotation

45, 46, 48

-deflection

217

-decay, rays

224, 225

-spectroscopy

224

Bremsstrahlung

237, 238, 239

241, 242, 245
247, 254, 255

Broadening of lines due to

Doppler effect and pressure
broadening

167, 170, 184

185, 188, 190

74, 99, 102

Ballistic Pendulum

27

Capacitance of a plate
capacitor

171

Ballistics

26

Capacitance of metal spheres

167

208

Band gap

235, 236

Band-pass filter

192

Band spacing
Band theory

231, 232
231, 232, 233
235, 236

Band-width

185, 192

Barometric height formula

Barrier layer
Basic constants
Beat

Capacitor

57
128, 221
13
40, 41

164, 165, 166

167, 185, 188

Capacitor in the AC circuit

184

Carbon film resistor

155

Cardanic gyroscope

35

Cavendish balance

25

Cavity resonator

65

Central force

219

74, 99

31, 32

111

Birefringence

115

Black body radiation

141

Blood vessel model

254

Bode diagram

188

234

Charging

165, 166

Charging capacitor

186

Charles (Amontons) law

126

Chemical potential

139, 140

Chladni figures

62
153, 188
30

Circularly and elliptically

polarised light

106

Circularly and elliptically

polarized waves

195
58

Clausius-Clapeyron
equation

137, 138

Cloud Chamber

217

CO2-laser

113

Cobra3

260

Coefficient of cubic
compressibility

126

Coefficient of thermal
expansion

126

Coefficient of thermal tension 126

202

31, 32, 52

Birefraction

Charge carriers

Cathode rays

Centripetal force

173, 174

155

Coherence

Centrifugal force

Biot-Savarts law

162, 167

Charge carrier generation

205

58

208, 230, 246

Charge

Cathode

Bernoulli equation

Binding energy

228, 230, 240

243, 244, 245
246, 249

Coercive field strength

61

222

Characteristic
X-ray radiation

137

Beat frequency

Bethe formula

237, 238
239, 240
256, 257, 258

Carnot cycle

Centre of gravity

Bessel function

238

Characteristic X-rays

Circulation

Babinets theorem

Balmer series

239

Characteristic X-rays of
molybdenum

Circular motion

C
Capacitance

Characteristic X-rays of iron

Circuit
95

Characteristic curves
Characteristic curves of
semiconductors
Characteristic frequency
Characteristic impedance

45, 46

160
160
40, 41
43, 44

178

93, 95, 99
100, 101, 102, 112

Coherence conditions

95

Coherence length for

non punctual light sources

95

Coherence time

95

Coherent light

91

Coil

180, 181, 185, 188

Coil in the AC circuit

183

Collector equations

143

Collision of second type

115

Compressibility

69

Compressor
Compton effect

192

Characteristic radiation
237, 238
239, 241, 242
247, 248, 254, 255

246

Characteristic X-rays of copper 237

131

Avalanche effect

Avogadros number

AC impedance

Bragg equation

208

225, 226

Absorption edges of X-rays

AC circuit

Atomic form factor

Characteristic X-ray lines

of different anode materials

Compton scattering

144
225, 227, 229
242, 252
226, 229
247

Compton scattering of X-rays

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

252

Vorspann

13.09.2006

7:32 Uhr

Seite 263

Index
Compton wavelength

227, 252

Concave lens
Concentration ratio

139, 140

Condensation
Conduction band

Crystal lattices

88

144
159, 160, 231
232, 233, 235, 236

Conduction of heat
Conductivity

143
151, 152, 163
231, 232

Conductivity of metals
Conductor

142
153, 163

Conductor (Magnetic field)

177

Connection between the fine

structure of the -spectrum
and the accompanying
-spectrum

220

Conservation of angular
momentum

225

Conservation of energy

20, 21
22, 33

250, 251
256, 257, 258

Crystal structures
237, 238, 239
245, 249, 250, 251
Crystal structures cubic

250

Crystal structures hexagonal

250

Crystal systems

250, 251
256, 257, 258

Cycle

144

D
Damped oscillation

182

Damped/undamped
free oscillation

43, 44
185

Constructive and destructive

interference

De Broglie equation

213

195

De Broglie relationship

97

151, 152

De Broglie wavelength

88

98

208

Efficiency

Diffraction of microwaves

194

Efficiency rating

Diffraction index

179

Elastic after-effect

17

Diffraction spectrometer

207

Elastic collision

21

97

Elastic hysteresis

17

Diffraction uncertainty

143, 146, 157, 159

158

159

Electric field constant

87

Debye-Scherrer patterns

256

186

Electric field strenght

168, 169

Decay constant

214, 215

Coulomb forces

219

Decay diagram

224

Coulomb potential

170

Decay energy

128, 221, 224

Decay series

128, 217, 221

Decomposition of force

38, 39

Decomposition voltage

161

Defect electrons

234

Deformation
Degree of dissociation
Degree of freedom

15
139, 140
128

192

Demonstration experiments 83, 84

122, 147, 198

55, 131

Demonstration track 19, 20, 21, 22

Cryoscopic constants

140

Density

Cryoscopy

140

Density of liquids

Crystal classes

251

Detection probability

Diode and Zener diode

Diode laser

170, 219

Critical point

Edge diffraction

Diffraction image
of a diffraction grating

Diffusion potential

257, 258

Critical or optimum coupling

139

213

Debye-Waller factor

40, 41

Ebullioscopic constants

Debye-Scherrer method

217

43, 44

172

217

Cosmic radiation

Creeping

Earths magnetic field

Diffusion cloud chamber

120

Coupled Pendula

202

Debye-Scherrer measurements 258

Debye-Sears-effect

192

e/m

142

227

Coupled oscillating circuits

Diffusion

Corpuscle

14

58

134, 135

257

Couple

54

Dynamic pressure

Debye temperature

Debye-Scherrer reflexes

214, 215, 208

Dynamic and kinematic

viscosity

Diffractometric measurements 257

80

Counting rate

36

216, 225

Cornus spiral

216, 223

228

Duration of oscillation

Dead time

250

Counter tube

Duration

Electric charge

Debye-Scherrer powder
method

162

134, 135

227

14

Coulometry

194

Dulong Petits law

Diffractometric Debye-Scherrer
patterns
256

Coplanar forces

168, 169

66, 72, 73, 74, 75

80, 97, 98, 99, 100
101, 102, 112, 194
195, 241, 242

245

Elastic loss

158

Coulombs law

Diffraction

Duane-Hunt
displacement law

Diffractometric Debye-Scherrer
measurements
257, 258

Cooling capacity

Coulomb field

167

Diffraction at the slit

214, 215, 208

Convex lens

Dielectrics

216

13

Daughter substance

146

171

Different symmetries
of distributions

Curvature

225

Conversion of heat

Dielectric polarisation

179

Conservation of parity

228

168, 169
171

Differentiating network

49

Conversion electron

Dielectric displacement

177

Damping of waves

143, 158

171

Current density

Conservation of momentum 21, 22

Convection

Dielectric constant

222

43, 44

254

13

Differencial energy loss

Damping constant

Contrast medium

Diameter

156

252

Contact resistance

112

Current balance

Damping

Conservation of energy
and momentum

Developing of film

21, 22

Elasticity

16
170

Electric constant

168, 171

Electric discharge

113

Electric field

164, 167
168, 170, 201

116, 118

Electric flow

170

Direct energy conversion

157

Electric flux

168

Directional characteristic
pattern

196

Electric theory of light

109

Directional quantization

211

Electrical conductivity

142

Directivity

196

Electrical eddy field

181

Electrical fields

164

Discharging

165, 166

Disintegration product

214, 215

Dispersion

89

Dissipation factor

192

Donors
Doppler effect

159, 160
61, 81, 114

Doppler shift of frequency

61, 81

Electrode polarisation
Electrolysis

161, 163
161, 162, 163

Electromagnetic field
interaction

110

Electromagnetic theory
of light

108

Electromagnetism

110

Dosimeter

253

Electromotive force (e.m.f.)

154

Double refraction

106

Electron absorption

223

Electron capture

224

Double slit

207

Electron charge

201, 202

Drag

58

Electron collision

203, 204

69, 223

Drag coefficient

58

51

Droplet method

201

229

Du Nouy method

55

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Doublets

72, 101

Electron concentration
in gases

222

Electron diffraction

213

Laboratory Experiments Physics 263

Vorspann

13.09.2006

7:32 Uhr

Seite 264

Index
Electron in crossed fields

202

Electron mass

202

Electron oscillation

110

Electron spin

210, 211

Free path

Fabry Perot Etalon

Electron spin resonance

212

Fabry-Perot interferometer

Electrons

234

Falling ball viscometer

Electro-optical modulator

111

Electrostatic induction

167, 168,
169

Electrostatic potential

168, 169
170

Elementary charge

201

Energy-band diagram

159, 160

Free, damped, forced and

torsional oscillations

25

115

Freezing point depression

140

210

Frequency

54

Faraday effect

110

Faradays contant

162

Faradays law

155

49, 63, 64
67, 68, 69, 87

Frequency doubling
Fresnel diffraction

161, 162

117
72, 73, 74, 75
80, 93, 95, 99
100, 101, 102

Fresnel biprism

Fermi characteristic
energy level

159

Fresnel integrals

Ferromagnetic hysteresis

178

Fresnel lenses

75
90

Energy ceiling

143

Ferromagnetic material

179

Fresnel mirror

Energy dose

253

Fibre optics

118

Fresnels equations

Field intensity

170

Fresnels zone construction

Field strength

177

Energy level diagram

(decay diagram)
Energy levels

220

207, 208, 209, 237

238, 239, 240, 241
242, 243, 244, 245
246, 249

Energy loss

222

Energy of rotation

33

Energy of translation

33

Energy quantum

203, 204, 212

Energy term symbols

243, 244

Etvs equation

55

Equation of adiabatic change

of slate
Equation of state

132

57, 126, 131

Equation of state for

ideal gases

128, 129

Equilibrium

14, 52

Equilibrium spacing

125

Equipotential lines

164

Equivalent dose and ion dose

and their rates

90

Filter
Fine structure

120, 179, 188

207, 220, 243, 244

First and second law

of thermodynamics
First law of
thermodynamics

146
128, 129, 136

Flammersfeld oscillator

132

Flat coils

174

Fluidity

54

Focal length

88

Focal point

195

Forbidden band

235, 236

Forbidden transition

207, 209
225

Forbidden zone

231, 232, 233

Force

19

Forced cooling

158

Frictional resistance

108
74, 75
93, 99
80, 194
58

Frustrated total reflection

197

Full-wave rectifier

186

-absorption
-emission

226, 232
220

-quanta

225, 227

-radiation

228, 229

 rays

225

-spectrometry

230

-spectroscopy

226

g-factor
G-modulus

211, 212
47

Galvanic elements

161

Gas

130

253

Equivalent of heat

136

Fourier analysis

ESR

212

Fourier optics

119, 120

Gas constant

Fourier transform

119, 120

Gas discharge tube

115

Gas laws

146

Gaussian beam

118

Gaussian distribution

216

Gaussian rule

170

Gay-Lussac theory

133

51

44

Exchange energy

207, 209

Four-point measurement

Excitation energy

203, 204
207, 209

Four-wire method of
measurement

Excited nuclear states

220

Exitation of molecular
vibration

113

Expected value of pulse rate

Exponential function
Extension and compression
External photoelectric
effect

216

165, 166

203

Franck-Hertz experiment
with Ne-tube

204

Fraunhofer diffraction

72, 73, 74
75, 80, 95, 98
99, 100, 101, 102
119, 120, 194

Free and fixed end

Extrinsic conduction 233, 235, 236

Free charges

Extrinsic conductivity

Free fall

231, 232

264 Laboratory Experiments Physics

151

Franck-Hertz experiment
with Hg-tube

18
205, 206

142

49
171
23, 24

82

Gradient

170

Graetz rectifier

186

Graphite structure

213

Grating spectroscope

89

Gravitational acceleration

23

Gravitational constant

25

Gravitational force

39

Gravity pendulum

40, 41

Greenhouse effect

143

Grids

100

Group velocity

50

Grneisen equation
Gyroscope

57

H
H2O anomaly
Half life

51
165, 166, 214, 215

126, 147

Geiger-Nuttal law

128, 221

General equation
of state for ideal gases

126, 162

Germanium

235, 236

Gibbs-Helmholtz
equation
Glass jacket system

139, 140
140

214, 215

Half-shade principle

107

Half-value thickness

225, 247

Half-wave rectifier
Hall coefficient
Hall effect

186
231, 232

110, 173, 174, 231

232, 233, 234

Hall mobility

234

Harmonic oscillation 36, 38, 39, 42

Harmonic sound intervals

59

Harmonic wave

50

Heat capacity of gases

128, 129

Heat capacity of metals

134, 135

Heat conductivity

145, 158

Heat insulation
Heat of vaporization
Heat pipe

Gay-Lussacs law

125
33, 34, 35

Half-life and
radioactive equilibrium

Forced oscillation

Evaporation

43, 44

Fresnel zones

80, 98

Grade resistance

Heat pump

145
137, 138
158
144, 158

Heat radiation

143

Heat transfer

145

Heat transition

145

Heat transport

142

Heating capacity

158

Heisenbergs uncertainty
principle

97

Helium Neon Laser

115

Helmholtz arrangement

174

Helmholtz coils

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

172, 175

Vorspann

13.09.2006

7:32 Uhr

Seite 265

Index
Helmholtz resonators

65

Henrys law

139

High- and low-pass filters

114

High-pass filter

Interface-SystemCobra3
Interference

64, 66, 72, 73, 74, 75

76, 77, 79, 80, 90, 92
93, 94, 95, 96, 99, 100
101,102, 112, 114, 179, 193
237, 238, 239, 242, 245

114, 179, 188

Holograms

260

112
Interference in thin films

Hookes law

42

210

196

Interference of acoustic waves

Hothouse effect

145

Interference of equal inclination 92

72, 73, 74, 75

76, 80, 99, 100
101, 102, 119, 120, 194

Huygens-Fresnel principle
Hydrogen bond
Hysteresis

193

Interference of thin layers

92

219

172
119, 120
113, 116, 117
58
181
183, 185, 188
182

170, 173, 176

177, 178, 180, 181

228
53
154, 159, 186

Intrinsic conduction

Inside diameter thickness

13

Instantaneous velocity

33
179
240
98

Interaction potential

131

Interaction with material

229

Interface

55

114

Laser physics

121

Lattice constant

Isochoric and isothermal

changes
Isochors and adiabatic
changes of slate

257
258

Loudness

64

Loss resistance

185

Low-pass filter

179, 188

Low resistance

151

133

Lattice vibration

134, 135

Laue method
Law of absorption

251
71, 247
254, 255

133
217

Law of collision

21, 22

253

Law of distance

169, 196

128, 129
146
128, 129
172

Isogenic lines

172

Isomeric nuclei

228

Isotherms

128, 129
128, 221

J
Joule effect

158

Joule-Thomson effect

133

K
K doublet splitting
of molybdenum X-rays

Lorentz-polarization factor

133

Isoclinic lines

K doublet splitting
of iron X-rays

142

Luminous intensity

113, 115, 116, 117

Isobars

Lorenz number

125

Inverse Joule-Thomson effect

Ionizing energy

156, 202, 217

231, 232, 233

Lattice potential

Intrinsic energy

Inversion

Lorentz force

103, 104, 105

231, 232

Intrinsic conductivity

237, 238
239, 245

60, 63, 68
70, 71, 72, 73
74, 75, 76, 77
78, 79, 80, 81

Luminous flux

Isotopic spin quantum numbers 228

27

Laser Doppler anemometry

Longitudinal waves

213

191

Inelastic collision

99, 100, 101, 102

114, 115, 116, 117, 118

Lattice planes

Induction impulse

189

Laser

43, 44

103, 104, 105

Isotopic properties

Intensity

Logarithmic decrement

Luminance

170

Intensity of characteristic
X-rays

63

233, 235
236

Induction constant

Integrating network

Kundts tube

134, 135

Ionizing particles

Inductive and capacitive

reactance

227

Internal energy

235, 236

Induction

253

178

Impurity depletion

Inductance of solenoids

Local ion dose rate

212

189, 190

Inductance

180

Land factor

Impedance

Induced voltage

Loaded transformer

153, 154, 183

184, 188, 189

79, 94, 95, 96, 179

Inversion temperature

Induced resistance

77

Kirchhoffs laws

54

97

Interferometer

219

Induced emission

Lloyd mirror

Kirchhoffs diffraction formula

51

168, 170

Index of refraction

130

Kinetic theory of gases

58

103, 104, 105

Inclinometer

115

Laminar flow

66, 93

126, 131

Impact parameter

Littrow prism

105

Internal resistance

Image charge

82

Lamberts law

I
Illuminance

Kinetic energy

Interference of ultrasonic waves 77

Internal friction

Identity of atomic number

and charge on the nucleus

66

Interference of microwaves

Internal conversion
in 144mBa

Ideal gas

Liquid

Klein-Nishina formula

Interference of
electromagnetic waves

Horn antenna

Huygens principle

111

91

15, 16, 17, 18

Hookes law oscillations

Kerr effect

Law of inductance

182

Law of induction

191

Law of gravitation

25

Law of lenses

88

Law of refraction
Laws of falling bodies

13

Lenses

119, 120

Lenzs law

14

Lift and drag

58

Light intensity

105

Light quantity

105

Light velocity

96

Limit of elasticity

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Lyman-, Paschen-, Brackettand Pfund-Series

208

M
Magnet Board Mechanics 1

83

Magnet Board Mechanics 2

84

Magnet Board Optics

122

Magnetic Board Electricity

198

Magnetic Board Heat

147

Magnetic field

172, 173, 174

175, 176, 177

Magnetic field constant

Magnetic field of coils

87
178, 181

182

Lever

17, 18, 42

Linearity

195

Linear expansion

125

Linear motion due to

constant acceleration

243

23, 24

Length

Linear motion

244

108

103, 104

20, 21, 22, 82

23, 24

Linear relationship between

the propagation time of sound
and its respective path

60

Magnetic field of paired coils

174

Magnetic field of single coils

173

Magnetic field strength

178

Magnetic flow density

172

Magnetic flux

175, 176, 177

180, 181, 191

Magnetic flux, coil

178

Magnetic flux density

173

Magnetic inclination and

declination

172

Magnetic induction

181

Magnetic induction (formerly

magnetic-flux density)

156

Magnetic moment

175, 211

Laboratory Experiments Physics 265

Vorspann

13.09.2006

7:32 Uhr

Seite 266

Index
Magnetic resistance

231, 232
233

Magnetostriction
Magnification
Malus law
Mass absorption
coefficient

158

Molecular vibration

113

Numerical aperture

118

PEM fuel cell

161

Molecule radius

131

Nutation

Molecules

130

Maxwells equations 171, 174, 176

177, 181, 183
184, 191
33
130, 211

Mean energy loss of

-particles per collision

222

Mean free path length

222
222

Mean lifetime of a
metastable state

116

Measurement accuracy

97

Measurement of projectile
velocities

27

Mechanical equivalent of heat 136

Mechanical hysteresis

158

Peltier heat pump

89

Mean ionization energy

of gas atoms

Peltier effect

228

33

Maxwellian velocity
distribution

155

Nuclear transitions

155

Maxwells wheel

NTC

16

Mechanical work

136

Medical

254

Moment
Moment of inertia

Medical application of X-rays

14, 28, 29, 30

27, 28, 29, 30
33, 34, 35, 37
38, 45, 46, 47, 48

Moment of inertia of
2 point masses

48

Moment of inertia of a bar

28, 48

Moment of inertia of a
cylinder

48

Moment of inertia of a
disc

28, 48

Moment of inertia of a
mass point
Moment of inertia of a sphere

Optical path difference

Momentum

82

Optical pumping

116, 117

Monochromatization
241, 242
of X-rays
256, 257, 258

Optical resonator

113, 117

Monomode and multimode

fibre

Order of diffraction

Moseleys law

230, 246, 248

Motion involving uniform

acceleration
Motion track

118

26

19, 20, 21, 22

Moving charges

156

Multiple slit

73, 100

Metals (Hall effect)

234

201

Mixture temperature

134, 135

Mobility

231, 232

Model kinetic energy

Modulation

160

25

155

Millikan experiment

Operating point

88

Metallic film resistor

249, 250, 251

256, 257, 258

207

Optical instruments

217

Miller indices

One-electron spectra

Moment of inertia of spheres

and rods

Mesons

193, 194
195, 196, 197

189

111

Multipole radiation

Microwaves

Ohmic resistance

Optical anisotropy

51

88

88
151, 152, 154, 163

48

Melting

Microscope

Object distance

107

257, 258

Michelson interferometer 79, 94, 95

96, 179, 193

112

Optical activity

Multiplicity factor

92

Object beam

28

254

Mica plate

O
Ohms law

228

Optical rotatory power

Ordinary and
extraordinary ray

107

237, 238, 239

106

Orthohelium

207, 209

Oscillating circuits

192

Oscillation period
Oscillations

92

38, 39
38, 39, 42, 43, 44

Oscillatory circuit

182

233

Natural frequency

49

Natural vibrations

59, 62, 63

Nd-YAG laser

117

Neutrino

224

Newtons law

30, 82

Newtons 2nd law

19, 20

Newtons ring apparatus

91

Newtons rings

91

38, 39
37, 37, 38, 39
40, 41, 43, 44

Period

36

Periodic motion

49

Phase

87, 90, 94, 96, 179

Phase and group velocity

68, 78

Phase center

196

Phase displacement

183, 184
185, 188

Phase holograms

112

Phase relationship

91

Phase shift

64, 190

Phase velocity

49, 50, 197

Phasor diagram

190

Photo-conductive effect

159

Photo effect

226

Photoelectric effect

205, 206, 225

229, 247, 230

Photometric law

103, 104

Photon energy

205, 206

Photonuclear cross-section

229

Photonuclear reaction

228

Physical pendulum

37, 38, 39

Piezoelectric effect

68, 69

Piezoelectric ultrasonic
transducer

69

Piezoelectric ultrasonics
transformer

68

Pin hole

74

Pin hole diaphragms

99

Plancks constant

p-germanium (Hall effect) 231, 232

n-germanium (Hall effect)

Pendulum oscillations
Pendulum

106

207, 209

209, 228

34, 35

Optic axis

Multiplicity

Metastable states

192
157, 158

128, 129

Mathematical pendulum 36, 38, 39

Maxwell relationship

Peltier coefficient

Mole volumes

213

Maxwell disk

Pauli method

234

51

59

Mathies rule

154

Normal Hall effect

Mohr balance

223

Material waves

No-load operation

88, 95

247, 254, 255

Mass-spring system

Modulus of elasticity

179

109

Mass coverage

111
15, 47

Modulation of light

208

p-n junction

159, 160

Plancks quantum
of action

Pair formation

225, 229

Plane of polarisation

106

Pair production

226, 247

Plane parallel plate

92

Paraboloid of rotation
Parahelium
Parallel conductance

52
207, 209

Plastic flow
Plasticity

205, 206, 245

16
16, 53

192

Plate capacitor

164

Parallel springs

42

PLZT-element

111

Parallel-T filters

179

Pohls pendulum

Parallel-tuned circuit

185

Pohls plate

43, 44
92

Parent substance

214, 215

Poissons distribution

Particle energy

128, 221

Poissons ratio

15

216

Newtonian and
non-Newtonian liquid

53

Particle velocity

217

Poissons spot

74, 99, 102

130

Newtonian liquid

54

Path difference

91

Polar diagram

58

87

Neyer-Neldel rule

233

Path of a ray

88

Polarimetry

266 Laboratory Experiments Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

107

Vorspann

13.09.2006

7:32 Uhr

Seite 267

Index
Polariser
Polarizability
Polarization

106

Radioactive particles

217

RLC circuit

185

Slit

89

Radioactive radiation

225

RLC measuring bridge

189

Slope efficiency

118

Range dispersion

222

Rope wave

50

Smoothing factor

186

53

Solar cell

159

Solar ray collector

143

Solenoids

182

106, 108, 109

110, 113, 117

Raoults law

139, 140

Rotary viscometer

214, 215

Rotary motion

Polarization level

108

Rate of decay

Polarization of light

111

Polarization of microwaves

195

Ratio of attenuation/
decrement

Polarizer

109

RC filters

179

Polarizer and analyzer

195

Reaction rate

107

Polytropic equation

132

Real and virtual image

112

Positron

224

Real charges

171

Potential

164, 167

Real image

Potential difference

Reciprocal lattice

170

Potential energy

33

Potential well model of

the atomic nucleus

128, 221

Power and Work

152

Power matching

154

Precession

34, 35

Pressure

57, 138

Pressure and temperature

126

Principle of conservation
of momentum

27

Prism

89

Projectile motion

26

Propagation of a wave

49

Propagation of sound
waves

61, 71, 81

PTC

155

Pull-out method

56

Q factor

Quantisation of energy levels

Quantity of light

210

103, 104

Reflection

Radioactive decay

216, 217
223, 226

Radioactive equilibrium

128, 214
215, 221

Rotational energy

Reflection of longitudinal
waves

70

Refraction
Refractive index

92, 197
87, 89, 94, 96

Refrigerator

144

Relativistic Lorentz equation

224

16, 116, 117

178

89

Rchardts experiment

132

Rules governing selection

228

Rutherford atomic model

219

Rutherford experiment

219

Rydberg constant

246

Rydberg series

209

Sound pressure

67, 78

Sound velocity

67

Sound velocity in gases

and solids

63

Spatial and time coherence

95

Specific charge of the electron 202

Specific heat

142

Specific rotation

107

Specific thermal capacity

136

Spectra

207

Spectral lines
(shape and half width value)

95

Spectral power density

114

Spectrometer-goniometer

89

Spectroscope

89

219 ,227

Scattering of light by small

particles (Mie scattering)
Scintillation detectors

114
228, 229

Screening constant

248

Second order conductors

163

Seebeck coefficient

157, 158

Seebeck effect
(thermoelectric effect)
Selection rules
Self-inductance

Resistance to pressure

58

157

207, 209, 243, 244

Semiconductor

151, 152

43, 44, 65

60, 63, 67, 69

107

58

182, 192, 212

Sound

78

Saccharimetry

Resistance to flow

99

208, 248

Rydberg frequency

Resistance 151, 153, 185, 188, 190

Resistivity

Sonar principle

27, 29

Rowland grating

Scattering

Resonance frequency

141

113

108

106

196

66, 77, 79, 92

108, 193, 197

Rotation niveau

Reflection factor

Quarterwave plates

Radiation field

112

29, 30

Sampling theorem

Resonance

Radiation

37

Rotation

108

212

186

186

52

Reflection coefficient

Quantum number

r.m.s. value

120

Reference beam

204

249, 250, 251

256, 257, 258

Reduced length of pendulum

Quantum leap

64

88

Rectifier circuits

Resolution of optical
instruments

Quincke tube

131, 133

Recovering time and resolution

time of a counter tube
216

Remanence

182, 185, 192, 253

43, 44

Reconstruction

Relaxation

Rotating liquids

Real gas

Potential and kinetic energy 27, 82

28, 31, 32, 52

97, 101, 102

182, 190
128, 159, 160
221, 231, 232
233, 235, 236

Semiconductor
thermogenerator
Serial springs

157
42

Spectrum of emission

113

Speed of light

179

Spin

209

Spin-orbital angular
momentum interaction

207

Spin-orbit coupling

179

Spiral spring

40, 41

Spontaneous and stimulated

light emission

115

Spontaneous emission 113, 116, 117

Spring constant

17, 18, 40, 41

42, 45, 46, 48

Square wave

179

Standard deviation

216

Standing waves

115

Series connection

153

Resonator modes

117

Series-tuned circuit

185

Rest energy

252

Shear modulus

Resting energy

224

Shear stress

Restrictor valve

144

Reversible cycles

146

Shell structure of electron

shells

230

Steiners law

53

207, 209

Spinorbit interaction

Resonator cavity

25, 47

114

49, 62, 193

Statics

14

Stationary longitudinal waves

70

Stationary waves

62, 63, 66, 67

Stefan-Boltzmanns law

141
37

Reversible pendulum

37

Short circuit

154

Steiners theorem

Reynolds number

58

Single electron atom

208

Step response

179

Stereographic projection

255

Stern-Gerlach experiment

211

Stirling engine

146

Rigid body

45, 46, 48

Ring method

55

Ripple voltage

186

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

Single slit
Singlet and triplet series
Slit diffraction

72
207, 209
98

25, 45, 46

Laboratory Experiments Physics 267

Vorspann

13.09.2006

7:32 Uhr

Seite 268

Index
Stokes law

54, 201

Straight conductor
(magnetic field)

176

Stress

15

Thermoelectric e. m. f.

141
157, 158

Thermogenerator

157

Thomson coefficient

157, 158
157, 158

Uniform acceleration

82

Uniform magnetic field

156, 175

Universal gas constant

126

Universal gas constant degree

of freedom
129

Structure amplitude

250, 251

Thomson equations

Structure factor

249, 256
257, 258

Threshold energy

118

Universal gas constant

Throttling

133

Unloaded transformer

Structure of NaCl

249

Superimposition
of magnetic fields

176

Time constant
Time measurement
Torque

Superimposition
of sound waves

61, 81

Superposition of waves

70, 77
79, 80

Surface adhesion
Surface charge density
Surface energy

Surface tension

16, 29, 34, 35

40, 41, 44, 47, 175

Torque and restoring torque

Torsion modulus

16, 47, 48
43, 44

168, 169
170

Torsional vibration

40, 41, 43, 44

45, 46, 47, 48

55, 56

Total reflection

26

Transfer function

197

Transformer

Sweep

192

Transistor
Transit time

118, 197

Trajectory parabola

Surface waves

187

Transmission
88

Temperature

57, 130, 138

Temperature amplitude
attenuation
Temperature dependence

145
69
141

Temperature dependence
of resistors and diodes

155

Temperature gradient

142

Term diagram

225

Terminal voltage

154

Terrestrial gravitational
acceleration

37

Testoring torque

44

The Bragg equation

237, 238, 239

240, 243, 244
245, 248, 251, 252

Thermal
Thermal capacity

49, 50, 62, 63, 64, 67

68, 69, 70, 87, 9094, 96,
179, 193, 256, 257, 258

159, 160, 231, 232

233, 235, 236

Van der Waals equation

131, 133

Weak interaction

13
13

Van der Waals force

133

Weight resolution

Vant Hoff law

137

Vant Hoff factor

140

Weiss molecular magnetic

fields

Vaporisation enthalpy

144

Wheatstone bridge

118

Vapour pressure of water 137, 138

Wire loop

173, 174

Variable g-pendulum

Work function

205, 206

Velocity

38, 39
19, 20, 21, 22

Velocity gradient

49, 195
128, 197, 221
114
58

87, 94, 118

60, 63, 67,69

Velocity of sound in air

Velocity of sound
in liquids

64
67, 68, 69

Velocity of ultrasonics

68

Verdets constant

Two-electron spectra

207

Vernier

Two-electron systems: He, Hg

209

Vibration

Two-wire field

211

Vibration niveau

53

Velocity of light
Velocity of sound

64

130

110
13
47, 48
113

Vibration of strings

59

Virtual image

88

Virtual light source 90, 94, 96, 179

67, 68, 69, 70, 71
72, 73, 74, 75, 76
78, 79, 80, 81

Viscometer

53, 54

Viscosity

53, 54, 201

Viscosity measurements

54

Viscosity of Newtonian
and non-Newtonian liquids

53

X
X-ray 230, 231, 232, 233, 237, 238
239, 240, 241, 242,243, 244
245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251
252, 253, 254, 255, 256, 257, 258
X-ray bremsstrahlung

248

X-ray dosimetry

253

X-Ray Experiments, Handbook 259

X-ray fluorescence

X-ray tube

Y
Z

Youngs modulus

79

Voltage

Thermal expansion

125

Ultrasonic velocity

78

Voltage doubling

186

Zeeman effect

Thermal pump

146

Ultrasonic waves

Voltage source

154

Zener effect

Thermal radiation

145

Uncertainty of location

97

Voltage stabilisation

186

Zone construction

Thermal tension coefficient

126

Uncertainty of momentum

97

Volume

268 Laboratory Experiments Physics

70, 77

208
153, 164, 167

126, 138

254, 255

X-ray spectral analysis

Ultrasonic MichelsonInterferometer

Visible spectral range

230

X-ray radiation

131

Thermal equation of state

153, 189

187

81

136

179

Wien-Robinson bridge

Ultrasonic Doppler effect

Thermal energy

64, 107

Weight

80

132

225

Weber-Fechner law

Ultrasonic diffraction

Thermal capacity of gases

97

138, 144

115

Ultrasonic

50

Wave-particle dualism

Velocity distribution

Turbulent flow

Wave equation

Vapour pressure

Transverse and longitudinal

resonator modes

142
125, 136, 145

Valence band

49, 50, 66, 70

160

118

Turbulence

Wave

142

Transverse and longitudinal

modes

Transverse and longitudinal

waves

W
Wavelength

125

Wiedmann-Franz law

193, 197, 252

Tunnel effect

42, 66

Volume expansion of liquids

138, 144

220, 228

Transverse wave

Temperature dependence
of resistances

Use of an interface

51

Vaporization

180, 182

Transition probability

Telescope

43

Torsion pendulum

52

180

13

56

55, 56

Surface of rotating liquids

165, 166

126, 128

Volume expansion

Z diode

Zone plate

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG D - 37070 Gttingen

230

238, 239, 245

15

155
210, 212
155
75
75, 93

Vorspann

13.09.2006

7:32 Uhr

Seite 269

Send to Fax No. (00 49) 5 51 60 4115

or by post
or contact our local representative

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG

D-37070 Gttingen
Federal Republic of Germany

Information / Quotation

Address of institution

Please send detailed descriptions, free of charge

Please send an offer for the following experiments

Telephone

Date

Fax

Signature

Please circle the corresponding experiment numbers

1.1.01-00

1.2.01-00

1.2.02-00

1.2.03-00

1.3.01-01

1.3.01-11

1.3.03-01/05

1.3.03-11/15

1.3.05-01/05

1.3.05-11/15

1.3.07-01

1.3.07-11

1.3.09-11

1.3.11-00

1.3.12-00

1.3.13-01

1.3.13-11

1.3.15-00

1.3.16-01

1.3.16-11

1.3.18-00

1.3.19-00

1.3.20-00

1.3.21-00

1.3.22-00

1.3.23-01

1.3.23-11

1.3.25-01

1.3.25-11

1.3.26-11

1.3.27-01

1.3.27-11

1.3.28-01

1.3.28-11

1.3.30-00

1.3.31-00

1.3.32-00

1.3.33-00

1.4.01-00

1.4.02-00

1.4.03-00

1.4.04-00

1.4.05-00

1.4-06-11

1.4.07-00

1.4.08-00

1.5.01-00

1.5.03-11

1.5.04-01/11

1.5.05-15

1.5.06-01/15

1.5.07-01/15

1.5.08-11

1.5.09-11

1.5.10-00

1.5.11-00

1.5.12-00

1.5.13-00

1.5.14-00

1.5.15-15

1.5.16-15

1.5.17-15

1.5.18-00

1.5.19-15

1.5.20-00

1.5.21-15

1.5.22-00

1.5.23-00

1.5.24-15

2.1.01-00

2.1.02-00

2.1.03-00

2.2.01-00

2.2.02-00

2.2.03-00

2.2.04-00

2.2.05-00

2.2.06-00

2.2.07-00

2.3.01-00

2.3.02-00

2.3.03-00

2.3.04-00

2.3.05-00

2.3.06-00

2.4.02-01

2.4.02-11

2.4.04-00

2.5.01-00

2.5.02-00

2.5.03-00

2.5.04-00

2.6.01-00

2.6.02-00

2.6.03-00

2.6.04-00

2.6.05-11

2.6.07-01

2.6.08-00

2.6.09-00

2.6.10-00

2.6.11-00

2.6.12-00

3.1.01-00

3.2.01-01

3.2.01-15

3.2.02-01

3.2.02-11

3.2.03-00

3.2.04-00

3.2.05-00

3.2.06-00

3.3.01-01

3.3.01-11

3.3.02-00

3.4.01-00

3.4.02-00

3.4.04-00

3.5.01-01/15

3.5.02-00

3.6.01-00

3.6.02-00

3.6.03-00

3.6.04-01/15

4.1.01-01

4.1.01-15

4.1.02-00

4.1.03-00

4.1.04-01/15

4.1.06-01/15

4.1.07-00

4.1.08-00

4.1.09-01

4.1.09-15

4.1.11-00

4.1.12-00

4.1.13-15

4.2.01-00

4.2.02-00

4.2.02-15

4.2.03-00

4.2.04-01

4.2.04-15

4.2.05-00

4.2.06-00

4.3.01-00

4.3.02-01/15

4.3.03-01/15

4.3.04-00

4.3.05-00

4.3.06-00

4.3.07-11

4.3.08-00

4.4.01-00

4.4.02-01/15

4.4.03-01/11

4.4.04-01/11

4.4.05-01/15

4.4.06-01/11

4.4.07-00

4.4.08-00

4.4.09-01/15

4.4.10-00

4.4.11-00

4.4.12-11

4.5.02-00

4.5.04-00

4.5.05-00

4.5.06-00

4.5.08-00

4.5.09-00

5.1.01-00

5.1.02-00

5.1.03-11

5.1.03-15

5.1.04-01/05

5.1.05-01/05

5.1.06-00

5.1.07-00

5.1.08-00

5.1.10-05

5.1.11-01/11

5.1.12-00

5.1.13-00

5.2.01-01

5.2.01-11

5.2.03-11

5.2.04-00

5.2.20-15

5.2.21-01/11/15

5.2.22-01/11/15

5.2.23-01/11/15

5.2.24-01/11/15

5.2.31-00

5.2.32-00

5.2.41-01/11

5.2.42-01/11/15

5.2.44-01/11/15

5.4.45-01/11/15

5.2.46-01/11/15

5.2.47-01/11/15

5.3.01-01

5.3.01-11

5.3.02-01/11

5.3.03-00

5.3.04-01

5.3.04-11

5.4.01-00

5.4.02-00

5.4.03-00

5.4.04-00

5.4.05-00

5.4.06-00

5.4.07-00

5.4.08-00

5.4.09-00

5.4.10-00

5.4.11-00

5.4.12-00

5.4.13-00

5.4.14/15-00

5.4.16-00

5.4.17-00

5.4.18-00

5.4.19-00

5.4.20-00

5.4.21/22/23/24/25-00

5.4.26-00

5.4.27-00

Vorspann

13.09.2006

7:32 Uhr

Seite 270

Send to Fax No. (00 49) 5 51 60 4115

or by post
or contact our local representative

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG

D-37070 Gttingen
Federal Republic of Germany

Information / Quotation

Address of institution

Please send an offer for the following equipment

Telephone

Date

Equipment

Fax

Signature

Article-No.

Quantity

Vorspann

13.09.2006

7:32 Uhr

Seite 271

Send to Fax No. (00 49) 5 51 60 4115

or by post
or contact our local representative

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG

D-37070 Gttingen
Federal Republic of Germany

Information / Quotation

Address of institution

Please send detailed descriptions, free of charge

Please send an offer for the following experiments

Telephone

Date

Fax

Signature

Please circle the corresponding experiment numbers

1.1.01-00

1.2.01-00

1.2.02-00

1.2.03-00

1.3.01-01

1.3.01-11

1.3.03-01/05

1.3.03-11/15

1.3.05-01/05

1.3.05-11/15

1.3.07-01

1.3.07-11

1.3.09-01

1.3.11-00

1.3.12-00

1.3.13-01

1.3.13-11

1.3.15-00

1.3.16-01

1.3.16-11

1.3.18-00

1.3.19-00

1.3.20-00

1.3.21-00

1.3.22-00

1.3.23-01

1.3.23-11

1.3.25-01

1.3.25-11

1.3.26-11

1.3.27-01

1.3.27-11

1.3.28-01

1.3.28-11

1.3.30-00

1.3.31-00

1.3.32-00

1.3.33-00

1.4.01-00

1.4.02-00

1.4.03-00

1.4.04-00

1.4.05-00

1.4-06-11

1.4.07-00

1.4.08-00

1.5.01-00

1.5.03-11

1.5.04-01/11

1.5.05-15

1.5.06-01/15

1.5.07-01/15

1.5.08-11

1.5.09-11

1.5.10-00

1.5.11-00

1.5.12-00

1.5.13-00

1.5.14-00

1.5.15-15

1.5.16-15

1.5.17-15

1.5.18-00

1.5.19-15

1.5.20-00

1.5.21-15

1.5.22-00

1.5.23-00

1.5.24-15

2.1.01-00

2.1.02-00

2.1.03-00

2.2.01-00

2.2.02-00

2.2.03-00

2.2.04-00

2.2.05-00

2.2.06-00

2.2.07-00

2.3.01-00

2.3.02-00

2.3.03-00

2.3.04-00

2.3.05-00

2.3.06-00

2.4.02-01

2.4.02-11

2.4.04-00

2.5.01-00

2.5.02-00

2.5.03-00

2.5.04-00

2.6.01-00

2.6.02-00

2.6.03-00

2.6.04-00

2.6.05-11

2.6.07-01

2.6.08-00

2.6.09-00

2.6.10-00

2.6.11-00

2.6.12-00

3.1.01-00

3.2.01-01

3.2.01-15

3.2.02-01

3.2.02-11

3.2.03-00

3.2.04-00

3.2.05-00

3.2.06-00

3.3.01-01

3.3.01-11

3.3.02-00

3.4.01-00

3.4.02-00

3.4.04-00

3.5.01-01/15

3.5.02-00

3.6.01-00

3.6.02-00

3.6.03-00

3.6.04-01/15

4.1.01-01

4.1.01-15

4.1.02-00

4.1.03-00

4.1.04-01/15

4.1.06-01/15

4.1.07-00

4.1.08-00

4.1.09-01

4.1.09-15

4.1.11-00

4.1.12-00

4.1.13-15

4.2.01-00

4.2.02-00

4.2.02-15

4.2.03-00

4.2.04-01

4.2.04-15

4.2.05-00

4.2.06-00

4.3.01-00

4.3.02-01/15

4.3.03-01/15

4.3.04-00

4.3.05-00

4.3.06-00

4.3.07-11

4.3.08-00

4.4.01-00

4.4.02-01/15

4.4.03-01/11

4.4.04-01/11

4.4.05-01/15

4.4.06-01/11

4.4.07-00

4.4.08-00

4.4.09-01/15

4.4.10-00

4.4.11-00

4.4.12-11

4.5.02-00

4.5.04-00

4.5.05-00

4.5.06-00

4.5.08-00

4.5.09-00

5.1.01-00

5.1.02-00

5.1.03-11

5.1.03-15

5.1.04-01/05

5.1.05-01/05

5.1.06-00

5.1.07-00

5.1.08-00

5.1.10-05

5.1.11-01/11

5.1.12-00

5.1.13-00

5.2.01-01

5.2.01-11

5.2.03-11

5.2.04-00

5.2.20-15

5.2.21-01/11/15

5.2.22-01/11/15

5.2.23-01/11/15

5.2.24-01/11/15

5.2.31-00

5.2.32-00

5.2.41-01/11

5.2.42-01/11/15

5.2.44-01/11/15

5.4.45-01/11/15

5.2.46-01/11/15

5.2.47-01/11/15

5.3.01-01

5.3.01-11

5.3.02-01/11

5.3.03-00

5.3.04-01

5.3.04-11

5.4.01-00

5.4.02-00

5.4.03-00

5.4.04-00

5.4.05-00

5.4.06-00

5.4.07-00

5.4.08-00

5.4.09-00

5.4.10-00

5.4.11-00

5.4.12-00

5.4.13-00

5.4.14/15-00

5.4.16-00

5.4.17-00

5.4.18-00

5.4.19-00

5.4.20-00

5.4.21-00

5.4.22-00

5.4.23-00

5.4.24-00

5.4.25-00

5.4.26-00

5.4.27-00

Vorspann

13.09.2006

7:32 Uhr

Seite 272

Send to Fax No. (00 49) 5 51 60 4115

or by post
or contact our local representative

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG

D-37070 Gttingen
Federal Republic of Germany

Information / Quotation

Address of institution

Please send an offer for the following equipment

Telephone

Date

Equipment

Fax

Signature

Article-No.

Quantity

Vorspann

12.09.2006

23:39 Uhr

Seite 273

catalogues, brochures
and more
PHYSICS CHEMISTRY BIOLOGY
The comprehensive catalogue for physics, chemistry
and biology. Additionally you can find a large number of
laboratory materials and an insight in our particularly
successful teaching systems TESS, Cobra3 and
Natural Sciences on the board.
Available in English and Spanish.

Laboratory Experiments
The experiments in the Phywe publication series Laboratory Experiments
are intended for the heads of laboratories,
colleges of advanced technology, technical
colleges and similar institutions and also
for advanced courses in high schools.
Laboratory Experiments Physics is
also available on CD-ROM.
Available in English.
For the student system Advanced Optics
and Laser Physics a special brochure
is available in English.
Special brochures
Additionally there are special brochures for our particularly successful
teaching systems TESS (available in
German, English, French and Spanish),
Cobra3 (available in German, English)
and Natural Sciences on the board
(available in German, English).

Vorspann

12.09.2006

23:39 Uhr

Seite 274

Phywe Systeme GmbH & Co. KG

Robert-Bosch-Breite 10
D-37079 Gttingen
Germany
phone: ++49/551/604-0
fax: ++49/551/604-115
www.phywe.com
[email protected]

09.06.08

Order No. 16505.32 3 rd edition